Shop Control 8

User Guide

Abril / 2007
Shop Control 8

For your safety, write down the serial number of your Shop Control 8 here.

Serial Number: __________________________________________

IdealSoft – Trunci & Trunci Ltd.

Professor Brandão Street, 281 - Alto da XV
Curitiba / PR
80040-010

Phones
Exclusive for technical support: (41) 3013-3363
Exclusive for commercial service: (41) 3013-1161

E-mails:
Suporte Técnico: suporte@[Link]
Comercial: idealsoft@[Link]

Technical Support Hours

From Monday to Friday from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM
Corporate version users have extended support from Monday to Friday from 5:00 PM to 9:00 PM and
on Saturdays from 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM (via cell phone).

[Link]

Shop Control and IdealSoft are registered trademarks of Trunci and Trunci Ltda. Microsoft, Windows, and SQL Server are trademarks of
Microsoft Corp. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe. Other mentioned trademarks are owned by their respective manufacturers.

3
About IdealSoft and Shop Control 8
Technical Support and Training
IdealSoft provides technical support services via phone or email, directly to
Shop Control users.
IdealSoft also trains consultants across the country to provide support to users. Check it out.
on our page which consultants are trained in your region. When you need support
We always recommend checking if the consultant is on our page.
IdealSoft cannot be held responsible for the quality of the services provided by these.
consultants.
Technical Support via Mobile
IdealSoft provides support for clients running the Corporate or Corporate version.
Plus by cell phone (41) 9996-4774. The service hours for this are from Monday to Friday from
5:00 PM to 9:00 PM and on Saturdays from 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM.
This service will be available 24 hours after the registration of your system with technical support.
The service by mobile phone will not provide passwords for release.
system registration.
100-day Technical Support Period - Shop Control 8
Advanced
From the date of registration of your Shop Control, IdealSoft will offer 100 days of support.
free technical support by phone (call at the customer's expense) or email.
When this period is coming to an end, IdealSoft will send a bank slip by mail.
with a special offer to extend this support.
Updates on the Internet, support, and other services are available only to users.
with technical support up to date.

Renewal of Mandatory License - Shop Control 8

Corporate
For the Corporate version, it is mandatory to renew the license every 4 months, starting from the date of
system registration.
In the case of non-renewal, Shop Control will only have the available functions.
in the Advanced version, including regarding the operation of accessory modules and
network licenses, such as: release for more than 05 users, Industry Modules,
Bridge, Pocket PC, Franchise, Advanced Commissions, Advanced Purchases, Loyalty, among
others.
Shop Control 8 Corporate PLUS
For the Corporate Plus version, renewing the license every 3 months is mandatory, starting from the
system registration date. The renewal fee varies according to the number of licenses
network. Consult IdealSoft for cost information.
One of the most notable features of the Corporate PLUS version is the ability to install the
system with online branches. IdealSoft used exclusive development techniques that
allows Shop Control 8 to be used online in multiple stores at the same time. The
the system will run as if it were on a local network and will use a single database, in
office and in the stores that you determine.
Updates
By keeping your support up to date, you will be able to find updates for Shop Control 8 on the website.
from IdealSoft. Regularly check the website for the latest news and updates from
Shop Control 8.

4
 Maximum Database Size:
Along with Shop Control 8, SQL 2005 Express will be installed. This is a version
reduced from Microsoft's SQL Server that offers enormous security, excellent performance
and can be distributed along with Shop Control 8.
This version can control the database of up to 4GB (approximately 4000 MB). This size is
sufficient for several years of movement with thousands of products.

Comparative Table between the Versions

Attention: See the complete table on the website.

Functions Adv Corp Corp

Plus
Basic Registrations
Classe e Subclasse X X X
Group and Family X X
Fabricante, Cor, Tamanho, Pesquisa 1, Pesquisa 2 e Pesquisa 3 X X X
Deposit Order Field in Class X X
Tax classification X X X
Message for receipt X X X
Registration of boxes X X X
Boxes - Employee who has access X X
Bank registration X X X
Bank Account Registration X X X
Bank accounts - information for payment slips X X X
Bank accounts: credit limit, branch to which it belongs, type of account and X X
employees who have access to the account
Card registration (credit and debit) X X X
Card registration (agreement) X X
Types of Protests, cost center and departments X X
Chart of accounts in three levels

Customer Registration
Address for general, billing, and delivery X X X
Routine for re-evaluation and credit limit X X
Specific fields for business registration X X
Routine for registration approval X
Exclusive client of a branch X X
Search by city, date of last purchase, and registration. X X

5
Direct mail: printing letters and sending emails X X
Product Registration
Normal products, with size and with edition X X X
Products with series and with batch X X
Tax class X X X
Tax class - registration of taxes by operation and ICMS X X
Deferred
Summary of the latest movements X X X
Blocked for sale and blocked for any movement X X
Promotional Price X X
Product codes 2 3 3
Special routine for product fractionation X X
Allows name complement in the output X X
Registration of supplier codes for products with size range X X
Prices
Calculation of complete and simplified cost X X X
Table rescheduling
X X X
Remark several tables X X
Allows definition of the payment plan by table X X
Sales
Configurable sales/output screen numbers 3 5 5
Available layouts 2 5 5
Price table and sellers by products X X
Control of goods shipping X X X
Seller 2 and Commissioned X X
Future Delivery Sale X X
Expedition Screen X
Single receipt screen (exclusive for cash register) X X
Payment with multiple cards, in the same sale X X X
Receipt of checks and fixed monthly installments X X X
Does not allow change for receipts other than cash X X
Receiving with customer credit, directly from the outgoing screen X X
Compras
Registration of products and suppliers, directly from the Entries screen X X X
Product information button X X X

6
Place orders and turn them into purchases X X X
Order board X X
Generation of anticipated accounts X X
Verification and calculation of the selling price, directly from the Entries screen X X
Services
Do not allow changing the price of the service X X X
Complete service order X X
Other Movements
Stock transfer and counting
X X X
Stock transfer with receipt confirmation X
Reservation of goods X X
Orders X X
Simplified screen for exchanging goods X X
Assignments: generates settlement operations, refunds, and new assignments X X X
Financial
Source Button X X X
Launch and maintenance of accounts receivable, checks, cards, and account
client X X X
Bank transactions: keeps date, account, and type of document. X X X
Bank Transactions: type of account and branch to which it belongs. X X
Cashier: generates several accounts payable at the debit launch and X X
transfer of documents (checks and cards) between cashiers
Cashier: transfer of checks to account. X X X
Report of balance of all cash registers X X
Control of third-party checks X X
X
Competence date X X
Customer and company credit control with suppliers X X X
Discount on accounts receivable (invoices) X X
checks and custody of checks X X
Control of vouchers for employees X X
Billing System X X
Office
Phone book, notes, and to do X X X
Schedule of appointments X X X
Messages between employees X X
Notas com texto criptografado X X
Documents 10 X X

7
Notice Board X X X
System Security and Backup
Employee access registration, with detailing of the screens and X X X
functions that have access
Screens: user change X X X
Branch Exchange X X
Open day and Close day X
Backup with SQL connected and backup scheduling. X X
Daily backup scheduling and informative email sending X
Reports
Markup Report X X X
Sales Report by Payment Type, Sales, Stocks, X X X
Accounts payable and receivable, Commissions, Inventory monitoring,
Movimentação do Produto, Inventário, Compras por fornecedor, Vendas
Monitoring,
Analysis of accounts receivable, Sales in various periods, Sales of X X
several branches, Product sales by customer, Products without
Movement, Income Statement for multiple periods,
Produtos a comprar por demanda, Estatísticas de Orçamento
Others
System appearance 2 10 10
My Menu X X X
Group grids by columns X X X
Record arrangement of the grids X X
Configuration of invoice layouts, tickets, payment slips, bills, and receipts X X X
Sending emails through the screens: Entry, Sales/Outputs, Quotations and X X X
Transfer
Products Sold Separately
Network license (available in packages) 5 20 100
Modules: CNAB and Label X X X
Módulos: Bridge, Indústria, Pocket PC X X
Modules: Franchise. Advanced Commissions, Advanced Purchases and X X
Fidelity
Shop Control 2 Fiscal X X X
Renewal of mandatory license X X

8
Sizing your server
Before using Shop Control 8 on a network, read this chapter carefully. In it you will find
useful information that will help achieve better performance in using the system. We will include
observations on processor speed, operating system, and amount of memory.
Shop Control 8 uses the standard SQL 2005 Express database and therefore it is a system
client/server. This means that when a station requests information from the system (a
product, report, or record an operation), part of the processing will be done by the server.
Choosing the right server can increase the speed of data processing.
Shop Control 8. To do this, observe the following points:
Number of products: The more products registered, the larger your database will be.
Users on the network: The more users on the network, the more requests will be made to the server. Despite
Although they are not the only factors that influence speed, they are the main ones. A store that
there are few products, but it makes hundreds of sales a day, for example, it should fit in
a higher level of speed.
See below the processor speed, operating system and memory settings
recommended for each situation. This would be an excellent situation. Shop Control 8 will run with
machines slower than the ones shown here.

Processor speed
Quantity of Registered Products Qtde. Usuários Server Processor Speed
up to 3000 up to 3 1.2
up to 3000 from 4 to 7 1.6
up to 3000 8 or more 2.0
from 3000 to 10000 up to 3 1.6
from 3000 to 10000 from 4 to 7 2.0
from 3000 to 10000 8 or more 2.8
from 10000 to 40000 up to 3 2.0
from 10000 to 40000 from 4 to 7 2.8
from 10,000 to 40,000 8 or more 3.1
above 40000 any amount 3.1

Amount of RAM in the server

The use of memory in Client/Server type systems is designed to provide the best
possible performance. When a station requests data from the server, it checks if the data is already
it is in memory, if it is not, it will fetch it from the disk, send the data to the station and store a
copy in memory. The next time this data is requested, the server will have it in memory and
will respond in much less time (since the memory is more than 100 times faster than the
disco).
Analyzing this situation, we arrived at two important conclusions.
• Shop Control gets faster throughout the day. This is true and possible.
to realize in systems with large databases that the first queries take longer
It takes time, but soon the speed improves a lot and stays that way until the server is turned off.
• The more memory, the better. This is also true as the database keeps growing.
few, stored in memory. Just as a curiosity, when a station records a
Given, this is immediately recorded on the disk and in memory.
With the above observations, what can be concluded is that the larger the memory and the more
The longer the server stays on, the faster the system will run.

9
 Try to size your server's memory with an adequate amount to accommodate the
operating system and the database.
For example, on a server running Windows 2000 Professional and with a database
(about the size of the files S8_Real.MDF and S8_Real_Log.LDF) of 500 MB, we suggest
something around 640 MB of RAM (140 for Windows and 500 for the database). It's logical
that Shop Control can work with less memory than this, we are showing a
ideal situation. Remember that you may use other applications on your server,
decreasing the free memory for SQL.
The operating system (or version of Windows) being used on the server is also
important in the final result.
Healthy habits regarding the server
• Do not use the server. If possible, leave the server idle, without using it. When running something
By using an application on the server, you will be reducing the available processor time for the
database manager (SQL). Thus, the risk of the application freezing and being avoided is also mitigated.
It is necessary to restart the server.
• Make reliable backups. Backup copies are important and should always be made. Use
reliable media such as CD or DVD.
• Do not turn off the server. If possible, keep the server on 24 hours a day. This will allow usage.
efficient memory and increased system speed.
• Your company is growing, and what about your server? Perhaps your server is highly adequate today, but
over time, there may be more stations connected to the network and the database will be
always crescendo. Update your server when necessary.

10
Installing Shop Control 8
Before installing Shop Control 8, check the following procedures:
• If you have Shop Control 7 installed, we recommend that a backup of the database be made.
system data before starting the installation.
• We recommend that the accounts receivable and payable reports be printed or exported.
and the other reports that are frequently used.
• If you use the Bridgemodule, we recommend that you perform exports and imports, leaving
the updated data.
• We recommend that you close all programs that are open in the taskbar.
Windows.
• There are some antivirus programs that block the installation of system executables, that's why
We recommend that the antivirus be disabled before the installation of the system.
Minimum computer configuration
The minimum computer configuration to run Shop Control 8 is:
• Pentium 750 MHz or faster
• 512 MB of RAM or more
• 2 GB of free disk space
• Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (the service pack must
it must be installed and can be downloaded from Microsoft's website, if you do not have it.
• Windows 2003, Windows Vista Pre-RC1, RC1 or later can also be used.
Attention: We remind you that this data is the minimum requirements needed to run the Shop
Control 8. Computers with a faster configuration provide better performance.
of the system. Shop Control 8 does not work with Windows Starter Edition.

What will be installed with Shop Control 8

Shop Control 8 uses the standard SQL Server database. The installation of SQL 2005 Express
it is included in the installation of Shop Control 8. For SQL 2005 Express to work is
It is necessary for your Windows to have the MDAC components and Windows Installer 3.1
installed.
Depending on the version of Windows and the software installed on the computer, these
components may already be installed, otherwise the automatic installation of these will be performed
components with Shop Control 8.
Installing
Place the Shop Control 8 CD in the CD drive, the installation will start automatically.
If this does not occur, click on the Windows Start menu, on the Run option, in the field
Open the drive D: \[Link]. (Normally, the letter D belongs to the CD drive).

Installing the MDAC

A instalação do MDAC ocorrerá em alguns computadores que estiverem com o Windows 2000
with SP4 (Service Pack 4) installed.
If this component is not included at the time of installing Shop Control 8, it will be made its
automatic installation. After the installation, restart the machine and begin the system installation again.

Windows Installer 3.1

The Windows Installer 3.1 will be installed automatically on all versions of Windows
that do not have this component installed. Afterwards, the machine will be restarted automatically.
Restart the system installation.

11
 Contract
At the time of the system installation, a notice about the license agreement will be displayed.
Shop Control 8. The contract is the envelope that contains the CD and serial number. This must be
I read it before highlighting it to get the CD. On this screen, confirm the reading.

Installation Options
When starting the installation of Shop Control 8, a screen will appear to select the type of
installation. You can choose from the following options:

Single-user or Network Server

Select this option to install the Shop Control 8 database. Use this option.
when only one machine will use the system or, for network installation, when it is the
server.
We recommend that the computer to be used as a server is the machine that has the
better performance of your network and fewer access attempts.

Local Area Network Station

Selecione esta opção para fazer a instalação dos componentes utilizados pelo sistema. Esta
Installation will be done on the machines that access the server's database.
Network station via Internet (Corporate Plus Version)
Select this option to install the components and executables of the system. The
SQL Server will not be installed. This installation is necessary for the remote stations, which will
access the system's database over the Internet.
Installation of Framework 2.0
Framework 2.0 will be installed for the operation of SQL 2005 Express and the Shop.
Control 8. This installation will occur whenever the machine does not have Framework 2.0 installed.
and it may take up to 15 (fifteen) minutes.

Installation of SQL 2005 Express - Database

The installation of SQL 2005 Express will be done when choosing the installation as Single User.
or Network Server. This installation may take up to 15 (fifteen) minutes depending on the
machine configuration.
Attention: SQL will not install if your computer is configured to compress the disk.
to save space. This option should be unchecked.
Installation of Shop Control 8
The installation of Shop Control 8 will be done after that of SQL 2005 Express. After the installation
restart the machine before opening the system.

12
Network Configuration
To use the network system, it must be configured with the TCP/IP protocol, according to
described in the box.
IdealSoft recommends using only the TCP/IP protocol. The use of more than one protocol
the network can, in some cases, cause conflicts and make some programs not
function correctly.

To set up your network with the TCP/IP protocol

The procedures and settings presented may be different among Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows 2003, and Windows Vista.
• Click on the Start menu/Settings/Control Panel;
• Double click on Network Connections;
• Right-click on the Local Connection icon;
• Then click on the Properties option;
• Double click on TCP/IP Protocol;
• It will open the TCP/IP protocol Properties screen, as shown in the screen below;

Setting a fixed IP on the server

The IP address is a unique identifier for each machine on the network. To avoid conflicts with
Internet addresses we will use the IP address as base 192.168.0 and for the Mask of
the subnet is normally [Link].
Example
On the server configured with the IP [Link]
At the first station use the IP [Link]
On the second station use the IP [Link]
And so on, for other stations.
Testing the TCP/IP network
Check the communication of the stations with the server. Note the name and the registered IP in
server to perform the following test.
Example: Let's consider that the server's name is Server and the IP address is [Link].
as we recommended above.
• Click on the Start menu/Programs/Accessories/Command Prompt;
• In the Start menu/Run, type CMD and press (Enter);

13
• When you open the DOS screen, type ping [Link] (Enter).
• You can perform this test using the server name, in this case type ping server (Enter).
• The following data will be displayed:

If the response received is Host Unknown or Host unreachable, the network configurations
are not correct. In this case, you will have to redo the network configuration.
If the response obtained is the same as the message shown above, you can use the application.
Configure Network to set up the server and station. For more information, consult
the chapter Configures network.

14
Configure Network
This application is used to configure the system to be used on a local network. With it,
you will be able to configure the server and the station.

To open this utility

- Click on the Start menu/Programs/Shop Control 8, in the option Configure network. Upon opening the
the buttons Server and Station will appear, click on the option related to your installation.

Setting up the server

This utility should be run first on the server, in order to then configure the
stations. Perform the following procedures:
Server
Click this button to configure the server. It will open the screen shown below.

Select the SQL that contains the Shop database.

Control 8
In this table, select the row corresponding to SQL 2005.
Change Port
Click this button to inform or change the port that will be used by SQL.
The standard installation does not configure a port. For it to work correctly over the network, SQL
A door needs to be configured.
Clicking this button will show options for configuring the ports, according to
explained on the screen.

Select the IP of this computer

In this field, click the arrow next to select the server's IP.
Place where Shop 8 is installed
This field will be automatically filled with the path of the location where it is installed
Shop Control 8.
Configure the Server
Click this button to make the configuration selected above. Clicking this button will
created a file named [Link], inside the folder where Shop Control 8 is
It is installed. This file will be used to configure the stations on the network.

15
Setting up the Station
After configuring the server, set up the network on the station. For this, it is necessary that the
the system has been installed on this computer as a Local Network Station.
Station
Click this button to set up your station. The screen shown below will open.

Please provide the path where Shop 8 is located on the server.

In this field, provide the folder where Shop Control 8 is installed on the server. Click the button
Search to locate the folder on the server, over the network. As per the example mentioned, it will be:
\Server\Shop8.
Proceed
Click this button after locating the Shop Control 8 folder on the server. The fields
In the configuration frame to be created, will be automatically filled with the data from
server. Check if the data is correct.
Set up the Station
Click this button to configure the station with the shortcut and the data on the server.

Setting up the network station via the internet

(Available only for Corporate Plus versions)
In the stations that will access the system via Internet (online branches), install the system as
Station via Internet make the settings.
Recommendations
• Fixed internet IP on the server.
• That ports 1433 and 1434, or any other port that can be used by SQL, are open.
it is mandatory to have an open port for SQL access via the Internet. Check with the provider for
Internet, which port can be used.
• Check with technical support what is the best speed to use your system via
Internet.
Configuration
To configure the system, at the internet station, it is necessary to know the internet IP of the
server.

16
 To configure the net station:
• Go to the Start/Run menu;
• In the Open field, type click on the config and click OK;
• It will open the Network Utility screen for SQL Server clients;
• Click the Add button;
• In the server Alias field, enter the Internet IP number of the server. Example:
[Link], if you don't know your server's IP, please contact the administrator of the
your network;
• In the networkLibrary frame, select the TCP/IP field;
• In the Connection Parameters section, uncheck the option to Determine the port dynamically;
• It will enable the field 'Port number', in this field provide the port number that is being
used for Internet communication. Example: 1433.
• Clique emOKpara confirmar a configuração.
• Then click on the Start menu/Programs/Accessories/Windows Explorer;
• Double click on My Computer;
• Localize a pasta onde está instalado o Shop Control 8;
• Localize the file [Link];
• Double click to open the file, as shown below.

• Delete the machine name that appears on the first line and enter the Internet IP number of the
server. Example: [Link]
• Click on the File menu and then Save.
• Next, close the file.
• Then log into the system.

17
Backup Program
The backup program aims to create a security copy of your database.
We recommend that the backup be done daily to keep it always updated.
less than two storage units, such as on the hard drive of another
computer and on a reliable medium, such as CD or DVD. We do not recommend the use of
disks for backup storage.
Attention: The backup must be done on the server where the database is located.

Differences in the backup procedure between the

versions
Corporate
For the Corporate versions, it is possible to perform a backup with SQL connected and also schedule one.
time for the backup to be done automatically.
Attention: If the backup was made with SQL turned off, at the moment it is
to restore it, it must be turned off.
Corporate Plus
For the Corporate Plus version, it is possible to schedule daily for automatic backup.
configure to test the backup and send the result by email.
Advanced
In the Advanced version, it is mandatory that SQL is turned off, both for making and for
restore the backup.
To turn off the SQL:
• Go to the Start menu / Programs / Microsoft SQL Server 2005 / Configuration Tools / Sql
Server Configuration Manager;
• Click on the option SQL Server 2005 Services;
• Click on the SQL Server (SQL2005) option that appears on the right side of the screen;
• In the toolbar above, click on Stop.
To connect the SQL:
• Go to the Start menu / Programs / Microsoft SQL Server 2005 / Configuration Tools / Sql
Server Configuration Manager
• Click on the SQL Server 2005 Services option;
• Click on the SQL Server (SQL2005) option, which appears on the right side of the screen;
• In the toolbar above, click on Start.

Make the Backup

Access the Backup program through the Start menu / Programs / Shop Control 8 /
Backup program.
In the backup section, select the items you want to save.
Items to copy
In this section, select the data that will be saved in the backup.
Base real: This option is already checked by default, and it will back up the database that
has the company's real data.
Test database: Select this option to back up the database used for making
tests in the system.

18
Configuration Files: Select this option to back up tickets, invoices and
label configuration, among others.
Bridge file (ES8): Select this option to back up the generated files
by bridge. The Bridge module is sold separately.
Save Backup in
In this field, specify the path where you want to save the backup. Click the Locate button to
find the desired folder.
Attention: The backup program does not write directly to the media; it will have to save it first.
on the computer's hard drive and then copy it to a media.
Type of Backup
In this section, select the type of backup that will be made and also select a folder for
save the backup.
SQL Disabled
Select this option to back up with SQL turned off. In the Advanced version it is
the use of this option is mandatory.
Database in
In this field, specify the folder where the database is located. It is usually in C:/Shop8.
This option should be filled out when the backup option with SQL is selected.
turned off.
SQL Linked (Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option to back up with SQL on. By selecting this option it is
it is also possible to schedule for automatic backup to be done.
Scheduling
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab, set up the system to automatically back up.
Backup now: Select this option to manually back up with SQL
connected.
Schedule for: Select this option to set a date and time for the system to do the
Automatically backup. To do this, provide the date and time in the fields beside.
Daily at the time (Available for Corporate Plus version): Select this option
to set a time for the daily automatic backup. In the field next to it, enter the
time and if you want the backup to also be done on Saturdays and Sundays.
Attention: To perform the daily backup, the computer must be on and the backup program must be running.
open.
Advanced
(Available for the Corporate Plus version)
Configure this tab, if you are using the backup scheduling option, to be
notified by email about disk space, backup result and also allows to request the
automatic backup test.
Notify by email if the disk space is below
Check this option to be notified by email if the disk space is below the
informed in the field next to it.
Automatically test the generated backup file

19
 Check this option to perform an automatic test on the generated backup file. If
If any problem is found, an email will be sent to the responsible party as per
configured.
After completing the backup, send the activity log by email.
Check this option for the backup result to be sent by email. This is the same
shown in the activity log tab.
Start Copy / Schedule Copy
Click this button after selecting all items to start the data copy.

Test Backup
This tab is used to test the backup file that was generated. We recommend the use of this.
function every time you make a backup.

Open Copy of
In this field, type the path or click the Find button to locate the file.
backup that will be tested.

Test
Click this button for the system to check the backup file.

Restore Backup
This tab is used to restore the data from the backup file in the case of a reinstall.
of the system.

Open copy of
In this field, type or click the Find button to locate the backup file that will be
restored.
Restore to
In this field, type or click the Locate button to specify the folder where it will be restored.
backup. It is usually restored in C:/Shop8.
Restore
Click this button to restore the backup.

Save Configuration
This option allows you to generate a file with all the options that have been checked, so that you do not
it may be necessary to mark them again in the next backup.
To Save the Configuration:
• Go to the Backup tab, select the options you want to back up;
• Clique no botãoGrava Configuração;
Open Settings
Click this button to open the settings with the selected items to do, test and
restore the backup.

Activity log
This tab will display the information related to the last process performed in the program.
the backup.

20
Initialize the backup program at Windows startup
The backup program can be opened automatically when starting Windows.
For this, make the following configurations:
• Select the optionSQL Connected;
• In the Scheduling tab, specify the date / time of the automatic backup;
• Create a configuration, as explained below, that will be used to start the backup
with Windows;
• To create a shortcut for the Backup program to start up with Windows, follow the
instructions below:
How to configure
• Click on the Start menu / Programs;
• Right-click on the Start button, in the Explore option;
• It will open the Initializing screen;
• Click on the File menu and then on the New / Shortcut option.
• In the command line field, click the Search button;
• Double click on My Computer;
• Double click on Local Disk (C:);
• Double-click on the folder Shop 8;
• Locate the file [Link] and click the OK button;
• On the command line, it will be C:\Shop8\[Link];
• Position the mouse cursor at the end of the path;
• And type/Open configuration.SC8;
• The path will be C:\Shop8\[Link] /Open configuration.SC8;
• Then click on the Next button until you complete the shortcut.

21
Usage tips
In this chapter, we will explain the keys, buttons, and special functions that will be used in various
system screens.

Help
By clicking this icon, a screen will open that contains more information about the field to be
filled, over the screen or over the function.

Lamp
This icon will appear in the footer of some screens. It displays information about registration data and
It is also possible to check some complementary reports on the screen.

Buttons
We will explain below the use of the buttons available on the system screens.
F7 <
Click this button or press the F7 key to search for the previous record, existing on the screen.
F8 >
Click this button or press the F8 key to search for the next existing record on the screen.
Order
By pressing F7 or F8 to locate the records, you can choose whether you want the system
show the record in order of code or name.
How to perform the search
The Order frame is used to sort the search of records. The search can be done through
of the Name or of the Code.
Search by Name:
• In the Order frame, select the option Name;
• Type the first word of the record, or the beginning of the word, in the field where it is registered.
name;
• The registration with the name closest to what was typed will be shown. If this is not the one that
search, keep pressing F8 for the system to show the next registrations.
Search by Code:
• In the Order frame, select the Code option.
• Type the code you want to search for in the Code field;
• Pressione a teclaTABno teclado ou pressioneF8.
Record (F2)
Click this button or press the F2 key to save the data entered on the screens or to
confirm the changes.
Clear (F5)
Click this button or press the F5 key to clear the screen data for a new record.
Turn off
This button is used to permanently delete the record from the database.
Attention: We do not recommend deleting the records and transactions from the system, as it does not
Is it possible to reverse this operation?

22
 When deleting a registration, make sure that it has not been used in any
movement in the system, as this information will no longer appear in the prints of
reports, in the search for a sale or in the research of accounts receivable and payable. When deleting a
registration, it will be permanently deleted from the database.
Next code
This icon is used to locate the next code to be registered, it will appear in all
the registration screens of the system. In the Product registration, the system will look for the next code,
only in numerical sequence. In the Client / Supplier registration, the range will be considered
created in the screen configuration.

Floppy disk
(Available only for Corporate versions)
On the screens that contain this icon, you can change the position of the columns that are displayed in the
grade, for better visualization of your queries.
How to save the arrangement and size of the columns
The system allows you to sort the columns and define the width of each one according to its
preference.
To sort these columns:
• Click on the column title with the mouse and hold it down;
• Drag this field towards the desired column until two red arrows appear.
informing where the field will be inserted.
• Arrange all the columns as you wish;
To change the width:
• Click on the column division;
• A double arrow will appear;
• Click with the mouse, hold it down and drag to the side until the desired size.
To save the changes:
• Click on the floppy disk icon and then on the option Save the layout and size of
current columns as default for me.
Turn off the recorded layout and use the system default
This option deletes the sorting made by the employee and sorts the columns with the configuration
original of the system.
Example: One of the screens where you can check this option is the Customer Search screen.
Supplier. To view it.
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Outputs menu;
• In the client field, press the Down Arrow on the keyboard;
• You will be able to see how to use these options.

Group columns
Em algumas telas do sistema terá a opçãoArraste uma coluna para agrupa. Neste campo
you can drag the data shown in the grid to be grouped by columns.
How to group columns
The information displayed in tables can be grouped. To do this, do the following
procedure:
• Click on the column header;

23
 • Keep it clicked and drag it to the field. Drag a column to group;
• Two red arrows will appear at this moment, place the field to be done.
data grouping.
For example, on the Customer / Supplier registration screen, you can group the Contacts.
Completed.
To open the Contact screen with the given example:
• Select the option Register;
• Click on the Client / Supplier menu;
• Select a client;
• Click on the Made Contacts tab (Ctrl+F5).
To Group the Contacts Made:
• Click on the column with the mouse and hold it down;
• Drag this field to the option: Drag the column header to group;
• The table will display all data grouped by the selected column.
• To verify details click on the plus sign (+) on the left side to open the information
grouped.
To ungroup the Contacts Made:
• Click on the chosen field to group, which appears on the left side of the screen;
• Drag this field to the box, where it shows the grouped results.
How to order
The information shown in the tables can be sorted. To do this, click on the title of the
column. The columns with written information will be in alphabetical order, ascending or
decreasing. And the columns with dates will be in chronological order, ascending or descending.

Functions
We will explain some functions that facilitate and expedite the use of the system.

Data
In the date fields, you can enter the number of days for the system to fill in the date.
automatically.
Example:
• By typing the number zero (0) and pressing TAB, it will be filled with the current date.
If you enter the number 18, for example, it will be filled with eighteen days from the current date.
This option can be used frequently for recording receivable installments and in the
reports.
• To launch accounts on the same day for the next month, type 1m. When typing in the date field
In 2m or 3m he will launch on exactly the same day for two or three months respectively.
• You can also choose a date by opening the calendar. To do this, click the arrow next to the
field.
How to use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select more than
an information
The system allows the Shift and Ctrl keys to be used to select multiple lines.
on the system screens. You will be able to use this function on the accounts payable maintenance screens or the
receive, on the purchase quotation screen, among others.
Using the Shift key to select multiple lines
By pressing Shift, you can select sequential lines for the operation.

24
 How to use:
• Press the Shift key;
• Click on the first desired line and then click on the last line;
• All lines between them will be selected;
• Or, to select, click with the mouse on the first line, keep it pressed and drag
up to the last desired line.
Using the Ctrl key to select multiple lines
By pressing the Ctrl key you can select multiple random lines for the operation.
How to use:
• Press the Ctrl key;
• Select only the desired lines by clicking on each one with the mouse.
Select all rows
In the Financial module, when locating accounts receivable and payable, you can select all.
brought by the search, by clicking on this icon.

Uncheck all rows

To uncheck all selected accounts click on this icon.

Origin Button
In Finance, after finding an account, it will be possible to check its origin/history.
The option can be viewed on the screens for launching and maintaining accounts receivable and payable.
to pay.
Origin
The Origin column will appear in the search result. By clicking the gray button in the Origin column
you can check more details about the account history.
The origins can be: bank launch, account listed on the accounts receivable or payable screen,
account generated through cash movement, sale or entry.
The screens that will display the information contain other gray buttons, through which you can
also verify the registration information of the client/supplier, employee, branch, product, and
also view the exit or entry operation.
Example: On the output screen, an installment sale was made, and this installment had its value
received in the checking account. When checking the Bank Transactions screen, this credit
It will appear with the origin Receive, as this account was downloaded on the Receivable Accounts screen.
To check the details of the downloaded account, click on the Receive field in the Origin column, it will open
a screen with the account data. On this screen, they will be able to view the information about the withdrawal made, with
all information entered at the time of sale, such as: branch, customer, products and
sellers.

25
Registration Search Screen
The system provides a quick and easy way to locate the registrations. To use this
option just press Down Arrow on the keyboard on all screens and reports that indicate the
search, to locate the desired registration.
How to use the Search
In the fields, which contain the instructions, the Down Arrow opens the list next to it, the search can be made.
through one of the options below:
• Type the Code and press TAB, to display the desired registration.
• Type the Name or part of the name and press Down Arrow for the system to perform the search. There will be
all registrations that contain the typed word in the first part of the text are displayed.
• Type an asterisk (*) and part of the name and press DownArrow. The system will perform the search and
show all registrations that contain the typed word, regardless of its position within
of the name.
• You can press only DownArrow to show all the records and use the fields of
research as we will explain below.
To make your search faster and more accurate, when searching the system, type as much as possible
of possible information.
To select a name:
• The system will list one or more registrations with the entered information;
• Use the navigation arrows on the keyboard to go to the desired registration;
• Press Enter to select the record.
• Or double-click with the mouse on the desired line to select the record.
The system offers a more detailed search for Products and Customers / Suppliers, for
check the chapters Search screen Customers / Suppliers and Search screen of
Product to follow.

26
Customer Search Screen /
Suppliers
In this chapter, we will explain how to create, configure, and use the client search screen.
Supplier. This search can be used on any screen that contains the Client field.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement, for example;
• Click on the Outputs menu, choose one of the output screens in the Client field and press
Settle Down.

Configure this screen

On this screen define the options and fields that will be used in the search for the Client /
Supplier.
Show panel with search options
Check this box to display the search options on the screenFind Client /
Supplier. This option unlocks the following search fields: clients, suppliers,
carriers, commissioned, resellers, others and the extra fields for the search (code,
fantasy, CNPJ / RG, phone, address and neighborhood.
When searching for records, in addition to the name look for
In this table, select which options, besides the code and the name, you want the system to
consider searching for the Client / Supplier registration by entering information.
Phones: Select this option to allow searching by the registered phone number.
CNPJ / CPF: Select this option to allow searching by the registered CNPJ / CPF.
Fantasy: Select this option to allow searching by the registered fantasy name.
On the Client / Supplier Search screen, fields will appear marked.
automatically, in the frameType. At the time of the search, you can change this selection, to the
search for two records.

Extra fields displayed

In this table, select the options that will be displayed in the grid with the search results.
City: Check this option to show the City in the grid.
Fantasy: Check this option to show the fantasy name in the grid.
CNPJ / CPF: Select this option to display the CNPJ / CPF in the grid.
Registration: Select this option to show the State Registration or the ID in the grid.
State: Check this option to show the State in the grid.
Phone 1: Check this option to show Phone 1 on the grid.
Phone 2: Check this option to show Phone 2 on the grid.
Type: Check this option to show the registration Type, which can be:

Type Name Tipo Name

C Client T Carrier
F Supplier A Commissioned
R Resale O Others

27
 Record
Click this button to save the settings. For the new settings to work,
close the screen and enter again.

Find Client / Supplier

To locate the Client / Supplier, you can use the following options:
• In the Client / Supplier field, enter the code corresponding to the desired registration.
• In the Client / Supplier field, type the beginning of the name and press Down Arrow to show
all registrations related to the entered name.
• Example: If you want to search by Customer Name, type the * (asterisk) and then type the
word Paula. The system will show all registrations that contain the word Paula.
Paulada Silva, Fabrício dePaula, AnaPaulaSantos.
• You can only press Down Arrow to display all registrations and use the fields of
research as we will explain below. We do not recommend this search, as it may vary depending on
the amount of records it can get slow.
To make your search faster and more accurate, when searching the system, type as much
of possible information.

Search (F3)
In this field, you can use the search options mentioned above and it also allows you to use the
available filters in the Type board.
Type
In this section, select the type of registration you wish to use as a filter for the search.
Clients: Select this option to show only the registered clients, with the name
informed.
Carriers: Select this option to show only the registered carriers.
with the name provided.
Suppliers: Select this option to display only the registered suppliers, with the
name provided.
Commissioned: Select this option to display only the registered commissioned ones, with
the name provided.
Reseller: Select this option to show only the registered resellers, with the name
informed.
Others: Select this option to show only the registrations with the type others.
All: Select this option to show all registrations with the provided name.
When selecting one of these options to locate the registration, position the mouse cursor on
nameField, check the name, change if necessary and press Enter or click the OK button.

Search Result
In the grid, the customers with the information provided in the search will be displayed, according to the
chosen configuration.
After locating the registration of the desired Client / Supplier, double click on the
line or press Enter, with the selected line, to continue the operation.

28
Product Search Screen
In this chapter, we will explain how to create, configure, and use the product search screen.
In the product fields, indicated with the phrase Arrow Down opens list, use the search options
to locate the registrations. You can use the Exit screen to follow our explanation,
pressingDownArrow in theProduct field.

Configure this Screen

On this screen, you can define the fields that will be used for the search, on the search screen of the
products.
Fields to Show
In this box, select the options that will be displayed in the grid, with the results of the search.
To include the fields in the grid:
• In the frame, select the fields to display, click on the field you want to add;
• In the Size field, specify the desired size for the chosen field. A size
defined as 50 represents approximately the display of 10 characters.
• Click the Include button to add the fields to the grid.
• Remember that you can adjust the column width at the time of the search.
To remove a field from the grid:
• In the panel that shows the selected fields, click on the row;
• Click the buttonRemove selected field.
Other Settings
In this tab, configure which price tables and the number of product lines you want.
show in the search results.
Price tables to display: Select the tables you want to view in the search screen.
Poderá selecionar até 3 tabelas de preços. Para não mostrar as tabelas de preços, selecione a
blank line.
Manter a última busca se for iniciado sem texto:Marque esta opção para manter a última
Research conducted, if you press DownArrow without typing any text.
Number of products to show per page: In this field, select the number of rows of
products that will be displayed per page, on the search screen. If you use the system with branches
online, to avoid slow searches, we recommend setting it to show a maximum of 10
records per page.
Advanced
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab you can enable the following options:
Search for 2 texts: Select this option to allow searching with two texts, within the
product name.
Other fields for the Search: In this box select which options, besides the code and the
name, you want the system to carry out the search.
Fabricante:Selecione esta opção para permitir fazer a busca pelo Fabricante do produto.
Note: Select this option to allow searching by the specified observation in
product registration.

29
 Record
Click this button to save the settings. For the new settings to take effect
effect.

Product Search
To locate the Product, you can use the following options:
• You can type the code and press TAB to display the desired registration.
• You can type the name and press Down Arrow. The system will search and display all the
records that have the word typed in the first part of the text.
• You can type an asterisk (*) and part of the name, or another search field, and press
SetaDown. The system will search and show all registrations that contain the word
typed, regardless of which part of the name it is.
Example: If you want to search for Printer, type the * (asterisk) and then type the word.
printer. The system will show all registrations that contain the word Printer.
ImpressoraGenérico, Cabo deimpressora, Cartuchoimpressora.
• You can press DownArrow to show all the registrations and use the fields of
research as we will explain below. We do not recommend this search, as depending on the
the number of records it can become slow.
To make your search faster and more accurate, when searching the system, type the maximum
of possible information.
Name (F3)
In this field you can locate the products with the following options: name, code, manufacturer,
observação, classe, subclasse, cód. fornecedor, pesquisa 1, pesquisa 2 e pesquisa 3.
To locate the products, select an option related to the search in the search field.
it will be done.
Example: If you want to locate the product by the field Observation.
• In the fieldName (F3) type the observation provided in the product registration that you want to search for;
• In the search field, select Observation;
• Click on the Name field (F3), or press F3, and then press Enter to locate the.
product with the informed observation.

Second text
This option must be enabled in the menu to configure this screen. To use this option the
FieldName (F3) must be filled in, as the system will search for both texts.
Example: Do you want to find printer cartridges registered in the system in black color.
In the fieldName (F3) type the first word 'Cartridge'.
In the field 'Second text' type the second word 'Black'. All products that will appear
have these two words in the name.
Manufacturer
This option should be enabled in the menuConfigure this screen. To use this option the
The name field (F3) must be filled in, as the system will search for the data.
informed both in the name field and in the manufacturer field.
Observation
This option should be enabled in the Configure menu on this screen. To use this option the
The field Name (F3) must be filled in, as the system will search for the data.
informed, both in the Name field and in the Observation field.
Search in

30
In this field, select which field you will use to locate the product. After choosing the
opção, digite o texto desejado no campoNome (F3)e pressioneEnter.
Order
In this field, you can select the order in which the search results will be displayed.
Code: Select this option for the data to be displayed in order of the code
product.
Name: Select this option for the products to be displayed in alphabetical order.
Search Result
All the selected fields will be shown in Configure this screen, with the data from
products. To select a product, locate it and double click on it or press
Press Enter with the selected line to return to the screen.

31
Employee Registration
This screen will be used to register the company's employees and configure their permissions.
controlling access to the system.
To open this screen:
• Select the Enrollment module;
• Click on the Basics menu in the Employees option.
At the top of the employee registration screen, in addition to the Code and the Name, register
also the following data:

Nickname
Enter the first name or nickname of the employee. The nickname will be used for the search.
of the employees on the system screens, in the report queries and for the employee to log in
in the system.

Password
Employees who will have access to the system must register a password in this field. A
Password can be alphanumeric with a maximum of eight (8) digits. The system considers letters.
uppercase and lowercase, so check if the Caps Lock on your keyboard is on.
register the password.

Registration (Ctrl+F1)
In this tab, register the personal details of the employees. In the Property box determine the
tipo de acesso que o funcionário terá no sistema, se ele seráLiberado para usar o sistema,
Inactive, Seller, Technician and/or Superuser.
Properties
The options Released to use the system, Vendor, Inactive, and Superuser will be detailed in
Chapter Security.

Others (Ctrl+F2)
In this tab you can set the following configurations:
% commission if seller 1
This table will indicate the percentage of sales and/or service commission, so that it is
calculation of the commission values done.
% on sales
Enter in this field the percentage of commission that the employee will receive for each sale of
product.
% on services
Enter in this field the percentage commission that the employee will receive for each service
effected.
% commission if the seller is 2
(Available only for Corporate versions)
It is possible to control commissions for two employees on the same sale and/or service. Each
there will be different commission percentages.
Example: A store pays its manager a percentage of all the sales of their team. In this
In the case, report in the manager's record the percentage of commission used as Seller 2.

32
 If this same manager makes direct sales, he may have a different percentage like
Seller 1.
Attention: Some commission reports may be available only to the Seller.
1.
Default email settings
If the company sends emails to Clients / Suppliers, inform in this field what the
email configuration that the employee will use. The default configuration should be
previously registered.
Examples: sending sales quotes, promotions, request for quotation to the supplier,
direct mailing, etc.
Explanations about the Branches you have access to and Maximum Discount on the Screen of
Sales / Exit, as well as the tabs Permissions and Advanced, will be in the chapter Security.

Photo (Ctrl+F5)
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab it is possible to add the employee's photo, which will be displayed on the access screen of
system. The photo will be displayed at a size of 78 x 100 pixels.
To include, choose a photo with a maximum size of 25 Kb, in JPG format.

33
Security
In this chapter, we will explain the security items contained in the system, how to do so
restrict employee access to certain functions of the system, preventing access to the data that
they do not refer to your hierarchy.
Next, we will explain the security items available on the Employee Registration screen.
They are: the Properties frame, the Security button and the items from the Other, Permissions tabs.
Advanced.

Properties
Define the properties in the Registration tab, in the employee registration. The options are:

Released to use the system

With this option, the employee will have limited access to the system, making it mandatory to
configurações de Segurança. Para isso determine quais as telas e funções o funcionário terá
access, through the buttonSecurity.
Seller
This option indicates that your employee is a salesperson in the company. This will make the search easier.
of the seller's name on the sales screen, as the Employee Search Screen allows it to be
only the names of the sellers were shown.
The seller will only be able to access the system if one of the options 'Released' is also selected.
to use the system or Super User.
Technician
This option indicates that your employee is a technician at the company. This will facilitate the search.
of the technician's name on the Service Orders screen, as the employee search screen allows
show only the names of the technicians. The technician will only be able to access the system if they are
selected one of the options also released to use the system or superuser.
Inactive
By selecting this option, the employee will not have access to the system and will not appear on the lists.
employees.
Superuser
This option grants the employee access to all screens and functions in the system. Therefore,
It will not be necessary to configure the security permissions explained in this chapter.
Attention: We recommend that code 1 (one) be registered for the owner of the company, as
this code cannot be deleted or changed and will always be Superuser.

Security per Employee

The Security configuration per Employee is very important, as it will be possible
determine the type of access the employee will have on the system screens.
Na tela Segurança poderão ser configuradas as permissões às telas e relatórios, podendo
restrict the functions of Save, Modify and Delete on each screen. These settings will be
made at the Security button (F6) which is at the bottom of the Registration screen
Employees.

34
 To set up employee restrictions
• Enter the employee registration screen;
• Enter the employee code;
• Click the Security button (F6), which is at the bottom of the screen, or press the F6 button on the
keyboard, to open the system's security screen.
In the Screens and Reports panel, configure the employee's permissions for the screens and reports.
of the system.
Attention: To open the items contained in this box, click on the (+) sign next to it.
left of the field or double click on the field. The folders will be displayed with the
names of each module. Inside each folder, there are subfolders related to the system screens;
To determine the employee's access:
• Open the itemSystem;
• Open one of the available modules;
• Choose a Screen / Function. To select the field, double click on it;
• In the Program / Function Details section, choose which functions to Save, Alter or
Turn off, will be released on this screen for the employee;
• Click the Include / Change button;
• In the Employee Selection field, all items that were will be displayed.
released;
• Click the Save Changes (F2) button.
Example: The employee will only be allowed to record and modify the client registration.
Suppliers will not be able to delete the registrations and will not have access to the other screens of the system.
• Click on System;
• Click on Registrations;
• Double click on the Customer / Supplier registration field;
• Mark the options Record Change;
• Click the Include / Change button to include the employee's selections;
• Click the Save Changes (F2) button.
To exclude a permission:
• Selecione a linha que desejaExcluirno quadro Seleções para esse Funcionário;
• Press the Delete key on the keyboard;
• Click the Save Changes button (F2).
To change a permission:
• Select the line you want to change in the Selections board for this Employee;
• In the Program / Function Details section, check which functions Save, Change / or
Turn off, they will be released to the employee;
• Click the Include/Change button to change the employee's permission;
• Click the Save Changes button (F2).
Copy Settings from Another Employee Button (F4)
This option will be used to copy the system access of an already registered employee, to
Another employee. This function will speed up the registration of new employees.
To copy the permissions of another employee:
• In the registration of the new employee, after filling in the data, click on the Security button;
• Click the button Copy Settings from Another Employee (F4);
• Double-click on the name of the employee whose permissions you want to copy;
• Click on Save Changes (F2).

35
 On the Copy Configuration of Another Employee screen, it is possible to print all the
employees that appear on this list. To do this, click on the icon .

Others
Define the following settings on this tab:
Branches to which you have access
If you control more than one branch in the system, you can define which branches the employee will have access to.
access.
By selecting the option All, the employee will have access to all registered branches.
By selecting the option Access to only this employee will have restricted access, only the
released branches.
Maximum Discount on Sales/Output Screens
Employees may have different discount permissions among themselves.
In this context, provide the maximum percentage that the employee can offer as a discount.
at the time of sale. This percentage can be from 0.01 to 99.99% discount.
It is necessary to inform the discount percentage in this field, so that the employees
they can provide discounts at the time of sale.
Attention: In sales, the system will consider the lowest discount percentage registered among
the options: maximum discount per product, seller, price table, and output screen.
Can you authorize this discount on sales from other sellers?
By selecting this option, the employee will be able to release the maximum discount registered for them in the
sales of other employees.
Example: A seller can grant a discount of up to 5% on sales. At the time of the sale
a 10% discount was granted to the customer, in this case, another employee (like a
The manager registered with a higher percentage will be able to authorize the discount on the sale.

Permissions (Ctrl+F3)
In this tab, it is possible to configure the employee's access to the information and functions contained in
system.
To determine this access, click on the module you want and select which functions will be
released for him. The name of each function explains what it refers to.
To open the folders contained in this screen, double-click on the yellow folder or click on
Click on the (+) sign next to the folder and check the options you want to enable.

Advanced (Ctrl+F4)
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Configure in this tab which stock operations/movements will be allowed and the tables.
of prices that will be blocked, for the employee.
Operations
With this option, it is possible to restrict employees' access to the operations used on the screens.
Entry and Exit. By marking this function, the employee will only be able to use the
operations that were released.
Example: Wishes to allow the employee only the operations of state sales, sales
interstate and the purchase operation. When selecting these operations, the employee will not be able to
use the other operations registered in the system, such as reservation, transfer operations,
loan, return, etc.

36
 The system already has some operations registered. See more information about it in the
chapters Exit Operations and Entry Operations.
To restrict the employee's access to operations, check the option 'User can use'
only these operations (Output Screen / Sales and Entries)" and then include the
operations that the employee will be able to access.
To make this configuration:
• Mark the option User can only use these operations;
• Select one of the options for Input or Output;
• In the operation field, enter the code of the operation that will be released to the employee. If
having selected the Entry option, pressing Down Arrow will only show the
input operations in the list. If the Exit option is selected, only the
exit operations in the list. You can release exit operations for the same employee.
Entries.
• Click the Include button.
To exclude one of the operations released for the Employee:
• Select the line you wish to delete;
• Then click the Delete button.
Price list locked
With this option, the employee will not be able to view or make sales with the table(s) of
selected price(s) in this table.
To include a table in the list of blocked tables:
• Select the price table you wish to include;
• Then click the Include button.
To delete a price table that is locked:
• Select the line where the price table you want to delete is located;
• Then click the Delete button;
Example: It can be used to block the Cost Table of the products.
Service Order Situations
In this framework, define the situations of work order that the employee will be able to change in a
OS.
To include a situation of OS in the list:
• Select the situation you want to include;
• Then click the Include button.
To exclude a situation from OS:
• Select the line that is the situation you want to delete;
• Then click the Delete button.

37
Access to the System
Next, we will explain how to access the system and the precautions that should be taken with it.
employee passwords.

System login screen

When clicking on the Shop Control 8 icon, the system access screen will be displayed. On this screen,
report the employee's code and password, this information will only be requested when entering
in the system, allowing access only to the screens that have been released. On this screen, provide the
the following data to enter the system:
Subsidiary
In this field, enter the branch code you wish to access. When accessing the system for the first time,
Enter the number 1 (one), as this is the default branch.

User Code
In this field, enter the registered code for the employee. When accessing the system for the first time
then, type the number 1 (one).
Password
In this field, enter the password provided at the time of system installation.

Data
This field is filled with the date registered in Windows. Check if the date is
updated.
Enter
Click this button to access the system
Leave
Click this button to exit this screen.

Branch Exchange
Use this option if you work with multiple branches in the same system. With it, you can switch the
branch without needing to close the entire system and log back in.
• In the main menu of the system, at the bottom right;
• Click on the Branch button ;
• It will open the screen explained above.

User Switch
It is used to change the user who is using the system. This option makes it easier to switch.
users without needing to leave the system.
Attention: We recommend that whenever you are no longer using the system, press the Exchange button.
user, so that the next employees do not have access to your permissions. Use this
button must be used if the computers are shared.
Change password
The User Change screen allows the employee to change their password without having to access the
employee registration.

38
 To change the password
• Click on the buttonSwitch user;
• Enter the username and the password;
• Click the Change Password button;
• Type the new password;
• In the field Confirm the new password, retype the password;
• Click the Change password button to change the password.

Log Report
This report shows the screens accessed and functions used by each employee.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the Other menu, on the Log Report option.
Branch
In this field, select a branch or type 0 (zero) to check access in all.
Employee
In this field, select an employee or enter 0 (zero) to check all.
Data
You can check the employees' access by period. In the fields Start Date and Date.
Finally, select the desired period.
Type
In this field, you can choose the function you want to check:
All: Select this option to check all employee accesses.
Change: Select this option to check which records have been changed.
Delete: Select this option to check which records have been deleted.
Search Data: Select this option to check the searched records.
Log into the system: Select this option to check which employees have logged in to the system.
Entered screen: Select this option to check on which screens the employees logged in.
Record: Select this option to check which records have been recorded.
Others: Select this option to check other functions in the system.
Modules
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this field, you can choose which module you want to check access to in the system.
Station Name
This field will list all the machines on the network. You will be able to check the accesses on a
specific machine.
Text in the description
You can type a description to show the employees who accessed or executed
a function with a certain description.
Level
In this field, select the functions you want to check. You can choose to check All,
Security or Use of screens.

39
Print
Click this button to print the report. The report will be displayed on the screen, for later
to be printed on paper.

40
Open and Close Day
Esta tela é utilizada para abrir e fechar o dia do sistema, permitindo acessá-lo, somente nos dias
abertos. Com essa opção poderá não permite que os funcionários entrem no sistema com data
retroactive or superior to the current date. To do this, it is necessary to check the option Use the system
only on open days on the Branch Registration screen, in the Settings module.
To open this screen:
• Selecione o móduloConfigurações;
• Click on the menuBranches, in the optionOpen / Close Day.

To start the day

• In the date field, select the day you wish to open;
• Then click the Open day button;
• The frame will show the date, the employee code, and the time the day was opened.
Attention: The table will list all the days that are open. The system may be
accessed on these dates and transactions can also be made on those days.

To close the day

The days must be closed so that there are no entries with retroactive or superior dates,
because the reports and the cash will be incorrect.
• Select the day you want to close, in the schedule;
• Then click the Close day button.
Attention: On closed days, no employee will be able to access the system, not even the
superuser.

41
Basic Registrations
In this chapter, we will explain all the forms of Basic Registrations existing in Shop Control.
8. That will be important for the functioning of your system, as they are prerequisites for
other functions and reports.
When registering items in the system, always do so using lowercase letters, except for the first one.
This way the reports will have a cleaner appearance and there will be no need to use multiple
lines for the description. See the example below:
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRINTER X1111 - GENERIC
Multifunction Printer X1111 - Generic
In this chapter, we will cover the following topics:
• Operation of the Screens;
• Registration of Classes, Subclasses, Families, and Groups;
• Registration of Manufacturers;
• Color Registration;
• Size Registration;
• Bank Registration;
• Bank Account Registration;
• Group Registration for Direct Mail;
• Client Class Registration;
• Currency Registration;
• Registration of Quotations;
• Tax Classification Registration;
• Credit Card Registration / Agreements;
• Tax Class Registration;
• Cadastro de Tipos de Contatos Efetuados
• Registration of Boxes;
• Service Registration;
• Freight Registration;
• Cost Center Registration;
• Department Registration;
• Protest Registration

Operation of the Screens

We will explain in this topic how to register, change, consult or delete the records.
How to register
• In the Code field, enter the desired number or, if you prefer, click the icon next to the field.
which will display the next available code;
• Press the (TAB) key on the keyboard or click with the mouse on the next field;
• In the Name field, enter the description of what is being registered;
• Press the Record button (F2);
• Click on Clear (F2) to start a new registration.
How to change a registration
• In the Code field, enter the code you wish to change and press the (TAB) key, or locate the
registration using the search option;
• Make the changes to the registration;
• Press the Record button (F2) to save the changes.

42
Regarding products
This menu contains the screens for the following registrations.

Registration of Classes, Subclasses, Groups, and Families

To open this screen:
• Select the option Registration;
• Click on the Basic menu, in the Product-related option.
The creation of the registration of classes, subclasses, groups, and families is very important for your
company, as it will group products into sets. This will facilitate operational routines.
linked to the products, in the analysis and visualization of information. Therefore, this registration must
be well structured.
The best classification is the one that represents something relevant and important in your company.
Two companies in the same sector can have different ratings. It will not be necessary.
register the four forms of classifications, use only those you deem necessary.
Example of how to register Classes, Subclasses, Groups, and Families, with two stores of the same type.
branch, however, with different classifications.
Example: Store 1

Class Subclass Group Family

Childish Male Blouses Spring
Youth Feminine Pants Summer
Adult Unisex Shirts Autumn
Blazer Winter

Example: Store 2

Class Subclass Group Family

National Social Boys' Children's Clothes
Imported Sporty Children's Female. Accessories
Lingerie Youth Male.
Beach Female Youth.
Adult Male.
Adult Female.
Unisex

These classifications will be used in the future as filters in various reports. When using
this concept, in the printed report, the results will be more concrete and homogeneous,
allowing for a more objective analysis. In addition to the ease of obtaining the reports, as mentioned,
Shop Control 8 offers the Grouped Profitability Report, which, among others,
it will show the total sales summed by class, subclass, group or family, allowing verification
which one had the highest profitability.
It is possible to use this classification also to control or count the stock and
for price adjustment.
In the Class registration, there is a field called "Order in the deposit". This field is more
indicated for companies that make deliveries and have their goods organized in a warehouse.
Shop Control 8 Corporate can print invoices, cash tickets, or cargo manifests.
sorted by this field.
Attention: Group and Family registrations are available only in Corporate versions.

43
Bank Registration
To open this screen:
• Selecione a opçãoCadastro;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Finance option and select Banks.
The main banks in the country are already registered in the system.
This registration will be used in the future to register the current accounts used in your
company and for receiving checks.

Bank Account Registration

To open this screen:
• Select the Registration option;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Financial option and select Bank Accounts.
On this screen, you can register the company's bank accounts that will be used for
make financial transactions.
In this screen, you will need to provide the following information:

Code: In this field, provide a code for this registration or click on the arrow to
show the next code.
Description: In this field, enter a description to identify the bank account.
Agency: In this field, provide the agency code.
Account: In this field, enter the account number.
Bank: In this field, locate the bank corresponding to the bank account. It is necessary that the
Bank is registered.
Manager: In this field, enter the name of the account manager.
Phones: In this field, provide the bank's phone numbers.
Inactive: Select this option if the account is no longer being used.
Credit limit (Available only for Corporate versions): In this field, please provide
the credit limit of the checking account.

Inf. Ticket (Ctrl+F1)

Os camposCódigo do Cedente,Nome do Cedente,Carteira, Convênio,Modalidade,Texto
Demonstrative, Instruction Text, Our Number and Document Type, must be verified with
the bank, before filling out.
Advanced
(Available only for Corporate versions)
On this tab, you can specify which branch the bank account belongs to and also which
employees will have access to the account. In this table, determine the following options:
Exclusive use at the branch: Determine to which branch the Bank Account belongs.
Account type: Determine what type of bank account it is, if this account is a Checking Account,
["Application with immediate redemption","Application without immediate redemption"]

Current Account: It is the account frequently used by the company, intended for banking transactions.
daily rates.
Application with immediate redemption: These are funds and/or investments with the possibility of requesting the
redeem at any time. If you have an application within a checking account, create a
bank account with the name of the application and select this option.

45
 Application without immediate redemption: These are funds and/or investments scheduled for redemption in
a certain date, such as capitalization titles among others.
Employee
Determine which employees will have access to each account created.
Exemplo:Caso queira que um determinado funcionário, responsável pelo contas a receber e a
pay, only have access to the checking accounts. Keeping the investments released only
for the owner.
To configure which employees will have access to the account, follow the procedure below.
• Only the employees below can view/move this account;
• In the Employee field, choose the employee(s);
• Click the Include button;
• In the table below, the name(s) of the released employee(s) will be shown;
• Then click the Save button (F2).
To remove the employee from the list:
• Select the employee you want to remove;
• Click the Remove selected button;
• Then click the Save button (F2).

Registration of Groups for Direct Mail

To open this screen:
• Select the option Registration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Groups option for Direct Mail.
OShop Control 8 allows for the printing of labels for direct mail of letters and shipping.
emails.
Example: In a bookstore, it is possible to create interest groups for your customers by
classification of books, such as: computer science, children's, drama, psychology, management, etc.
If you want to send information about new products in the area of information technology, there is the option to
select only the clients that are part of this direct mail group (one Client /
Supplier can be part of multiple groups simultaneously.
In the selection of registrations to be included in the direct mail, you can use several filters. See
more information in the chapter Direct Mail.

Client / Supplier Class Registration

To open this screen:
• Select the option Registration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the option Client Class and select Suppliers.
The classification of Customer / Supplier Class will be used to facilitate searches.
made in the reports and selections of records for direct mail.
Example: It is possible to classify your customers by industry, profession, type of
commerce (shopping center, mall, neighborhood, central store, distributor, etc) or create classes of
agreement with the loyalty or what is best for your company.

Currency Registration
To open this screen:
• Select the option Registration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Coins option.
This screen is used to register the currencies that your company works with. In the system, the currency
(Real) is already registered with code 1 and cannot be altered.

46
 Attention: Only register a new currency if your company works with currencies different from
This registration will be used for the currency quotation registration, so that the system can do
the conversion of the currency to Real at the time of sale.

Quotes Registration
To open this screen:
• Select the optionRegistration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Quotations option.
The registration of quotes is recommended for companies that work with more than one currency.
The quotation registry is used to keep the daily value of the currency updated. This way,
the system will convert the product value based on the last date provided.
The system will convert to the Real currency in the Sales, Entries, Print screens.
Prices and for printing Labels.
The consultation on this screen will be useful to check if the quotation is updated or not.

Tax Classification Registration

To open this screen:
• Select in the Registration module;
• Click on the Basic menu, on the Tax Classification option.
This registration includes or alters the Tax Classifications relating to the products that your company
sell. It will only be necessary to fill in this field if you need to provide the classification
tax of your products on the invoice.

Message Registration for the Invoice

To open this screen:
• Selecione no móduloCadastro;
• In the Basic menu, click on the option Related to Finance and select Messages for the
Note.
The registration of Messages for the Notes will be used to register the messages to be
printed on the invoice form, as a sales observation message.
On this screen, you can register up to five (5) lines of observations for each message, which will be
selected in the product registration.

Credit Card / Agreement Registration

To open this screen:
• Select in the Registration module;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Credit Card option.
It is used to register the credit cards that are accepted by your company. The system will
calculate the net amount to be received from the card administrator, based on the information
below.
In the fields:
Taxa de Administração (%):Cadastre a taxa em percentual que a administradora do cartão
charges in each transaction.
Fixed Amount per Transaction: There are operators that charge, in addition to the percentage fee, a fixed amount.
fixed per operation.
Days to pay: Deadline given by the administrator to credit the amount to your account, after the
sale date.

47
 Example: If the card is a 24-hour debit card, you enter the number 1 (one), referring to one day.
for the payment. If the card is a credit card, the due date is 30 days, so please enter the number
30 (thirty).
Supplier code: In this field, provide the registration of the card administrator, which
must be previously registered on the Customer / Supplier registration screen. This
The field is used so that, at the moment of confirming the receipt of the card, the system generates
(for the indicated supplier) a paid invoice regarding the amounts of administrative fees.
To check the total paid to your card administrator, print the Paid Accounts report.
by Supplier.
In the fieldType of report, what type of card is being registered:
Credit Card: For cards due in 30 days;
Debit Card: For debit cards with a 24-hour expiration;
Agreement: To establish partnerships with other companies.

Protest Registration
(Available only for Corporate versions)
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration option;
• In the Basic menu, click on the option Related to Finance and select Protest.
This screen is used to register the ways to blacklist customers with overdue accounts.
Registrations will be used on the Billing screen in the Financial module.
Example: Notary, SPC, Serasa.

Department Registration
(Available only for Corporate versions)
To open this screen:
• Select the optionRegister;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Finance option and select Department.
On this screen, you can register the departments of your company. This registration serves to
separate the expenses for each department. This registration will be used on the registration screen of
Cost Center, which will be explained below.
Example: Deposit, commercial, financial, etc.

Cost Center Registration

(Available only for Corporate versions)
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration option;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Financial option and select Cost Center.
In this screen, you can register the cost center, that is, the company's expenses. You can also
make a division of the cost in percentage for each department.
Example of cost: Water, electricity, telephone

Cost division by department

Register the code and name for the Cost Center and then you can fill in the
following information:
Department: In this field, locate the department that uses the registered expense.
In this field, enter the percentage of expenditure for the selected department.

48
 Include: Click this button to insert the department into the grid.
Cost Center Grade
This table shows the registered percentages for each department. You can check the
following information:
Department: Shows the department code.
Name: Shows the name of the department.
Show the percentage related to the expense of each department.
Remove selected lines
• Select the row(s) you want to remove. You can select them by clicking on the row or
using the Ctrl or Shift keys;
• Then click the Remove Selected Rows button.

Registration of Contact Types Made

To open this screen:
• Select the optionRegister;
• In the Basic menu, click on the option Types of Contacts Made.
This screen will be used to register the types of contacts to be made routinely.
with the company's clients. This registration will be used on the client registration screen /
Suppliers in the Contacts Made tab.
Exemplo de Tipos de Contatos:Promoções, Cobrança, Pedido de Orçamento, Boas Vindas ,
After sales, among others.

Cash Register Registration

To open this screen:
• Select the option Registration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the option Box.
The cash register refers to the cash drawers. For example, the drawers used by
supermarkets.
Cash Register 1 is already registered in the system and cannot be deleted. The corporate version allows.
select which employees will be able to use the cash register. To do this, select the option Only
The employees below can use this cash register.

Service Registration
To open this screen:
• Select the optionRegistration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Services option.
On this screen, register the services that will be performed in your company, if you work with
provision of services.
Fill in with the following data:
Code: This field is numeric and allows up to 4 (four) digits from 1 to 9999.
Descrição:Digite a descrição do serviço. Marque a opçãoPermite alterar descriçãopara
allow that, at the time of service movement, it can change and/or complement its
description.
Unit: Report the unit of sale for the service. Example: hours, minutes, days, etc.
others.
Preço:Digite o preço do serviço.

49
 Do not allow price changes on the Service Order screen: Select this option to not
allow changing the price of the service, on the Service Order screen and on the Exit screens.
Percentual de ISS:Preencha com o percentual de ISS do serviço.
Blocked: Check this option for the services that will no longer be performed in your
company. This option prevents sales with this service from being made, but they will be shown
in the search lists.
Inactive: Check this option so that the service is not shown in search lists, but will be
it is possible to sell inactive services.
Commission: In this field, provide the percentage of commission to be considered. With this,
allows the registration of differentiated commissions by service.
Service commission overrides technical commission: Check this option to have it
considering the service commission percentage, this will override the commission that is in place
registered in the employee's record.

Freight Registration
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• In the Basic menu, click on the Shipping option.
On this screen, register the shipping charges charged by the carriers that make deliveries for your
company.
This registration will be done by state and used at the time of sale for the calculation of shipping costs.
Carrier: In this field, select the carrier you wish to register the freight.
The carrier must be pre-registered in Clients / Suppliers.
State: Select the State for which you want to configure the shipping.
Capital: In this field, the capital of the selected State will be shown.
Proceed: Click this button to register the freight values for the carrier.
Shipping Charged: In this field, select the type of shipping charged by the carrier, for
the selected state.
Primeiros Itens e Adicionais
Select this option if your carrier charges one amount for the first product and another
value for each of the additional items.
By selecting this option, the First Items and Additional tab will be available. Fill in the
following fields.
First Item: Report the fixed amount that will be charged for the first item, for deliveries in
Capital and the Interior.
Additional Item: Please provide the fixed amount that will be charged for additional items for deliveries at
Capital and the Interior.

Order
Select this option if the freight charged by the carrier has a fixed value per
delivery.
By selecting this option, the Orders tab will be available. Fill in the following fields.
Capital: Enter the fixed amount for deliveries in the Capital.
Interior: Enter in this field the fixed amount for deliveries in the Interior.

50
Weight
Select this option if the shipping charged by the carrier is calculated by weight.
order.
By selecting this option, the Weight tab will become available. Fill in the fields accordingly.
table provided by the carrier.
Peso inicial:Informe o peso inicial, referente à uma faixa de peso.
Peso Final:Informe o peso final, referente à faixa de peso.
Freight Charge: Inform the amount of freight that will be charged for the Capital.
Freight Interior: Inform the amount of freight that will be charged for the Interior.
Launch: Click this button to launch the registered shipping in the box next to it.
Example:

Initial weight Final Weight Capital Freight Interior Freight

0 2 5.00 8.00
2.01 5 10.00 18,00
5,01 10 20.00 30.00

Record
Click this button to save the shipping or changes.
Restart
Click this button to start a new freight registration.

51
Registration

52
Registration of Tax Classes
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration module.
• In the Basic menu, click on the Taxes Classes option.
On this screen, all tax information for each type of product must be registered. From this
it will be much easier and faster to register a product, as it will not be necessary to type
all taxes for each new record. In case of changes in taxes, instead of
changing product by product only changes the class registration and, consequently, all the
products belonging to it will be updated.
Para cada combinação de informações deverá ser criada uma novaClasse de Imposto.
Subsequently, in the Product Registration, indicate to which Tax Class each product belongs.
belongs.
Attention: Before filling out this screen, consult the information about the taxes with the
accountant of your company.

Registering the Tax Class

To register the tax class, it is necessary to provide the following information:
Code: In this field enter or locate the next code for the registration of the Class of
Taxes.
Nome / Tipo de Produto:Neste campo informe um nome para a Classe de Impostos que está
being registered.

General (Ctrl + F2)

In the General tab, fill in the following fields:

Tax Situation
Fill in with the code referring to the tax situation for the sale of this class of taxes.
Fill in this field if you need it to be printed on the invoice and/or on the ticket.
Taxes on Sale / Purchase
In the frame Taxes on sales, make the setup of taxes for the sale of
produtos. Essa configuração servirá para o cálculo de impostos a serem considerados na
formation of the selling price and in the printing of invoices.
In the Taxes on Purchase section, set up the taxes for the purchase.
according to the invoice from your supplier. This configuration will be used at the time of
purchase of the products and for the calculation of the cost price.

Percentage of IPI
Inform the percentage if the products belonging to the class have IPI. The value of the tax.
It will be calculated at the time of sale and/or purchase of products.

ICMS
Inform which type of ICMS applies to the product class. To do this, select one of the options:
Normal, Withheld, Reduced Rate or Exempt.
For products with normal ICMS: If the product's ICMS is Normal, check this option and
report the percentage used in the ICMS percentage field.
For products with exempt ICMS: If the product is exempt from ICMS, select only the option.
Exempt.

53
 For products with Withheld ICMS: If the product's ICMS is Withheld, check this option and
report the percentage used in the ICMS Percentage field, select one of the options in
Calculation Base (Withheld / Reduced) and fill in the reduction percentage
correspondent.
For products with Reduced ICMS: If the product's ICMS is Base Reduced, mark this
option and inform the percentage used in the ICMS Percentage field, select one of the
options of the Calculation Base (Withheld / Reduced) and fill in the percentage of the base
reduced corresponding.
Calculation Base (Withheld / Reduced)
Choose one of these options to set the calculation base of the ICMS for the product.
% reduction of the value: Enter the percentage reduction of your ICMS. With this option, the
the product will have its price reduced by the % stated in this field.
% of the value to use as a base: Enter the percentage of ICMS to use as the calculation base.
With this option, this percentage will be considered for the calculation of ICMS, based on the value of
product.
Value to be used as a base: Enter the fixed amount in R$ (Reais) to establish the base of
calculation of ICMS.

For the Fiscal Printer

Fill in these fields if you work with a fiscal printer, together with oShop Control
8 Fiscal. Only the parameters of this table will be considered for the calculation of taxes.
in the fiscal printer.
Product type: Specify in this field what the tax situation of the products is. The
opções são:Tributado (ICMS),Não Incidente,IsentoeRetido.
% ICMS: Enter the percentage of ICMS that will be used in Shop Control 8 Fiscal.

Advanced (Crtl + F3)

(Available only for Corporate versions)
In the Advanced tab, you will have the option to register different types for the same class.
taxes for each operation of exits and/or entries.
Example: In a sale, the same type of product can have different taxes, depending
of the customer classification (wholesale, retail, institutions, etc). Create a sales operation for
each of these situations and, subsequently, inform the tax settings here.
This tab has the following options:
Type of operation: Select whether the operation will be input or output.
Operation: Choose the operation that has different taxes for this class. For
For more information about operations, see the chapters Operations of Entry and Operations.
of Outputs.
C.F.O.P: Fill in this field with the Fiscal Operation Code. This option allows that in
same operation, with products containing different CFOPs, these should be specified. For
Yes, the products that contain the same CFOP must belong to the same class.
Fill in the tax part as explained in the item Sales / Purchase Taxes,
on the General tab (Ctrl + F2).
To Include the ICMS for sales and/or input operations:
• Fill in the necessary fields in the Advanced tab;
• Clique no botãoIncluir.

54
 To clear the selection:
• Select the line you wish to delete;
• Click the Delete Selected Row button.
Deferred ICMS
In this box you can indicate the percentage of the discount that will be given directly on the value of
ICMS.
ICMS reduction percentage: In this field, enter the percentage related to the reduction of ICMS.

55
States / ICMS
On this screen, you can register the ICMS percentages for each state and for each branch.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• In the menuOthers, click on the optionStates / ICMS.
On this screen, you can check the following information:
Branch: The branch code will appear in this column.
UF: This column lists the acronyms of all Brazilian States.
ICMS: In this column, enter the ICMS for each corresponding State.
Use ICMS Product: Select this column to use the ICMS stated in the registration of
Disregard the percentage specified in the ICMS field.
Save changes
Click this button to save the data entered on this screen.

56
Entry Operations
On this screen, you can create new Entry operations and determine the functions for each one.
entries. Entry operations will be used to make movements on the screen of
Entries. The system already comes with some pre-configured operations.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the menuTypes of Operationsin the optionEntry Operations.
Code: In this field, enter the code for the operation and in the adjacent field, the name that will be
identified on the Inputs screen.
General: In this tab you can determine the functions that will be used in the Operations of
Entrance.
CFOP: In this field, provide the fiscal code of the operation, which will be used for printing.
of the invoice.
Name for Invoice: In this field, type the name you want to print on the invoice.

Properties of the Operation

As opções neste quadro poderão ser definidas de acordo com as funções desejadas para a
operation created.
Increase Stock: Select this option to add the stock of the products.
Be Money (Cash / pay): Select this option to allow you to inform the method of
payment.
Decrease Seller Commission: Select this option to decrease the commission of the
employees.
Allow Invoice Issuance: Select this option to allow printing of the invoice.
Invoice emission only after confirmation: Select this option to allow printing of the
Note, only after the stock and payment are completed.
Ticket issuance only after confirmation: Select this option to allow printing of
ticket, only after the inventory and payment are completed.

Tipo da Operação
In this section, select the type related to the entry operation you wish to create. Below
we will explain the function of each type of operation.

Purchase
Select this option when creating a transaction related to the purchase of products for resale.
In the Operation Properties panel, select the functions you want to use in the operation.
We recommend that you check the option Increase Stock and Withdraw money (cash / pay).

Purchase of Products Received on Loan

Select this option when creating a transaction regarding the purchase of products that have been
borrowed. In the Operation Properties panel, select the functions you want to use
In the operation. We recommend that you select the option Withdraw Money (cash / pay) and do not select the
Increase Stock
Transfer
Select this option when the operation refers to a transfer receipt of
stock from another branch. In the Operation Properties frame, select the functions you want
use for this operation. We recommend that you check the Increase Stock option, if you do

57
 the transfer directly through the entries screen. If you use the entries screen only for
print the invoice of a transfer made from the Transfer screen, just check only
Allows the issuance of an Invoice.

Inventory Adjustment
Select this option when the operation is related to the entry of products to settle the
stock. For this operation, we recommend that you mark only the option Increase Stock.
Purchase Order
Select this option when the operation relates to a purchase order for products. When
create this operation will disregard the options selected in the Properties frame
operation, later it may transform it into a purchase.
Receipt of Loan
Select this option when the operation refers to a loan receipt of
goods from the supplier. We advise that you select the Increase option for this operation.
Stock, in the operation Properties panel. To inform the payment, use the operation
Purchase of Borrowed Products.
Free
Select this option when the operation refers to a received bonus.
We recommend that the option Increase Stock be checked and that the option not be checked
Leave Money (cash / pay).
Customer Return
Select this option when the operation refers to the return of merchandise from customers.
In the Operation Properties panel, select the functions you want to use in the operation.
If you control sales commissions, we recommend that you mark Reduce Commission of
Seller.
Others
Select this option when the operation does not relate to any of the options provided in
In the operation properties panel, select the functions you want to use in the
operation.

Taxes
In this tab, provide the taxes that will be calculated on incoming operations.
Calculate ICMS: Select this option to calculate the ICMS of the products.
Calculate IPI: Select this option to calculate the IPI of the products.
ICMS base includes IPI: Select this option for it to be considered as the base of
ICMS, the total value of the products plus the value of IPI.

Ticket / note
In this tab, select the parameters that will be used for printing the invoice and ticket.
of the box.
Receipt / Cash Register Ticket
Use branch registration standard: Select this option to use the ticket layout
chosen on the screenBranch Registration, in the moduleSettings.

58
 Ask which model at the time of printing (Available only for the versions
Corporate): Select this option to list all available ticket layouts
moment of printing.
Use the following template (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this
option to set a ticket layout as default. In the adjacent field, select the layout
desired.
Invoice
Use the branch registration standard: Select this option to use the invoice layout
chosen on the Branch Registration screen, in the Settings module.
Ask which model to use at the time of printing (Available only for the
Corporate versions): Select this option to list all available invoice layouts in
moment of printing.
Use the following template (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this
option to set a note layout as default, in the field next to select the layout
desired.
Printing on Various Notes
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This function allows printing the products from the entry on more than one invoice sheet.
Use this option if you print invoices with a quantity of input products greater than the
quantity of product lines existing on the invoice. With this, the system will print the
remaining products on the next invoice sheet(s). To do this, select the optionIf the
products do not fit on a note print varies then inform in the field Quantity
of products in the quantity of products / lines that fit on the invoice sheet.
Attention: This option only works with the purchase of products with a single line of description.

Show screen with additional fields

By selecting the options in this panel, the screen to insert additional fields will be displayed for
they will be printed on the invoice at the time of printing on the Entries screen.
When issuing an invoice (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this option
to show the screen with additional fields when printing the invoice.
When issuing a ticket: Select this option to display the screen with additional fields when printing
ticket.

Advanced
In this tab, select the parameters that will be used on the input screen.
Moment when the entry becomes effective
In this section, select the option regarding the moment you wish to make the entry.
When recording/informing payment data: Select this option to confirm the entry.
after informing the payment methods.
Activate the Confirm Entry button (Record): Select this option to finalize the entry.
as soon as you record the operation.

Record the Supplier code in the Product registration

In this panel, choose whether you want to save the supplier, as stated on the Input screen, in the registration.
of the Products.

59
Save Supplier: Check this option to save the suppliers provided in the entry.
If the 5 suppliers are already busy, record in the 5th position: Select this option to
replace the supplier in the fifth (5th) position of the Products registration, if it has all the
occupied positions.
If the 5 suppliers are already busy do not record: Select this option to not
register the supplier, if the five (5) slots are occupied.
Recording of the Selling Price
This option is more commonly used by bookstores or by establishments where the supplier informs the
selling price of the product. The cost price, in this case, is calculated through a discount
about the selling price.
Record the selling price, without removing discounts from the price list
The cost price will be recorded in the chosen table, on the entry screen, reducing the discount.
informed for the product.
When selecting this option, define in the field next to it which will be the sales table. It will contain
recorded prices without discounts, displayed on the input screen.

60
Exit Operations
On this screen, you can create new outgoing operations and determine the functions for each of them.
The exit operations will be used to make transactions on the Exit screen. The system
it already brings some pre-configured operations.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• In the menu Types of Operations, click on the option Exit Operations.
Code
In this field, provide the code for the operation and in the adjacent field the name that will be
identified on the Outputs screen.
General
In this tab, you can determine the functions that will be used in the Exit Operations.
CFOP: In this field, provide the tax code for the operation, which will be used for printing.
of the invoice and coupon, if working together with the Shop Control 8 Fiscal.
Name for Invoice: In this field, enter the name you want to print on the invoice.

Properties of the Operation

The options in this frame can be defined according to the desired functions for the
operation created.
Reduce Stock: Select this option to decrease the stock of the products.
Income (Cash / checks / etc): Select this option to allow specifying the method
of receipt.
Generate Commission (Seller / commissioned): Select this option to allow generating
commission to employees or commissioned.
Allows Invoice Issuance: Select this option to allow printing of invoices.
Issuance of invoice only after finalized: Select this option to allow printing of the
Note, only after the stock and receipt are completed.
Ticket issuance only after confirmation: Select this option to allow printing of
ticket, only after the stock and receipt are completed.
Process services: Select this option to allow the operation to specify services.

Statewide / Interstate
In this section, you can select whether the exit operation is state and/or interstate.
State: Select this option to allow exits only within the State. The system
will consider the state informed in the branch registration and in the client registration.
Interstate: Select this option to allow exit to other States. The system will
consider the percentages of ICMS reported on the ICMS States screen or Classes of
Taxes.
Independent: Select this option to allow state and interstate exits.

Type of Operation
In this section, select the type related to the exit operation you wish to create. Below
we will explain the function of each type of operation.

61
Sell
Select this option when creating an operation regarding the sale of products and/or
services. In the Operation Properties frame, select the functions you wish to use in the
operação. A operação de venda interestadual irá considerar os ICMS’s. informados na tela de
States ICM in the Settings module. All operations created with the Sale type
They will be shown in the sales reports available in the system.
Sales of Previously Loaned Products
Select this option when the operation refers to the sale of products that have already been
loaned previously. We advise you to check the option Income (cash /
checks / etc), to inform the method of receiving the loan and not to mark the
Option decreases the stock for this operation, as the stock will be reduced when using the operation.
Loan of Goods.
Transfer
Select this option when the operation refers to the transfer of the product stock.
for another branch. In the Operation Properties panel, select the functions you want
use for this operation. We recommend that you check the Decrease Stock option, if you do the
direct transfer through the input screen. If you use the output screen only to print the
invoice for a transfer made through the Transfer screen, mark only Allows
Issuance of Invoice.
Loans of Goods
Select this option when the operation refers to a loan of goods for
third parties. We advise that you select only the option Decrease Stock for this operation
Properties of the operation, as the receipt information will be made when using the
Operation Sales of Previously Loaned Products.
Stock adjustment
Select this option when the operation is related to product outflows to settle the
stock. For this operation, we recommend that you select only the option Reduce Stock.
Free
Select this option when the operation is related to a bonus. For this operation
we advise you to only check the Decrease Inventory option.
Sales budget
Select this option when the operation refers to sales quotes. When creating this
In the operation, the selected options in the operation Properties panel will be disregarded.
Later you can turn it into a sale.
Return to Supplier
Select this option when the operation concerns the return of goods to the
supplier. In the Operation Properties panel, select the functions you wish to use in the
operation.
Others
Select this option when the operation is related to none of the options provided in
quadro. No quadroPropriedades da operação, selecione as funções que deseja utilizar na
operation.

62
 Goods Reservation
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option when the operation is related to the reservation of goods for a customer.
For this operation, check only the option Reduce Stock, in the Properties section.
operation. We advise that you do not mark the Cash In function (cash / checks / etc),
It will inform the payment method when opening the reservation to make the sale.
Future Delivery Sale
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option when the operation relates to sales of products with no date for
delivery. In the Operation Properties panel, we advise not to check the option
Decrease Stock, as the stock will be reduced through the Future Delivery Sales screen
movementModule, in the outputMenu.

Taxes
In this tab, inform the taxes that will be calculated on the outbound operation.
Calculate ISS: Select this option to calculate the ISS for the services.
Calculate IPI: Select this option to calculate the IPI for the products.
Calculate ICMS: Select this option to calculate the ICMS for the products.
ICMS base includes IPI: Select this option for it to be considered as the base of
ICMS, the total value of the products plus the value of the IPI.
ICMS base includes Freight: Select this option for it to be considered as the base of
ICMS, the total value of the products plus the value of the freight.
% of ICMS on freight: Select this option to calculate the percentage of ICMS on the
shipping cost.
% of fixed ICMS: Select this option to calculate the fixed ICMS in the operation. Next to
report the ICMS percentage for this operation.
I.R. on services
In this box, inform the percentage of income tax to be deducted from the total of the invoice.
when the tax amount is greater than the specified amount.
Informe o percentual do imposto de renda sobre os serviços no primeiro campo. E o valor
minimum tax, in the second field, for the discount on the invoice. In case the total tax is
greater than this specified, it will be deducted from the total of the note.
Deduct the income tax amount from the total sale: Select this option to deduct the amount of
I.R. of the total amount.

Pis, Cofins, CSLL

In this section, inform the minimum value of the services for the discount of the other taxes.
In the first field, indicate the sum of the percentages of taxes on services, which will be
discounted from the total of the invoice. In the second field the minimum value of the services. If the total of the
if the services are greater than specified, the tax amount will be deducted from the invoice.
Deduct the value of taxes from the total sale: Select this option to deduct the
value of taxes from the total of the invoice.

Ticket / note
In this tab, select the parameters that will be used for printing invoices and tickets.
of the box.

63
Cup / Cash Ticket
Use the branch registration standard: Select this option to use the invoice layout
selected on the Branch Registration screen, in the Settings module.
Ask which model at the time of printing: Select this option to list all the
available ticket layouts at the time of printing.
Use the following template: Select this option to set a ticket layout as default.
In the adjacent field, select the desired layout.
Invoice
Use the branch registration standard: Select this option to use the invoice layout
chosen on the screenBranch Registrationin the moduleSettings.
Ask which model at the time of printing (Available only for the versions
Corporate): Select this option to list all available receipt layouts at the moment
of the print.
Use the following model (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this
option to set a note layout as default, in the adjacent field select the layout
desired.
Printing on Multiple Notes / Ticket
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This function allows printing the products of the output on more than one invoice sheet or
ticket. Use this option if you print receipts with the quantity of products in the output greater than the
number of product lines existing on the invoice or ticket. Thus, the system will
print the remaining products on the next invoice or ticket pages. To do this, mark the
option Print several sheets if necessary and then specify in the field Quantity of
products in the invoice the quantity of products / lines that fit on the invoice sheet.
Quantity of products on the ticket: In this field, enter the quantity of products that fit in the
ticket sheet.
Attention: This option only works with sales of products with a single line description and without
services.
Order of printing the products (Ticket and invoice)
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this section, you can choose the order of the products for the printing of the ticket and invoice.
Typing order: Select this option to print the products in the order they were
launched on the output screen.
Product code: Select this option to print products in alphanumeric order,
considering the product code.
Nome do produto:Selecione esta opção para imprimir os produtos em ordem alfabética,
considering the product name.
Order in the deposit: Select this option to print the products in the order of the deposit,
informed in the registration of Classes in the Order field in the deposit.

Show screen with additional fields

When selecting the options from this box, the screen with additional fields will be displayed at that moment.
of the ticket or the invoice. On this screen, you can provide observations related to
sale and also the data of the carriers, for printing.
When issuing an invoice: Select this option to display the screen with additional fields to
print invoice.

64
 When issuing a ticket: Select this option to display the screen with additional fields when printing.
ticket.

Advanced
In this tab, select the parameters that will be used on the output screen.
Moment when the stock decreases
In this section, select the option regarding the moment when the product stock will be decreased.
Right after entering the receipt data: Select this option for the inventory
it should be downloaded only after confirming the data of the receipt of the exit.
At the moment the RECORD button is pressed: Select this option to download the
inventory as soon as recording the exit.
After the shipping screen has been completed: Select this option so that the stock is
downloaded only through the shipping screen, in the Movement module under the Exit menu.

Data for Sintegra

Note model: In this field, provide the model of the invoice.
Series note: In this field, provide the series of the invoice.

Attention: Verify this data on the invoice or with the printer.

Shipping screen
(Available for the Corporate Plus version)
Configure in this panel the options that will be used for products with serial numbers and batches.
Use expedition screen: Select this option to allow the use of the expedition screen in
Movement module.
Series will be displayed on the shipping screen: Select this option to inform the series.
of the products, only on the screen of Shipping - Series and batch release. The products
should be displayed on the Outputs screen.
Batches will be displayed on the shipping screen: Select this option to inform the batches
of the products, only on the Shipping screen - Series and batch release. The products
must be informed on the Outputs screen.

65
Product Registration
In this chapter, we will explain the product registration and the screen configuration. The registration of
products can be made with the normal type, grade, edition, series, and/or batch.
It is necessary to register Class, Subclass and Currency first, as these
are mandatory for the product registration. Other data that must be provided in advance
registered are: Group, Family, Supplier, Tax Classification, Tax Class
Message for the Note.
For more information about these registrations, see the chapter Basic Registrations.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Products menu.

Set up this screen

The configuration of this screen allows you to determine which fields and tables will be displayed in
product registration, in addition to other options explained below.
General
Types of Available Products
Select in this table the Types of products that will be used by the company. The types
available are: Normal, Grade, Edition and for the Corporate versions are also available
the types: Series and Batch - Validity.
This option is for registering products that have no characteristics at all.
exclusive.
Grade: Use this option to control products that have Color and Size, such as clothes.
footwear.
Editing: This option is more commonly used in newsstands/bookstores to control the edition of the
magazines.
Series (Available only for Corporate versions): This option is used in stores of
cell phones, where product control is done by the serial number.
Batch - Validity (Available only for Corporate versions): This option is more
used in Pharmacies for the control of medication expiration dates.
Special Classification Fields
They are optional fields for the product search, which will be used when the
classifications of Class, Subclass, Group, and Family are not sufficient. These fields
they can be named in the most coherent way for your company.
After the search fields are created, they will be shown in Registration / Basics /
Reference to Products, with the given name(s).
The research registration must be created in Basic Registrations, so that you can then select
the classifications created in the Product registration.
Example: In a bookstore there will be the following Class, Subclass, Group, and Family:

Class Subclass Group Family

Bookstore Books National Fiction
Stationery Magazines Imported Livros Técnicos
Magazine store Dictionaries Biography
Presents Encyclopedias Children's Literature

66
 And the created research fields will be: Author, Publisher, ISBN.
Next Code Available (Available only for Corporate versions)
This option facilitates the search for the Next Code for companies that work with some
products registered with the manufacturer's code and others with internal code.
Type in this field the code that should be the maximum for the products that will be registered.
with the internal code, the system will then search for the next code within this limit.
Example: In your company, the product screen was set up with the Next Code
Available, with a maximum number of 1000.
For the first registered product, code 1 was used.
For the second one, the barcode that comes with the product was used: 7897777777775.
When registering the third product, using the internal code, the system will look for the next one.
code or number 2. If this option had not been filled in, it would be 7897777777776.
Product Code
In this frame, you can configure the following options:
Allows the use of letters and numbers: By selecting this option, it will be allowed to register products
with alphanumeric code.
Only numbers: Selecting this option will allow only numbers to be entered in the field.
code.

Price Tables
Configure in this tab which price tables will be shown on the product registration screen.
In it, it will be possible to configure up to 6 (six) sales price tables and one table for the price.
of cost. If you do not use all the tables, you can select the option Do not show.
To display the price tables in the product registration, make the following configuration:
• Check the option Show Price Table;
• In the fields Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, Table 6, and Cost, click on the arrow
next to it and select the table you want to display.
• If you are not going to use all the tables, select the option Do not show.
• Then click the Save button.

Fields to Display
The configuration of this tab will determine which fields and frames will be displayed on the screen.
Product registration. Using this configuration will make your registration easier and faster.
You can set the following options:
• Prices with 3 decimal places:
• Code used by the manufacturer;
• Location;
• Observation;
• Manufacturer;
• Commission;
• Accepts fractional quantity;
• Discount.
Pasta to Show
Determine which tabs will be displayed on the Product registration screen. The available tabs
are:
• Additional;
• Taxes.

67
Registering product
To register the product, it is necessary to fill in the Code, Name, Type, Class, Subclass,
Currency. The registration of Group, Family, and the Research fields are optional.
Code
This field allows up to 20 digits, consisting of letters and numbers depending on the configuration made in
configure this screen and the type of product to be registered.
On the right side of this field is the icon to bring the next code to be registered.
Attention: When using Letters in the product codes, the option to bring the Next Code
Available will not consider alphanumeric codes, only numeric ones.
Name
This field allows up to 50 digits, including letters and numbers.
Type
Select in this field the type of product being registered. The options are: Normal,
Grade, Edition, Series, and Batch, according to the configuration.

Registering a product with Normal Type

To register a normal product, the code can have a maximum of 20 digits including letters and
numbers.
The stock initialization can be done through the Other Options field that is located
in the footer of this screen, or through the entries screen.

Registering a product with Type Grid

The product code to be registered must have between 4 and 8 numeric digits. It will be used
but 3 digits for the size code and 3 for the color.
Example: The product code is 654321, the size code is 10, and the color code is 3.
The grid code will be 654321010003. The system will complete the codes with 0 (Zero).
Size and Color to make them with 3 digits each.
A button named 'Grade' will be displayed at the bottom of the screen, where you can create the
combinações das cores e tamanhos do produto e informar o estoque inicial. As cores e os
sizes must be pre-registered in basic registrations / Regarding Products.
The creation of the grid facilitates inventory control of products with the combinations of
sizes and colors. The price will be the same for the various combinations created by product.
Clicking the button will display the following information:
Include New Products in the Grid (Ctrl + F2)
In this tab select the sizes and colors related to the product to create the combinations of the
grade.
Select the sizes to include
In this section, select all the sizes that the registered product contains.
Select the colors to include
In this box, select all the colors that the registered product contains. Then, click on the
Include Selections button.
The table below will list the created combinations and in each row you can provide the
following options:

68
 Stock
It is possible to report the initial stock of each combination created. Stock can only be reported
In this option, when you are registering the product. Then you will have to use the screen of
entries to update the inventory.
Label
This option allows you to register the quantity of labels you want to print for each.
combination.
For the Corporate versions, it is possible to register the product codes used by
manufacturers / suppliers in the fields Manufacturer Code 1 and Manufacturer Code 2. At the moment
From the sale, the system will consider these codes for the product search.
Attention: If there is any non-existent combination in the grid, you can select the line.
correspondent and press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete.
Verify / Change Existing Schedule (Ctrl + F3)
On this screen, you can view the entire registered schedule for the product and change the codes of the
Manufacturers / Suppliers.
Attention: When deleting a row from the grid, make sure that it has not been used in
no movement in the system, as this information will no longer appear in the print of
reports and on the transactions made.
Registering a product with Edit Type
To register a product with the Edition type, it is mandatory that the code has 13 digits.
The product movement will use 13 digits for the product code and 5 more digits.
for the edition code.
When saving a product with the Edit type, a button will be shown at the bottom of the screen.
nomeEdição, onde poderá informar todas asEdiçõesdo produto.
To register the edition:
• Click on the Edit button;
• Code: Please enter the code pertaining to the edition.
• Nome:Informe o nome e/ou o número da edição.
Example: If the magazine has its monthly edition, the name of the month can be typed as:
January, February or if the magazine is weekly, it can be typed as 1st week, 2nd week.
Attention: The stock of the edited product must be initiated and updated through the screen.
Entries, in the Movement module. Before performing any operation on the Entry screen,
register the editions in the product registration, in the Edit button.

Registering a product with Type Series

(Available only for Corporate versions)
When saving a product with type Series, a button will be displayed at the bottom of the screen with the
nomeSérie, onde poderá visualizar o historico das séries cadastradas. O estoque do produto
can be started in the Other Options field.
In all movements made with products with a serial number, it will be necessary to have
product in hand so that the correct serial number of the part being can be informed
busy.
The Order operation cannot be made with products with a series. The Shop Control
provides exclusive reports for series products.

69
Registering a product with Batch Type - Expiry
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In all transactions involving products with a batch, it will be necessary to have the product.
in hands so that the correct batch of the product being moved can be informed.
For products with Lot, it will not be possible to carry out loan transactions.
goods and orders.
When recording a product with the Batch Type, a button will be displayed at the bottom of the screen with the
lotName, where you will be able to view all the registered lots.
The stock of the products with Lotep can be started in the Other Options field or on the screen of
Entries in the movement module.
Unit of sale
Fill in this option with the product's unit of sale. Example: Kg (Kilogram), Un (Unit)
Cx (Box), M (Metro), etc.
Location
It is used to inform the location of the product in your company. Example: in which
shelf or section he is in.
Discount
By informing the discount percentage in this field, at the time of sale the product price
it will be shown already with the discount, regardless of the price table that is being used.
Manufacturer
Use this field to inform the name of the product's manufacturer.
Desconto Máx (%) (Disponível somente para as versões Corporate)
It is used to inform the maximum discount that can be given to the product at the time of
sale.
Attention: In sales, the system will consider the lowest registered discount percentage among
the maximum discount options by product, seller, price table and output screen.
Product Situation
Control stock of this product
Check this option to control the product stock. If this option is unchecked, the
The product stock will always appear as zero, regardless of the transactions made.
Accepts fractional quantity
Mark to inform that the product can be sold in units that require
fractional quantity. Example: weight, meters, etc.
Prices with 3 decimal places
Check this option if the product price has 3 (three) decimal places. Example: the prices
of fuels - R$ 9.999.
Do not include in the price lists
Check this option so that the product does not appear on the report: Print prices (Table of
prices).
Inactive
By marking this option, the Product will not appear on the system's search screens (outputs, inputs,
etc). It will be allowed to perform all operations in the system, but for that you will need to enter the code
of the product. If you need to also restrict the movement of the product, you can mark the
optionsBlocked for Sale and Blocked for Any Movement.

70
 Allows name complement (Available only for Corporate versions)
By selecting this option, a field will appear at the time of sale that will be used for the
descrição do produto. Essa descrição ficará gravada na tela de vendas.
Example: In a paint store, several combinations for colors are created, in this case, it will be
registered the product Paint (according to its specifications) and at the time of sale, in
complementary field, the reference of the created paint color will be typed.
Blocked for sale (Available only for Corporate versions)
By selecting this option, it will be possible to use all the system's operations to move the
product, except, the sale operation.
Example 1: The Supplier delivers a new product and sets a date for the
start of the sale. This date must be the same as the product launch date.
By selecting this option, you will be able to transfer this product between branches on a specific date.
free it by unchecking this option so that employees can sell the product.
Example 2: The supplier informs that the product has been discontinued and can no longer be sold.
because it will be replaced by another one. By checking this option, it will not be possible to make a sale with the
product, but it may generate the return operation to the supplier to remove it from inventory.
Blocked from any movement (Available only for Corporate versions)
By selecting this option, it will not be possible to make any type of movement.
Observations
Enter in this field information regarding the product. On the sales screen, the sellers will have
access to these descriptions and will also be able to search by the Notes field.
Stock
This table shows information about the stock of the originating branch and all branches.
registered in the system.
Last Purchase
This table shows information from the last purchase made of the product: Date, Price
Supplier.

Additions (Ctrl+F3)
Supplier
In this form, up to 5 (five) suppliers of the product can be listed. The names may be
manually added, as explained below. The fifth position can be updated.
according to the input screen, depending on the configuration chosen in the module
Settings, in Input Operations.
To add the supplier's name:
• In the supplier field, press Down Arrow on the keyboard to search;
• Select the supplier of the product.
• Click the Add button;
• The name of the product supplier will be shown in the box below;
• Click the Save button (F2).
To remove the supplier's name.
• In the Supplier field, enter the code of the supplier selected in the box below;
• Click the Remove button;
• The name of the product supplier will be removed from the board.

71
 Pesos
In this section, you can provide the weight of the product. Filling out this field is important.
for companies that work with carriers, as the total weight will be calculated
products and printed on the invoice.
Liquid: Enter only the weight of the product in this field.
Gross: Enter in this field the total weight of the product with the packaging.

Product Photo
In this box, you can add the product photo to be shown on sales and consultation screens.
of the products, etc.
The maximum size for including the photo is up to 30 Kb, in JPG or GIF format. The size of
photo is 225 x 150 pixels.
If the photos are viewed by NET stations, it is recommended that they be the size
maximum of 10 Kb, thus making the query faster.
Commission
In this table, you can determine if the commission to be paid for the sale of the product will be in
percentage or in value.
The commission of this product overrides the seller's commission.
Select this field if the product has a commission percentage/value different from the one that
is in the employee's record. At the time of the sale of this product, it will be considered the
percentage / value provided here to calculate the commission. Otherwise, it will be calculated the
percentage defined in the Employee registration.
Code used by the manufacturer / supplier
É possível cadastrar até 2 (dois) códigos que o Fabricante / Fornecedor utiliza para o produto
for the Corporate versions and 1 (one) for the advanced version, in addition to the internal code already created. The
the system will also search for products using these codes.
Attention: In most reports, the internal code of the products will be used, for the
printing.

Taxes
Tax Classification
Select the tax classification, which must have previously been registered on the registration screen of
Tax Classification, related to the product.
Tax Classes
Select the Tax Class, which must have been created on the Tax Class screen.
menuCadastros Básicos, referente ao produto.
Name for Note
Use this field if you want the product name to be printed on the invoice.
different from the registered.

Message for Note

Select the message, which must have been created on the message screen for the note in the menu.
basic registration, to be printed on the invoice as a product remark.

72
Other options
Shows information regarding the product inventory and its movements. Contains the
following options:
Initial Stock
When registering the product, select this option to enter the initial stock. This option
it can only be used if no entry and exit transactions have been made with the
product.
Products recorded with Normal Type can have the stock started in the Other field.
options. After the inventory has started, only the entry screen should be used to record the
quantity in stock.
For products recorded with Type Grid, start the stock on the Grid button.
For products recorded with the Edition Type, start the inventory on the Entries screen in the module
Movement.
The products recorded with the Serial Type and with the Batch Type may have their stock initiated.
in the field Other options. After the stock has started, only the screen of should be used
entries to launch the quantity in stock.
Current Stock
This option allows the consultation of the stock of all registered branches. It allows viewing
also the stock of products loaned to customers, pending orders, reserved,
orders and balance for future delivery. By clicking on the gray area, you can check more
details about each stock situation.
Minimum / Ideal Stock
This option allows the minimum/ideal stock to be determined for each of the branches.
registered.
This data will be used later in the Products to Buy report.
Launch the same Minimum / Ideal stock for all branches: This option allows for it to be
entered the same minimum and ideal stock for all registered branches.
To launch the minimum stock for all branches:
• Provide the minimum and ideal stock in their respective fields;
• Click the Launch button;
• All registered branches in the system with the specified inventory will be listed.
Caso a sua empresa trabalhe com estoqueMínimo / Idealdiferenciados por filiais, é possível
inform these data for each branch.
In the frame that shows the information of the registered branches.
• Click on the branch line you wish to change;
• In the fields, type Minimum Stock and Ideal Stock;
• Click the Save Changes button.
Latest Movements
This option will show information from the last 30 entries and exits made.
with the selected product.
This screen shows the following information:
Show the dates of the latest transactions made with the product.
Output: Shows the quantity of product that left the stock.
Displays the quantity of product that entered the stock.

73
 Final Stock: Shows the stock situation after the product movement.
Description: Shows the type of movement and sequence performed.
Documents
This screen is used to store documents related to the registration of the located product.
When attaching a document in the product registration, the icon will appear. If there is not
attached document will show the icon .
Attention: In the Advanced version, it is possible to store a maximum of 10 files, summing all.
the documents stored in the registration of Clients/Suppliers, Products, on the screen of
Vendase móduloEscritório.
For more information, see the chapter Documents.
Search (F6)
This screen facilitates the search and/or research of products so that changes can be made to the
registrations.
Menu Options
This menu contains options that will facilitate the registration of your products, as you will be able to select
the fields you want to keep for the registration of upcoming products.
For example: You are registering several products that belong to a class.
• Click on the Options menu;
• Click on the Keep Class option;
• When clearing the screen to register a new product, this field will remain filled.
Attention: When registering a new product, check if the product belongs to all fields
fixed. When closing the Product Registration screen, this setting will be undone. The options
available are: Maintains Class, Maintains Subclass, Maintains Group, Maintains Family,
["Keeps Currency","Keeps Sales Unit","Keeps Discount","Keeps Maximum Discount"]
Keeps Location, Keeps Manufacturer, Keeps Name and Keeps Taxes.
Copy Product (Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows you to copy the data from an already registered product to a new product, with
different code.
New code: In this field, enter the new code for the product.
Information to be copied
In this frame, select the options you want to copy along with the registration information of the
products.
You may copy the following information:
Cost / Selling price calculation: Select this field to copy the data provided in
Cost Calculation Screen.
Photos: Select this field to copy the product photo.
Promotional prices: Select this field to copy the promotional prices of the product.
Click this button to copy the product data.
Change Class, Subclass, etc
This option allows changing the classes, subclasses, group, family, and the search fields, to
products already registered.
To change this information:
• Click on the option Change Class, Subclass, etc;
• Select the option you want to change, in the field What do you want to change?

74
• Click the Continue button to change the product rating.
• Select the new information and click on Change.
Change Code
This option allows you to change the code of the located product.
To change the code:
• Click on the Change Code option;
• Enter the new desired code on the screen that will open;
• Click on Change Code.
Attention: The Change Code option may take time, depending on the amount of
product movements in the database.

75
Customer Registration and
Suppliers
In this screen, customer, supplier, and reseller registrations can be carried out.
carriers, commissioned and others. These records will be used, in the future, in
sales operations, purchases, receipts, payments, reports, among others.
Some registrations made previously may be used on this screen optionally. The
optional registrations are: Customer Class, Direct Mail Groups, Bank Accounts,
Vendedores, Tipo de Contatos Efetuados.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Customers and Suppliers menu and in Registration.

Configure this Screen

The configuration of this screen will be used to determine which fields will be displayed on the screen.
of registration and which will have mandatory filling.
General
In this tab, you can configure the CNPJ / CPF and create code ranges for each.
one of the classifications contained in the system.
Regarding the CNPJ / CPF
On this screen you can configure the restrictions for the registration of CNPJ / CPF.
Do not save empty: By selecting this option, it will be possible to register only if the
CNPJ / CPF field must be filled in.
Do not record duplicate: By marking this option, it will not be possible to make two registrations with the
same CNPJ / CPF.
Do not record incorrectly: Checking this option will verify the CNPJ / CPF number, no
allowing the recording of invalid numbers.
Code strips for new records (Available only for Corporate versions)
The system allows the creation of code ranges for each of the classifications contained in the system.
This option makes it easier and faster to search for the next code of the customer, supplier, reseller,
carrier, commissioned or others, at the time of registration.
The code field is numeric and allows up to 10 (ten) digits.
Attention: When choosing to make this configuration, it is important to analyze whether the specified range
among the codes will cover future records, as it will not be possible to change this range after the
start of registrations.
Block outside the range: Select to disallow records outside the created ranges.
Example:
Type Of Until
Client 1001 9999
Supplier 401 1000
Reseller 101 200
Others 1 100
Commissioned 201 300
Carrier 301 400

76
 Attention: If a code range is not created for each type of registration, leave the fields
in blank, as the system will automatically fill it with zero (0).
Fields to Show
The configuration of this tab will determine which fields will be displayed on the registration screen.
Client and Supplier.
Additional options, Additional 2, Contacts Made or Credit in the Show Tabs folder
they are configurable. By checking these options, you can determine which functions you want to display in
each of them. If you do not select the Additional or Additional 2 options, it will not be necessary.
fill in the corresponding table to them.
In the Cadastrais tab, select the fields to be displayed in the Cadastrais tab.
(Ctrl+F2), selecionando somente os campos que serão utilizados pela empresa.
In this framework, one can also configure the Standard Type and the Physical/Juridical field.
Standard Type: Choose the type of registration that will be most used for making the records of the
company as client, supplier, reseller, carrier, commissioned and others, or leave
in blank so that the type can be chosen at the time of registration.
Physical/Legal: Choose the type of person that will be most used to make the records or
leave it blank to be chosen at the time of registration.
Required Fields
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab, mark the fields that will be mandatory to fill in at the time of saving.
of the record.
The fields that can be selected are: Fantasy, Address, Complement, Neighborhood,
Cidade, Estado, CEP, Telefone, Fax, Inscrição e Endereço de Entrega.

Registering Customer / Supplier

Code: The Code field is numeric and allows up to 10 (ten) digits.
If you have configured the use of the New Code Range option in the system
Records, by clicking on the icon next to the code, will have the options: Show client code,
Mostra código fornecedor,Mostra código revendedor,Mostra código transportadora,
Show commissioned code and show other code. Choose one of these options for the
System show what the next available code is to be used.
Nome:Digite o nome do cliente que está sendo cadastrado.
Type: Determine what type of registration is being made. If the configuration of
If the system is set to use the code range, it will automatically fill in the field. In addition to
customer and supplier options, one can also make the following records.
Reseller: Select this option to register the people who buy your products.
for reselling.
Carrier: Select this option to register the company's carriers.
Registration will be used in the future for invoicing and for calculating freight.
Commissioned: Select this option to register people who do not work at the company.
but they indicate clients for purchases. and receive a percentage of commission. On the sales screen it is
it is possible to select the commissioned person for their commission to be generated.

When selecting the Commissioned Type, the Commission Percentage field will be shown on the screen.
where you can inform the percentage that will be used to calculate the commission amounts.
Example 1: In a compounding pharmacy.

77
 Doctors recommend their clients to buy the prescribed medications. In this pharmacy, this
the doctor will be registered with the Commissioned Type.
Example 2: A Construction Materials Store.
The architect advises his clients to purchase the material for the construction. In this store, this architect
will be registered with the Commissioned Type.

Registration (Ctrl+F2)
Search ZIP code (Available only for Corporate versions)
On this screen, it will be possible to search for the address by ZIP code. To do this, click on the magnifying glass icon.
next to the Address field, and enter the desired ZIP code.
When entering the ZIP code in the search screen, do not use punctuation or spaces.
Example: The ZIP code is 80.000-000, you should enter 80000000.
Physical / Legal
By selecting the Physics option, the fields CPF and RG will be displayed for you to fill in.
filled.
Ao selecionar a opção Jurídica, serão mostrados os camposCNPJeInscrição Estadualpara
that should be filled in.
Desconto (%)
When a discount percentage is entered in this field, it will be calculated on all sales.
made for this registration.
Class
In this field, you can inform which class of clients you belong to. Please fill out this field.
with one of the options that should already be registered in Client / Supplier Class,
basic registrations.
Seller
When selecting a seller in the customer registration, it will appear automatically in
moment of sale. It may be changed if necessary.
Exclusive Seller (Available only for Corporate versions)
Mark this option after selecting the seller. At the time of sale, it will not be possible.
Change the seller. Every sale made to this customer will generate commission for this seller.
Inactive
By selecting this option, the Client / Supplier will not appear in the system's search screens.
(outputs, inputs, reports, etc). All operations will be allowed in the system for him,
but the customer's / supplier's code must be entered.
Blocked
By selecting this option, operations for the Client / Supplier will not be allowed. Your
data will appear on the system's search screens.
Do Not Include in the Direct Mail
With this option checked, the registration will not be included in the file for printing of mailing.
Right.
Last purchase
In this field, the date of the last purchase made in this branch will be displayed.
in All Branches.

78
 Contact People
This form will be used to register the contact persons' information at the company.
Client / Supplier.
To add a new contact:
• Click on the icon ;
• A window will open where the name of the contact person will be typed;
• The following data will appear to be filled in: Position B, Anniversary Day, Month
Aniv, Ano Nasc.,Ramal,Telefone,e-maileSexo.

Add-ons (Ctrl+F3)
In this tab you can register additional information regarding the client, such as email, limit of
credit, payment methods, among others.
Credit Information (Client)
In this context, determine the maximum credit amount that the customer will have for installment purchases. In
At the time of the sale, an analysis of this customer's credit limit will be made, if this limit
if exceeded, the system will not allow the sale.
for the Corporate versions it will be possible to control the date the credit was released and also
determine an expiration date for a new analysis to be conducted.
Limite de Crédito (R$):Digite o valor do limite de crédito que o cliente terá com a empresa.
Analysis / Reanalysis Date (Available only for Corporate versions): Enter the date
the client's credit analysis was conducted.
Expiration Date (Available only for Corporate versions): Enter in this field the
data of the new analysis that will be made of the customer's credit.
For example, the reanalysis will be done every six months, enter the corresponding date for
expiration of this period.
Payment Methods
In this section, select whether the customer can make purchases with Check, Pre-check, and installments.
Can be purchased with a check: For cash sales made with checks.
You can buy with a pre-check: For installment sales, paid in installments with a check.
Can be purchased in installments: For sales on credit, in installments with tickets or payment books.

Carrier
This field is used to specify which carrier will be used for this customer.
Facilitating at the time of sale.
Freight
In this context, determine the freight charging method and the carrier at the moment of sale.
this data will be filled in automatically.
Not applicable: The freight will not be calculated in the sale and will not be included in the invoice, as the
merchandise is picked up on-site.
Payment by the Customer: The freight will be charged to the customer, calculated at the sale and added to the total.
invoice.
Shipping paid by the company: The freight will be paid by the company. The freight amount will be printed on the invoice.
fiscal, but it will not be included in the total of the invoice.

Municipal Registration
Enter the municipal registration number in this field

79
 Protested client
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option if the client has been sent for protest.
Seller 2
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Fill in this field if you want to define a standard seller 2 for this customer.
Notebook account
The Account Notebook allows the customer to make purchases at the company without specifying the date for the
payment.
Customer has an account: Check this option to allow the customer to have a notebook account on
company.
Account closes date (Available only for Corporate versions): Specify in this field
the best day for settling the customer's bill.
Home Page
Enter in this field the email address of the client's personal/company website.
e-mail
Provide the email for contact with the Customer / Supplier in this field.

e-mail Finance Department

Available only for Corporate versions
The email provided in this field will be used in the Financial module for sending
charges for the client.
Manager Comment
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this field, comments for this registration can be added. The change and/or addition
This field depends on the permissions configured in the employee registration.
Extra Data
(Available only for Corporate versions)
If you want to add the following data:
Nearby streets: Fill in with nearby reference streets to the client's address.
The message registered in this field will be
displayed on the sales screen when this customer is selected.
Mandatory price table: By selecting a price table in this field, it will be
it is mandatory to use it at the time of sale.

Does not allow loan transactions of goods

Check this option to not allow merchandise loans for this customer.

Add-ons 2 (Ctrl+F4)
In this tab you can provide the client's additional addresses and also business registration.
select the groups for direct mail.

80
 Billing Data
Enter the customer's billing information on this tab. This data will be used at the time
from the sale, for printing the boleto and for generating the CNAB file.
In this field, it will be possible to add a specific address for billing.
Bank account: Select the company bank account where payments will be recorded.
two tickets.
Men. ticket: Fill in with the message to be printed on the ticket, for the customer.
Encoded instructions for the bank (CNAB): The codes will be provided by your bank.
through the documentation. If you work with generating CNAB file, use these
fields for specific instructions for this client.
Delivery Address
In this box, it will be possible to add a specific delivery address.
Accounting.
Code for Accounting
Groups for Direct Mail
In this frame, inform which interest groups the client belongs to.
The registration of Groups for Direct Mail must be previously registered in the menu.
Basics.
To add a Mail Merge Group:
• In the GroupField, press Down Arrow on the keyboard to search or enter the code of
Group;
• Click the Add button;
• The chosen groups will be displayed in the frame to the side.
To delete a Group from the Mailing List:
• Select the line that shows the group you want to delete;
• Click the Delete button.
Determine Client Branch
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This frame allows selecting the branch where the customer was registered, thus facilitating the
printing of customer reports by branch.
Exclusive to this Branch: By marking this option, the customer will be exclusive to the branch that was
registered, not allowing a sale to be made at another branch.
Business Registration
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This field should be filled out only for legal entities, according to the information
provided by the client / supplier.
Corporate Structure: Provide the name(s) of the partner(s) as per the Articles of Incorporation.
Clients and Suppliers: Enter the reference data for credit confirmation.
Foundation Date: Date the company was founded.
Social Capital: Value of the capital, according to the social contract.
Credit Inquiry: Information obtained from credit protection agencies.
Other Information: Fill in this field with additional information.

81
Contacts Made (Ctrl + F5)
In this tab you can register all contacts made with the client and schedule a follow-up.
This screen contains the following fields:
The system automatically fills in the date when contact was made with the customer.
Who said: Show the name of the employee who made the contact;
Who did you talk to: Enter the name of the person you spoke with on the day of contact.
Descrição:Permite digitar uma descrição sobre o contato que o funcionário efetuou.
Type: Select the type of contact that will be made with the client. Fill in this field with
one of the options registered in Contact Types Made, must have been created in
basic registrations.
Data remember: Enter the date for the return.

New
To include a new contact.
• Click the New button;
• A window will open, select the type of contact that will be made;
• Fill in the fields with the desired information;
• Click the Save button (F2).
Change Contact Type
If you wish to change the Type of Contact Made:
• Select the line of the contact you wish to change by clicking on the gray side located at the corner.
left;
• Click the Change Contact Type button;
• A window will open, select the newType;
• Click the Save button (F2).
Delete a Contact
• Select the line you want to delete by clicking on the gray side located in the left corner;
• Press the Delete key on the keyboard;
• Then confirm the deletion.

Credit (Ctrl F6)

Fill in this tab with the client's personal data for credit analysis.
Record pending analysis
(Available only for the Corporate Plus version)
Select this option for the area responsible for the client's credit analysis to view
this registration through the Pending Credit Analysis screen.
Credit Sheet Print
Click on the printer icon, located on the right side of the screen, to print the form of
customer credit. Clicking this button will open the Customer Credit screen, where you can provide
the following data:
Client: Select the client you want to print.
You can insert up to 5 (five) additional texts in the credit form, with 50 (fifty)
characters each.
Print date: Select this field to print the date on the credit form.

82
 Print space for signature: Select this field to print on the credit form, the
space for the customer's signature.

Information (F10)
On this screen, you can verify the information of the registration that is being viewed, such as
outflows, inflows, accounts payable, receivables, checks, cards, and customer account.
General (F2)
This tab will display the registration data.
Sales / Entries (F3)
In this tab, you can check all the entries and exits made for this registration.
In this field, enter the start date you want to check the data.
Until: In this field, enter the end date for which you want to check the data.
Type
In this field, you can choose the type of grouping you want to verify the data. You can
choose between:
By month and year: Select this option to display the movement data grouped by
month and year.

By sequence: Select this option to display the transaction data grouped by

sequence.
Without grouping: Select this option to display the movement data without any
Grouping. The data will be listed by product line.
Decimal Quantity
Select this option to display the number with two decimal places in the Qtdedo column.
product.
Remount
Click this button to show the selected data in the grid.
Pay (F4)
This tab will display the paid and outstanding accounts for the selected registration.
Summary
This table shows the financial summary of the accounts payable and paid for the selected record.
Possui as seguintes informações:Quantidade de Contas,Valor Total das Contas,Total
Pago,Total a Pagar,Total Pago em Dia,Total Pago Atrasado,Média de Dias de Atrasoe
Total Overdue.
Accounts
In this field, select the type of filter you want to use to show the accounts. You will be able to
choose between: Pay, PayAll.
You pay
In this field, you can select to show the settled, unsettled, or paid accounts.
all. This field will only be populated when selecting the Paid option.
Remount
Click this button to show in the grid the accounts related to the previous selection. The rows will be
shown in the following colors:
Red: Shows overdue and unpaid bills.

83
 Orange: Shows the bills due.
Green: Shows the bills paid on time.
Preta: Show the overdue paid bills.
Receive (F5)
This tab will display the received and receivable accounts for the selected registration.
Summary
This table shows the financial summary of accounts received and to be received for registration.
selected. It has the following information: Number of Accounts, Total Amount of
Contas,Total Recebido,Total a Receber,Total Recebido em Dia,Total Recebido
Atrasado,Média de Dias de AtrasoeTotal Vencido
Accounts
In this field, select the type of filter you want to use to display the accounts. You will be able to
choose between: Receive, Received and All: Select this option to show all
invoices received and to be received.
Received
In this field, select to show the settled, unsettled, or all receivables.
This field will only be populated when selecting the Received option.
Remount
Click this button to show in the grid the accounts related to the previous selection. The rows will be
shown with the following colors:
Red: Shows overdue and unpaid bills.
Orange: Shows the accounts to be paid.
Green: Shows the bills received on time.
Preta: Show the accounts received late.
Cheques / Card (F6)
This tab will display the checks and cards received from the selected registration.
Customer Account (F7)
This tab will show the amount received and to be received from the client account (notebook).
Accounts
In this field, select the type of filter you want to use to display the accounts. You will be able to
escolher entre:Receber,RecebidaseTodas.
Mounted
Click this button to show the accounts/client with the selected data in the grid.

Search (F6)
This screen facilitates the search and/or research of records, thereby speeding up the service and the
changes in registrations.
Type the text to search
Type the full name or part of the name for the system to perform the search.
Types to Search
In this table, it is possible to apply a filter for the type of record to search.

84
 This filter can be made with Client, Supplier, Commissioned, Reseller, Others and / or
Carrier.
Fields Where to Search
After typing the text to search, you can mark which information you want to search for.
Pesquise com os seguintes campos: Nome, Fantasia, CNPJ / CPF, Fone 1, Fone 2, Cidade,
Estado, Endereço, Bairro.
Active / Inactive
You can search for records that are Active, Inactive, or All.
Last Purchase
(Available only for Corporate versions)
By selecting the option Show records with the last purchase from, it will display
all records that had transactions from the date provided in the field next to it.
Branch field select whether the search should be done only in the current branch or in all branches
registered.
City / State
In this frame, you can determine in which City and/or State the research will be conducted.

Registration Date
(Available only for Corporate versions)
By selecting the option Show records with registration starting from, all will be displayed
records that were created from the date provided in the field next to it.
Number of records to display
Determine the maximum number of records to be displayed on the screen.
Attention: The smaller the selected amount for the search, the faster the response will be.
from the research.

The choice for the maximum number of records to be displayed should be made considering
the total number of machines on the network. If it is found that the response is delayed, for a certain
Network, select a smaller number of records to display.
For oNET it is recommended to work with the minimum possible number of records, to
that the response be faster. The recommended maximum number of records is 30, consider
also the number of machines.
After selecting the search options, click the Search button (F6).
The search result will be displayed at the bottom of the Customer registration screen.
Supplier, right above the buttons. Next to the right of the search result, are the icons
that serve to expand and reduce the scope of research.

Options
This menu contains options that will facilitate the registration of your clients, as you will be able to select the
fields you want to keep for the next registrations, change the exclusive seller and also
import text file.
Change the seller for multiple customers at the same time
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows you to change the salesperson that was selected in the client's registration. This function
it will facilitate when there is a need to transfer all customers from a certain

85
 seller to another, without needing to manually change each registration one by one. It can be used
when a salesperson leaves the company and their clients will be transferred to a new salesperson
hired, for example.
To change the seller:
• Enter the Customer / Supplier registration;
• Click on the menu Options / Change Seller (Multiple at the same time);
• In the old Seller field, enter/select the code of the old seller;
• In the new Salesperson field, enter/select the code of the salesperson that will replace the previous one.
• Click on Change Seller.
Keep Fields
These options are used to keep the fields filled after clearing the screen to register a
new client. The options that can be used are: Keeps City, Keeps State,
{"message":"Keeps Message for Invoice","class":"Keeps Class","type":"Keeps Physical/Legal"}

Attention: When registering a new customer, check if the maintained fields belong to them first.
to record. When closing the Customer / Supplier registration screen, this setting will be
undone.
Change Code
This option allows you to change the code of the located customer/supplier.
To change the code:
• Click on the Change Code option;
• Type the desired new code in the screen that will open;
• Click on Change Code.
Attention: The Change Code option may take some time, depending on the amount of
sales/purchases made for the registered location.

Photo
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this section, you can add a photo to the client/supplier registration. The photo will be displayed.
nas telas de vendas pressionando a teclaAlt+F.
The maximum size to include the photo is up to 30 Kb, in JPG or GIF format. The size of
the photo is 225 x 150 pixels. If the photos are viewed through NET stations, it is recommended
that has a maximum size of 10Kb, thus making the query faster.

Documents
This screen is used to store documents related to the registration of the Client / Supplier.
You can upload files about the client or scanned documents: such as contracts,
receipts, letters, emails received or sent, etc.
For more information, consult the Documents chapter.
The stored document will be shown on the Customer / Supplier screen or on the screen
Office Document
Attention: In the Advanced version, it is possible to store a maximum of 10 files, adding them all together.
the documents stored in the Customers/Suppliers registration, Products, on the Sales Screen,
Output Screen and Office Module.

Lamp
Click on this icon to verify the following product registration data.

86
Record count
Select this option to check the number of registrations. This information will appear in the
footer on the left side.
Latest Transactions
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option to check the latest movements of the selected record. In this
The screen will be able to verify the following information from the transactions: Branch, Date, Type of Movement,
Cli ForeEntry, Exit.

87
Credit Sheets for Analysis
(Available only for the Corporate Plus version)
This function allows an employee to provide a client's registration for analysis and
credit approval.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Client/Supplier menu, in the Client/Supplier option on the Credit tab (F6).

Customer/Supplier Registration
At the time of registration, the employee must select the option 'Pending analysis'.
Credit (Ctrl+F6). By selecting this option, the client's record will remain open.
waiting for approval.

Message for Analysis

You can send a message notifying the employee responsible for credit analysis that
The registration is awaiting approval. To send the message click the button. .For
For more information, see the chapter Messages.

Pending Credit Analyses

On this screen, the registrations of clients awaiting credit release will be listed.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Client / Supplier menu, on the Pending Credit Analysis option.
Remount list
Click this button to update the open registrations.
Automatically remounts every
In this field you can set a period for automatic updates of the registrations for the
analysis. You can choose between 1 (one), 3 (three), 5 (five), and 10 (ten) minutes to do the
automatic update.
Registrations for the analysis
The registrations of clients waiting for analysis will be listed. In this framework, it will be
Displayed the code, name, and registration date. Double click on the line of the desired client.
to open the registration.

88
Mail Merge – Record Selection
This screen is used to select the registration records of Client / Supplier for
print labels, letters or send direct mail emails.
To open this screen:
• Select the option Registration;
• Click on the Client / Supplier menu, in the Direct Mail option, in Selections.

General
This tab allows you to select the records that will be sent for the mail merge.
Type
In this section, choose the type of registration for sending. You can choose between: All, Customer,
Fornecedor,Revendedor,Transportadora,ComissionadoeOutros
Ativo / Inativo
Define in this table which registrations will be designated for direct mail. Select: All,
ActiveInactive.
Location
In this section, you can specify a City or State for the mailing.
Interest Groups
In this panel, you can select the registrations that belong to a certain Group of
Interest.
For more information, see the chapter Basic Registrations.
Customer / Supplier Class
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this panel, you can select the records that belong to a specific Class of
Clients / Supplier.
For more information, see the Basic Registrations chapter.
Registered Seller
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this frame, you can select the clients of a certain Seller.
For more information, see the chapter on Customer and Supplier Registrations.

Contacts
In this tab, you can select the contact people to whom you want to send the direct mail.
Number of Records
In this section, select the number of records you want to generate for each registration.
One for each Client / Supplier, with the name of the first contact: This option selects
only one record per registration with the name of the first person listed on the board
Contacts, in the registration of Client / Supplier.
One per Client / Supplier, without contact name: This option selects a record, without the
name of the contact person.

89
 One for each contact: This option generates a record for each existing contact in the registration.
Client / Supplier.
Birthday
In this panel, you can select the birthday celebrants of the month to generate the records.
Only for clients with a birthday in the month: In this field select the month you want
generate the records.
Precede the names of the contacts by
In this field, you can enter a form of treatment for the customer, so that it is printed beforehand.
of the contact name.
Dear Mr./Ms.,

Purchases
In this tab, you can select the customers who made purchases in a certain period and/or
selection by value. Also allows selecting customers without purchases.

Purchases
In this section, choose for which clients the records will be generated.
All: Check this option to select all records.
Only customers WITHOUT purchases since: Check this option to select customers who do not
buy from a certain date. Enter the date in the field next to generate the records.
Only customers WITH purchases between: Check this option to select the customers who
they made purchases in a certain period. Please provide the period in the field next to generate
the records.
Value of purchases
In this panel, you can select customers according to their purchase value in a
determined period.
Everyone
Check this option to select all customers regardless of the value.
Only those who meet the selection below
Check this option to inform the value and the period of the purchases.
Purchases: In this field, indicate whether you want to select purchases below or above the value.
desired. In the fields next to it, enter the value to be considered and the period.

Products
In this tab, you can select the customers who bought the products listed in the grid.
To insert the product:
• In the product field, specify the desired product;
• Click the OK button to insert the product into the grid;
• The code and name of the product(s) will be displayed on the grid.
To remove the product:
• Select the product line you want to remove;
• Click the Remove Selected button.

90
Type of Products
In this tab you can select the customers who purchased the products of a certain
class, subclass, group, and family. Search fields can also be used.
Allows more than one selection.
To insert the product ratings:
• In the fieldType select the classification;
• In the field Code, enter the code related to the chosen classification, or press Down Arrow.
for the selection of records.
• Click the OK button to add the type to the grid;
• The type, code, and name of the chosen classification will appear on the grid.
To remove one of the classifications:
• Select the line you want to remove;
• Click the Remove Selected button.

Select
Click on this tab to execute the record command with the chosen options.
Select records
Click this button to select the records for sending email or printing
labels. The sending of emails and printing of letters will be done through the Email Sending screen and
Printing of Letters is in the Customer / Supplier menu, in the Direct Mail option.

Before selecting the records, delete the existing ones.

This function is used to delete the old selections. Select this option to leave
only the records that belong to the current selection.

91
Manutenção de Mala Direta
On this screen, you can view the made selection and perform maintenance on the records, leaving
only the records for which you want to send the mail merge / email.
To open this screen:
• Select the registration option;
• Click on the Client and Supplier menu, in the Direct Mail/e-mail option and in Maintenance.

Update
Click this button to list the selected registrations. By clicking this button, you will be able to check
os seguintes dados:Código,Nome,Contato,e-mail,e-mail da empresaee-mail enviado.
Delete selected rows
Click this button to delete the selected rows from the list.
To delete one or more registrations:
• Select the line(s) you want to delete;
• To select more than one line use the Ctrl or Shift key.
• Click the button Delete selected rows.
Save Changes
Click this button to save the changes made.

92
Email sending and printing of
Letters
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This screen is used to configure the text layout for the mailing. This layout can be
used to send emails or for printing letters.
To open this screen:
• Select the optionRegister;
• Click on the Client and Supplier menu, in the Direct Mail / email option and Send email and
printing of letters.

Text
In this tab, you can configure and format the text of the layout for the email or mail merge letter.
The layout must be selected before submission or printing.
Open file
Click this button to open an existing mail merge layout.
To open the file:
• Click the Open file button;
• A screen will open with the configured layouts;
• Double click on the desired layout
Start new
Click this button to create a text layout for sending the mailings.
To format the text:
• Select the desired options in the toolbar;
• You can choose the formatting before typing the text or type the text and then choose the formatting.
formatting.
Choose between the following options:
Sources: Click on the arrow and select the desired font to set up the layout.
Font size: Click the arrow and select the desired size to configure the layout.
Font model: You can select for the font to be bold, italic, or underlined.
Model or Type of text: You can select for the text to be left-aligned,
right, centered or justified.
Markers: You can use markers for topics in the text.
Example: (·)
Numbering: You may use numbering for topics in the text.
Example: 1., 2., 3..
Save changes: Click this button to save the text settings.
Cancel: Click this button to cancel the changes made.
Substitutions: You can configure in the text to search for information from the database.
system. The text must be entered exactly as shown, including the signs of < and >.
The fields that can be used are:
It will be filled with the current system date.
The COMPANY will be filled with the name of the client.

93
 <NOME>:Será preenchida com o nome da pessoa para contato, caso tenha sido informado.
Address and additional information of the contact, if it exists
<BAIRRO>:Bairro do contato, se existir
<CIDADE/UF>:Cidade e estado do cotnato, se existir
<ZIP>: Contact zip code, if it exists
Text1, Text2, and Text3: Add these fields for temporary texts, which
will be filled through the Substitutions tab, before sending the email or printing the letter.
Save Changes
Click this button to enter the name of the created layout and save.
Substitutions
The replacement fields are used to type temporary texts used in the layout, and
can be modified depending on the notifications, the period of the mailing. Use these
fields for texts that will not be fixed in your layout. You can add up to three (3) fields of
Text. As explained above, in Start new.
Example: Inform about promotional products, validity of promotions, among others.

Send email / Print letters

In this tab, you can provide the information for sending emails or for printing letters.
What do you want to do
In this field, select the action for sending the direct mail. You can choose between: Send
emailPrint letters
Send email
If you select the option Send email, fill in the following fields.
Recipients
You can select to send the mail merge to a recipient or to everyone who has been
selected.
For an address: Check this option to send the direct mail to a recipient. Next to it,
Please provide the email address to which you wish to send. We recommend sending to an email.
specific or from the company for testing and verification.
For those already selected: Check this option to send the mailing to all registrations
selected on the Direct Mail Selection screen.
Email subject: In this field, provide the subject, which will be used as the title for the
email.
Send Configuration: Select in this field the email server configuration that
It was created in the Settings module, in the email menu. For more information, consult the
chapterEmail Server Settings.
Pause between emails: Select in this field the time for the system to wait before sending the
emails. You can choose to not pause or to pause for up to 5 seconds.
Send emails: Click this button to send the emails.
Impressão de Cartas
If you select the Print Letters option, fill in the field:
Printer: Select the printer that will be used.
Imprimir cartas:Clique neste botão para imprimir as cartas.

94
Summary
This panel will display shipping and printing data.
Success: This field will show the number of records that have been sent or printed with
success.
Errors: This field will show the number of records that encountered errors during submission.
or the impression.

95
Prices

96
Create Price Table
Enter on this screen the names of the price tables that will be used at the time of sale and
also in the products registration. Name only the tables you will use, leave the others.
in blank.
The registration of price tables will be the same for all branches. In the Settings module
No menu, prices will be able to define the tables for the branches.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the Prices menu on the Table Names option.

Selling Price Table

In this tab, up to fifteen (15) sales price tables can be named.
Example:
In field Table 1: the name of the table will be AT SIGHT.
In fieldTable 2: the name of the table will be 30 Days.
In field Table 3: the name of the table will be 60 Days.
Attention: In the product registration, you can view up to 6 sales tables. On the sales screen
All tables can be viewed, as long as the employee has access.

Cost Price
In this tab, up to ten (10) cost price tables can be named. The system considers as
cost price of the product the amount stated in the purchase. The update of the cost price will be
automatic when making a new entry.

Average Cost
In this tab, you can name up to ten (10) average cost tables.
With each new entry, the calculation that the system performs for the average cost is:
(Puc * QA) + (Pc * QC)
(QA + QC)
Puc= Value of the last calculated average cost
QA = Quantidade atual
Pc = Cost Price of the purchase
QC = Quantidade da compra
Attention: In the Settings module, define which Cost Price table and Average Cost.
will belong to each branch, in the Pricing menu under the Cost Table / Average by branch option.

97
Cost Tables / Average per Branch
This screen allows you to determine or alter which cost and average cost tables belong to each
branch registered in the system.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the Prices menu on the Cost / Average per Branch option.

Subsidiary
In this field, select the branch for which you want to register the table.

Cost Table
In this field, define which cost table will belong to the selected branch.
Average Cost Table
In this field, define which average cost table will belong to the selected branch.

Record
Click this button to save the configuration.

98
Cost Calculation
On this screen, you can simulate and register the data that will be used for the price calculation.
sales, using as a basis the expenses and costs of the products. When entering the data on this screen
You can calculate the selling price by the screens. Calculate Simplified Selling Price, Calculate
Complete Selling Price or by the Entry screen (available for Corporate). The
filling out this screen is optional.
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration module;
• Click on the Products menu;
• Localize o produto;
• Click on the Options field, which is at the bottom of the screen;
• Select the Cost Calculation option.

Purchase
In this section, you can provide the details about the product purchase. This will allow you to verify the
total cost and whether the selling price will have the desired profit margin for the product.
List price (Excluding IPI): In this field, enter the unit price of the product excluding the freight value.
and of the IPI. This field is automatically updated when executing the price calculation routine.
sale.
Supplier discount: In this field you can enter the percentage or the amount of the discount
provided for the product.
Shipping: In this field you can enter the percentage or the value of the shipping.
Purchase ICMS: In this field, you can enter the percentage or the value of the purchase ICMS.
product.
Purchase IPI: In this field you can enter the percentage or the value of the purchase IPI
product.
Financial cost: In this field you can enter the value or percentage of the financial costs of
product.
Others: In this field you can enter other taxes or expenses of the product, in percentage or
in value.
Percentage of purchase EXCLUDING taxes: In this field you can inform the percentage of
products purchased without taxes.
Calculated cost price: This field shows the calculation of the reported expenses for the
products, reducing the discount and disregarding the value of the ICMS.

Sale
In this table, provide the values that will be considered for the sale of the product.
It will later be possible to verify whether there will be profit or loss in the formation of the sale price.
Selling price with IPI: In this field you can enter or check the selling price of
product, when using the calculation routines for values that will be explained below.
ICMS de Venda:Neste campo digite o percentual ou o valor do ICMS de venda do produto.
IPI of Sale: In this field, enter the percentage or the value of the IPI of the product.
Other taxes: In this field enter the percentage or the value of other taxes charged in the
sale of the product.
Others: In this field, enter the percentage or value of other charges related to the sale of the product.

99
 Percentage of sales WITHOUT taxes: In this field, you can inform the percentage of products
sold without taxes.
To select the percentage or value columns:
• In the fields provided above, choose whether to use the percentage option or the value;
• Double click to select the desired option.
To uncheck the percentage or value column:
• Click on the fields you want to uncheck;
How to calculate the selling price
On this screen, you will be able to check if you will have a profit or loss with the registered sale value for the
product, or you can calculate the selling price by determining the profit in values or percentage.
For this, inform the product cost values in the Purchase and Sale tables. Then
make a simulation using the options from the field Calculate values.
Maintain the selling price
By selecting this option, you will be able to set the selling price and check the profit you will have for the
product.
To verify the profit:
• Enter the information about buying and selling;
• Enter the desired selling price in the Selling Price with IPI field;
• In the Calculate Values field, select the option Keep selling price;
• Click the Calculate button;
• After entering this data, check the profit obtained in the Profit field over the price
of purchase, in the columns Percentage Value. In these fields you can check if you are having
loss or profit with the informed selling price.
The calculation of the sales profit is done as follows:
Lucro = Pv - Pc - ICMS
Being:
Selling Price with IPI
Pc: List price excluding IPI (purchase table)
ICMS = [Sales ICMS x (100% - % of sales without taxes)] - [Purchase ICMS x (100%
- % of purchases without taxes)
Maintain profit as a percentage
Select this option to calculate the selling price of the product through the percentage.
informed in the field Profit on the purchase price, in the column Percentage.
• Enter the information in the Buy and Sell boxes. The Sales price field with IPI does not
needs to be informed;
• Enter the desired profit percentage;
• In the Calculate Values field, select the Keep Percentage option;
• Click the Calculate button;
• In the field Sale price with IPI, check the new sale price.
The selling price calculation is done as follows:
Selling Price = PCC + L + ICMS
Being
Ccc: Calculated Cost Price.
L: Profit (% or value). The percentage will be calculated on the value provided in the Price field.
from List (Without IPI).

100
 ICMS = [ICMS de venda x (100% - % de vendas sem impostos)] - [ICMS de Compra x
(100% - % of tax-free purchases)
Maintain profit in values
Select this option to calculate the selling price of the product with the amount informed on
profit field over the purchase price in the value column.
• Enter the desired profit value;
• In the Calculate Values field, select the Keep Value option;
• Click the Calculate button;
• Then check the new selling price to obtain that value.
The system will show the percentage equivalent to the reported profit value. The price formula
The sale will be the same as the previous item.
Attention: The options selected in the Calculate values field are only for simulating the
Sales price calculations on the screen do not interfere with the values provided on the registration screen.
ofProduct.

For the sales price calculation routines

After a cost change, it will be possible to adjust the selling prices on the Calculate price screen.
Simplified or Complete sale, which will consider a chosen option in this table.
cost prices will be updated after making a purchase of goods or changing it
manually in the registration of products.
After performing the simulations, select in this table the routine that will be used to adjust the
prices.
You can select the following options:
Keep the selling price: Select this option to consider the informed selling price
in the field Selling price with IPI. The system will not change the selling price, however
you will be able to view the new values and profit percentages.
Maintain profit as a percentage: Select this option to calculate the selling price of the product.
with the percentage provided in the Profit field over the purchase price in the Percentage column.

Maintain profit in values: Select this option to calculate the selling price of the product.
with the value informed in the Profit field over the purchase price in the Value column.

Copy cost from another product (F4)

Click this button to copy the costs of another product.
To copy the cost of another product:
• Click the Copy cost of another product button (F4) or press F4;
• It will open the search screen. Consult Products 2. For more information, consult the chapter.
Product Search Screen.
• The system will copy the costs from the other product to the one being registered;
• Then click the Save button (F2).

Copy cost to other products (F3)

Click this button to copy the registered cost data of one product to multiple.
You can use the product classification fields to copy this data.
For cost for other products:
• Click the Copy cost to other products button (F3) or press F3;
• It will open the screenCopy Cost;
• On this screen you can use the following options;

101
Mail Merge – Record Selection
This screen is used to select the registration records of Client / Supplier for
print labels, letters or send direct mail emails.

• Select the option Registration;

•

General
This tab allows you to select the records that will be sent for the mail merge.
Type
In this section, choose the type of registration for sending. You can choose between: All, Customer,

Ativo / Inativo
Define in this table which registrations will be designated for direct mail. Select: All,

Location
In this section, you can specify a City or State for the mailing.
Interest Groups
In this panel, you can select the registrations that belong to a certain Group of
Interest.
For more information, see the chapter Basic Registrations.
Customer / Supplier Class

In this panel, you can select the records that belong to a specific Class of
Clients / Supplier.
For more information, see the Basic Registrations chapter.
Registered Seller

In this frame, you can select the clients of a certain Seller.

For more information, see the chapter on Customer and Supplier Registrations.

Contacts
In this tab, you can select the contact people to whom you want to send the direct mail.
Number of Records
In this section, select the number of records you want to generate for each registration.

only one record per registration with the name of the first person listed on the board

name of the contact person.

89
Calculate Selling Prices -
Simplified
This screen can be used to calculate the selling price. The calculation will consider the routine.
of sales price calculation, registered on the Sales Calculation screen, in the Product registration.
To open this screen:
• Select the Enrollment module;
• Click on the Prices menu, on the Calculate selling price option in Simplified.

Original Table
In this field, select the price table that will be used as the basis for calculating the price.
for sale. We recommend that you select a cost table.
Destination Table
Select in this field the sales table where the prices will be updated.
Selections (Ctrl+F3)
This tab allows filtering the data by class, subclass, group, family, and supplier. Use this
filter to calculate the selling price only of the products that belong to the selection
done. Allows using all filters at the same time.
Research (Ctrl+F4)
In this tab, you can filter the products by the search fields created in the registration of
Products. These fields will appear on this screen as named.
Round values to
Select in this field the value to round the prices of the products when calculating.
the selling price. For more information see the chapter Calculate Selling Price -
Complete.
Remark (F2)
Click this button to calculate the selling price.

103
Calculate Selling Price -
Complete
You can use this screen to update the selling prices of the products when necessary.
change of cost price. The system will calculate the selling price according to the data
informed on the screen Cost calculation, in the Product registration.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Prices menu, in the Calculate selling price option and Complete.

Selections
On this tab, you can provide the data that will be used to calculate the selling price.
for the product.
Destination Table
In this field, select the price table you wish to update.
Order
In this box, select the order in which the products will be displayed. They can be sorted by
code or name.
Calculate all prices maintaining the percentage
Margin of profit, regardless of registration of
products
Select this field to calculate the selling price based on the percentage provided in the field.
Profit over the purchase price, in the Product registration, on the Cost Calculation screen. This
the option disregards the selected routine in the frame for the price calculation routines of
sale, on the same screen.
Round values to
Select in this field the option to round the prices of the products, at the time of
calculate the selling price.
Example: A product priced at R$ 22.22 was marked up by 10%. Thus, the new value
the product would be R$ 22.22 plus R$ 2.222, totaling R$ 24.442. See how it will look
value, when choosing one of the rounding options:
Do not round: The amount will be R$ 24.44, as the third decimal place is less than five.
For a value greater than five, the second decimal place would increase by one.
The other rounding options will add value until the requested amount is reached.
Arredondar valores para 0.05:O sistema arredondará a última casa decimal para 0 ou 5,
adding, at most, R$ 0.05. Then, the amount will be R$ 24.45.
Round values to 0.10: The system will round the last decimal place to 0.
adding, at most, R$ 0.10. So, the value will be R$ 24.50.
Round values to 0.49: The system will round the last decimal places to 00 or
49, adding a maximum of R$ 0.49. Then, the amount will be R$ 24.49.
Rounding values to 0.50: The system will round the last decimal places to 00 or
50, adding at most R$ 0.50. So, the amount will be R$ 24.50.
Round values to 0.90: The system will round the last decimal places to 00 or
90, adding, at most, R$ 0.90. Then, the amount will be R$ 24.90.

104
 Round values to 0.99: The system will round the last decimal places to 00 or
99, adding, at most, R$ 0.99. Then, the amount will be R$ 24.99.
Round values to 1.00: The system will round the last decimal places to 00,
adding, at most, R$ 1.00. Then, the value will be R$ 25.00.
Round values to 4.90: The system will round to 0.00 or 4.90, adding, in
maximum, R$ 4.90. So, the amount will be R$ 24.90.
Rounding values to 5.00: The system will round to 0.00 or 5.00, adding
maximum, R$ 5.00. Then, the amount will be R$ 25.00.
Rounding values to 9.50: The system will round to 0.00 or 9.50, adding, in
maximum, R$ 9.50. So, the amount will be R$ 29.50.
Round values to 9.90: The system will round to 0.00 or 9.90, adding,
maximum, R$ 9.90. So, the amount will be R$ 29.90.
Round values to 10.00: The system will round to 0.00 adding, at most,
R$ 10.00. Then, the amount will be R$ 30.00.
Selections
This tab allows you to filter data by class, subclass, group, and family. Use this filter to
calculate the selling price only for the products that belong to the chosen selection.
Allows using all filters at the same time, or only the ones you prefer.
Class: Inform or locate the class you want to filter the data.
Subclass: Report or locate the subclass you want to filter the data.
Group: Report or locate the group you wish to filter the data.
Family: Inform or locate the family you wish to filter the data.
Fornecedor:Informe ou localize o fornecedor que deseja para filtrar os dados.
Research
In this tab, you can filter products by the search fields created in the registration of
Products. These fields will appear on this screen as named.
Only change products
In this panel, you can select the product registrations that have had changes from a
a specific date, with the following options:
With prices changed after: Selecting this field will allow you to calculate the selling price of
products that had price changes in any of the sales tables after a
specific date. In the adjacent field, provide the desired date.
With the stock altered after: Selecting this field you will be able to calculate the selling price of the
products that had stock changed after a certain date. In the field next to it inform
the desired data.
With purchases starting from: By selecting this field you can calculate the selling price of the
products that were purchased from a certain date. In the field next to it, please inform the
desired data.
Set up table
Click this button to list the products that are within the selected options. There will be
all products displayed with the new prices.

Table
In this tab you can verify and confirm the adjusted values for the selected table. You can
check the following information:

105
 Code: This column shows the product code.
Name: This column shows the product name.
PC Ant: This column shows the cost price indicated in the field List price (Excluding IPI)
recorded on the Cost Calculation screen, in the Products registration.
Current PC: This column shows the current cost price indicated in the cost table, in the registration.
of Products.
PC Calc Ant: This column shows the value calculated in the Cost Price field calculated on the screen.
Cost Calculation, in the product registration.
PC Calc Atu: This column shows the newly calculated cost price. It uses the new value of
cost price with the percentages / values of the expenses registered on the Calculation screen
Custom frame purchase.
PV Ant: This column shows the previous selling price, calculated in the Selling Price field.
with IPIn the cost spreadsheet, in the product registration.
Previous Profit: This column shows the value of the previous profit.
Current Pv: This column shows the updated selling price, considering the information and the
routine chosen on the Cost Calculation screen, in the Products registration.
Current Profit Percentage: This column shows the percentage of the current profit for the sale of the product.

Table of differences
Select a row in the grid to check the difference between the main previous values and
current. In the Difference column, check the difference between:
• Previous Cost Price Current Cost Price, considering the information from the field
List price (Excluding IPI) in product registration.
• Previous and Current Total Cost Price, considering the calculated cost price field.
product registration.
• Profit in Previous and Current Values.
• Previous and Current Percentage Profit
• Previous and Current Sale Price, considering the sale price field with IPI no
product registration.
Records
In this panel, select the option that will be used to update the selling price of the product.
Adjust only the marked ones: Select this field to adjust only the prices of some
products.
The desired products must have the columnAlt field marked in the grid.
products.
Adjust all: Select this field to adjust the selling price of all products.
Confirming the price update
Confirm the price update through one of the options below.
Adjust Price: Click this button to confirm the update of the selling price of
products.
Adjust prices and update cost: Click this button to update the selling price of the
products and also update the costs, from the Cost Calculation screen.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel the price update and clear the screen.

106
Price Table Configuration
This screen is used to configure the price tables registered in the system. Here you can
configure the payment methods that will be accepted at the time of sale and the commission of
seller and the number of installments that can divide the table.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Prices menu, on the Configure Price Table option.

Table
Select a price table to make the settings.

Accepted Payment Methods

Select in this box which forms of payment will be accepted at the time of
sale, for selected price table.
The available payment methods are: Customer Account, Debit Card, Card of
Credit, Installment, Checks.
In the payment methods Credit Card, Installment, Checks inform:
Maximum Quantity: enter the maximum number of installments that will be accepted for this table.
Maximum Deadline (days): Enter the maximum deadline to be accepted for the payment plan, considering
the number of installments.
Example: If the maximum number of installments is 3 (three) times the maximum term in days.
it can be 90 (ninety) days.
Customer Account
Check this option to allow sales with customers' account debit / notebook.
Debit Card
Check this option to allow sales with debit card.
Credit Card
Check this option to allow sales with credit card.
Installment
Check this option to allow installment sales.
Cheques
Check this option to allow sales with checks.

Change Commission
In this field, you can define whether the seller's commission will be maintained or if it will have a percentage of
increase or decrease, for this table.
Example: The company makes an agreement with the employees that it will pay a percentage of
commission on sales. It is defined that for cash sales the seller will receive in addition to the
commission registered, plus 2%. On sales made for 30 (thirty) days, it will be maintained the
percentage of employee registration and for installment sales it will have the percentage of
commission reduced by 1%.

107
Maximum Discount (%)
Enter in this field the maximum discount allowed for the price table.
Attention: In sales, the lowest registered discount percentage will always be considered.
among the options for maximum discount per product, seller, price table, and on the sales screen.

Print Division
By filling in this field, the value divided by the entered quantity will be shown in the table of
preço.
Example: This field is filled to divide the price into 3 installments. The price of the product is
90 reais, in the price list printout, the system will show the division price which is 30
real.

Qtde de Parcelas
This field is used to visualize the total sale value divided by the quantity of
informed parcels. On the Sales screen, you can view the total sale amount and the amount of
each plot in other tables, pressing Alt+P.

Payment Plan
(Available only for Corporate versions)
On this screen, you can set a payment plan for each price table, thus facilitating the
receipt at the time of sale. On the receipt screen, the system will divide the amount of
products automatically, according to the settings made on this screen.
Plot
Enter the installment number.
1st installment, 2nd installment and 3rd installment.
Type of interval
Select the type of interval that will generate the installment.
At Sight: Check this option to indicate receipt at sight. You may select this option
when there is an entry in the installment.
In x months: This option is used to generate installments that have the same due date.
in the months.
Example: If you enter the number 1 (one), the system will generate installments every 1 (one) month.
If you set it to 3 (three), the system will generate the installments every 3 (three) months.
The system will generate the installments according to the number of months that are entered in this
field.
In x days: This option is used to generate installments with the period in days.
Quantity (x)
Inform the range of the installment according to the selected type of interval.
Percentage of the total
You will have to report the percentage related to each installment, totaling 100%.
Example of how to configure:
• Select the price table you want to configure;
• Click on the Payment Plan tab (Available only for Corporate versions);

We will set up the 1st installment:

108
• In the field, type the number 1 (one);
• In the field Interval type, select one of the available options, in this case we will
set the 1st installment to the type Upfront.
• In the Percent field of the total, indicate the percentage that will be considered, based on the value of the
sale, to calculate this installment. We will use 40% of the total sale value as upfront.
• Click the Add button.
Configure the 2nd installment with the option In X days:
• In the installment field, type the number 2 (two);
• In the field Type of interval, select one of the available options. In this case, we will
set the 2nd installment with the type In x days;
• In the field Qty (x), we will enter the number 30 (thirty) so that the next installment is due (thirty)
days after the 1st installment;
• Percentage of the total, inform the percentage that the system will calculate the amount of the installment, we will
use the percentage of 60%.
• Click the Include button.
Consider that a sale will be made on March 10, recording the installments according to the plan.
Payment created. According to the plan created, the due date for the second installment will be on the 9th.
of April (30 days later).
Delete Selected
With this option, it is possible to select the installments you wish to exclude.
To exclude the installments:
• Select the installments you want to delete by clicking on the corresponding line, (if you wish to delete
more than one line, press the Ctrl key);
• Then click the Delete Selected button.
Equal Installments
This option is used to generate payment methods with equal installments. If there is any
The registered configuration will be deleted when clicking this button.
By clicking this button, a screen will open with the following information:
Divide into how many times
Enter in this field the number of installments that will be accepted for this table.
First Installment
In this section, you can define the payment type for the first installment. The first installment
It can be seen in x days or in x months.
Other installments
In this section, you can define the type of installment for the other installments. The installments
they can be x days or x months.
Attention: The percentages will be divided equally among the installments, in case of discrepancies.
no percentage will be released in the first installment.
Launch
Click this button to launch the installments in the grid.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel the setup made and close the screen.
Save Plan
Click this button to save the payment plan of the installments.

109
Change Prices
This routine allows the price to be changed manually by selecting up to two tables. It will also be
it is possible to use the filters before listing the products.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Prices menu, in the Change prices option.

General (Ctrl+F2)
On this tab, select up to two price tables for modification.
Price table
In this field, provide a price table for making the change. This is a mandatory field.
Price table 2 (Optional)
In this field, you can select the second price table for modification.
Order: In this field, select the order in which the products will be listed. The order can be
by:Code or Name.
Show only products with a price equal to 0 (zero) (Only in table 1)
Check this option to list only the products that have a price of zero. This
the option is available only for one price table. Choose the desired table in the field
Price Table.

Selections (Ctrl+F3)
This tab allows you to filter the data by class, subclass, group, and family. Use it to create the
product list, streamlining price changes. Allows the use of all filters at the same time
time or only those you prefer.

Researches (Ctrl+F4)
In this tab, you can filter products by the search fields created in the registration of
Products. These fields will appear on this screen as named.

Advanced (Ctrl+F5)
In this tab, you can filter the products more specifically by using the supplier or
manufacturer.
Example: This option will make it easier when there is a price change for just one.
supplier or manufacturer.

Show Products
Click this button to list the products, after selecting the options explained above.

How to change the product price

A list of products will appear with the Code and Name and the prices from the selected tables.
In the 'Digitado 1' column, report the new prices for the first table. In the adjacent column,
Diferença % 1será mostrada a diferença em percentual entre o preço atual e o preço lançado.
The percentage will appear in blue in case of an increase or in red in case of a decrease.
price. If you have selected two tables, the columns '2' and 'Difference' will be shown.
% 2.

110
Clear changes (F5)
Click this button to cancel all changes made.

Save changes (F2)

Click this button to save the changes made.

111
Price Releases
This screen allows you to register or change prices by product. This routine can be used to
launch or change prices without accessing the product registration.
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration module;
• In the Prices menu, click on the Price Launches option.

Table
In this field, select the table in which you want to register the product price.

Product
Please provide the product for which you want to register the price.

Price
In this field, enter the product price for the selected table.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the registered price.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen.

112
Price Markup
This screen allows you to adjust the prices of products by table. With this option, it is possible
increase, decrease or maintain prices, by a percentage or fixed amount.
Attention: Before changing the product prices, it is advisable to make a backup.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• In the Prices menu, click on the Repricing option.

Prices
Indicate in this field the procedure that will be used to reschedule the prices. Select one.
of the following options:
Keep the price: Select this option to copy prices from one table to another.
keeping the values.
Example: You want to store the prices of a table for later consultation. In this case, you will have
to create a new table and check this option to copy the data from the original table to the
current.
Increase the price: Select this option to raise the prices in the same table or use
a table as a source to increase the price of another.
Lower the price: Select this option to lower the prices of the same table or use
a table as a source to reduce the price of another.

Change
Indicate in this field whether the price adjustment will be for the same table or for another.
table.

Valor
Indicate in this field whether the price adjustment will be made in Percentage or in Value.

Tab. Original
In this field, select the table that will be changed or the original table, depending on the option.
chosen in Change.
If you selected the option Same table in the field Change, in the field Original Tab
informe a tabela que será alterada. Se a escolha no campoAlteraçãofoi a opçãoOutra tabela,
report here the table that will serve as a basis and then choose the table to be altered in
fieldTab. Destination.

Destination Tab
Select in this field the table that will be changed, if you have checked the option Another table
change field

Options
In this tab, you can provide the percentage / amount of the recalculation and simulate it.
change.
Percentage / Increase Amount: In this field, indicate the percentage or the amount of increase.
to reschedule the prices. This option will appear if you select Increase the price.
Percentage / Reduction value: In this field, indicate the percentage or the value of reduction for
reprice the prices. This option will appear if you select Decrease the price.

113
 For more information, see the chapter Calculate Selling Price - Complete.

Example of the Changes

This box allows you to simulate the price adjustment that you will be making. Use this option
before confirming the rescheduling, as it will help to verify the parameters defined through
an example.
To simulate the result, the fields Percentage of increase or Percentage of decrease and
Rounding values should be filled in.
Current value
Enter the value of one of the products in this field to simulate the result.
Calculate
Click this button for the system to calculate the result.
Value after change
In this field, the new calculated value will appear.

Selections (Ctrl+F3)
In this tab, you can use the filters Class, Subclass, Group, and Family to reprice.

Only products purchased from

In this field, you can select the products that were purchased after a certain
data

Searches (Ctrl+F4)
This tab will display the search fields that were created in the product registration.
These fields can be used as filters.

Reschedule (F2)
Click this button to change the prices of the products. Before confirming the change, there will be
products listed for verification. Upon exiting this screen, you will be able to confirm the rescheduling of
price.
This screen will have the following data:
Code: Shows the product code.
Nome:Mostra o nome do produto.
Table: This column shows the name of the source table, with the current prices.
New price: This column shows the prices of the destination table, already marked.
When you leave this screen, a window will pop up to confirm the price update. Click on Yes.
to confirm, or not to cancel.
Print Options
Click on this menu to print the rescheduling and select the type of printing.
Normal
By selecting this option, it will be printed as it is appearing on the screen.

114
To fit into
This option allows you to adjust the printing, with the widths of the columns as they are in the
screen. Select to print in: 1 page wide, 2 pages wide, and 3 pages wide
width.

115
Price Rescheduling for
Several Tables
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This screen allows you to set the configurations for price adjustments across multiple tables.
Allows the creation of a list of settings, using several tables and for each of them
detail the percentage / value and the rounding. Later, when there are changes in
prices, through the Entries screen or product registration, this configuration created may
to be used to update the prices of all the tables included in the list, at once.
The prices of products that have a different price from the last one will be changed.
rescheduling.
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration module;
• Click on the Prices menu, in the Price Rescheduling option for Multiple Tables.

Configuration
In this field, enter the name of the configuration that will be created to reprice the
tables.
Prices
In this field, select whether it will be a price increase or a price decrease.
Increase the price: Select this option to raise the prices.
Reduce the price: Select this option to lower the prices.
Percentual / Valor
Indicate in this field whether the price adjustment will be made in Percentage or in Value.

Tab. Original
Select in this field the table that will be used as the basis for the price adjustment.
On this screen, it is possible to change the prices only if different tables are selected in the fields.
OriginalTab. Destination. This screen does not allow changing prices for the same table, for
use the price remarcation screen.
Destination Tab
Select in this field the table that will be altered.
Percentage / Increase Value
In this field, indicate the percentage or value of the increase to reprice the items. This option
It will appear if you select Increase the price.
Percentage / Value of Reduction
In this field, inform the percentage or the amount of reduction to reprice the prices.
The name of these fields depends on what was selected in the price field.
Percentage / Value.
Round values to
Select in this field the value to round the prices of the products.
For more information see the chapter Calculate Selling Price - Complete.
Add

116
 After entering the data for the price change, click on add to register it.
on the list, in the table below. Each line corresponds to the configuration for a price table
different. Add as many settings as you want, up to the maximum limit of available tables.
The following information will be displayed in the frame:
Order: Shows the order that was added to the configuration.
Tab. Original: Mostra a tabela original selecionada.
Tab. Destination: Shows the selected destination table, where the change will be made.
A / D: Show if the option Increase price (A) or Decrease price (D) was selected.
P / V: Show if the change will be in Percentage (P) or Value (V).
Value: Shows the percentage or amount that will be altered.
Rounding: Shows the selected value for rounding.
When changing prices, set it to always do so with the tables in
sequence, that is, add the configuration lines following a remarking order,
if you are doing it in cascade.
Example: The following tables are registered: Cost, Table1, Table2, Table3.
In this case, follow the sequence for the update:
Tab. Origin -> Tab. Destination
Custo -> Tabela1
Table1 -> Table2
Table2 -> Table3
Or, moreover, determine all configurations based on the Cost Table for the
changes. Thus, it will be:
Custo -> Tabela 1
Custo -> Tabela 2
Custo -> Tabela 3
Show changes and request confirmation before
remarcation of each table
Select this option to show the tables with the updated prices, before the confirmation.

Up arrow
Este botão serve para mover a linha com a configuração de preço para cima. Utilize essa opção,
if one of the settings is in the wrong order at the time of repricing.
Down arrow
This button is used to move the row with the price setting down. Use this
option, if one of the settings is in the wrong order, at the time of rescheduling
prices.
Turn off line
Click this button to delete the line with the selected configuration.
To delete the line:
• Select the line you wish to delete;
• Click the button ;
• Then click the Record button (F2).

117
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the registered price adjustment settings.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen and make a new registration.
Turn off
Click this button to permanently delete the rescheduling settings group.
prices.
Reschedule
Click this button to confirm the price rescheduling.
If you have checked the option Show changes and request confirmation before rescheduling
In each table, all changes made to each created configuration will be shown. If
have more than one, the system will show one at a time, so that it can be confirmed. After
check the prices press ESC, then a window will appear to complete the rescheduling
of price. Click on Yes to confirm, or No to cancel.
On the screen that shows the changes, the following data will be displayed:

Code: Shows the product code.

Nome:Mostra o nome do produto.
Tabela1:Esta coluna mostra o nome da tabela origem, com os preços atuais.
Table2: This column shows the name of the destination table, with the current prices.
New price: This column shows the re-marked prices of the destination table.
Attention: By canceling the rescheduling, the system will only cancel the rescheduling that has not yet...
were confirmed.
Print Options
Click this menu to print the rescheduling and select the type of printing.
Normal
By selecting this option, it will be printed as it appears on the screen.
To fit into
This option allows you to adjust the print, with the widths and order of the columns as you wish.
It is on the screen, selecting to print in: 1 page wide, 2 pages wide, and 3.
width pages.

118
Apaga Tabela de Preço
This routine allows you to delete the table and all the price records contained in it. When deleting the
table check if this is not the only one registered in the system, as the system does not allow to make
sales without a sales price table.
To open this screen:
• Select the Registration module;
• Click on the Prices menu, in the option Delete Price Table.
To delete the table:
• Select the table you want to delete;
• Click the Delete button;
• Close the system and log in again for the table to be permanently deleted.

119
Print Prices
Esta tela serve para imprimir o relatório com as tabelas de preços dos produtos. Nela é possível
configure which tables and fields you want to display in the print.
To open this screen:
• Select the option Register;
• Click on the Prices menu, on the Print Prices option.

Configuration Name
In this field, enter the identification name for the report formatting configuration.
to locate it later. The layouts can be changed whenever necessary.
To create a new configuration:
• Click on the New button;
• A window will open to type the name of the configuration;
• Click the OK button to confirm the name or Cancel to exit the screen.
To locate the configuration
• Click on the Configuration Name field to open the list;
• Select the registered layout to check the screen settings.
Number of tables
In this field, select the number of tables you want to add to the report. They can be
up to 6 (six) price tables will be selected. Fields will be shown next to select
the desired price tables, according to the selected quantity.
Example: If you select 6 (six) tables, the fields with the names will appear beside: Table
Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, and Table 6.
To select the table, click the field next to each name and choose a table from the list.
Paper format
In this field, select the paper format you wish to use for printing the report.
You can choose between the formats:
Portrait: The display on the screen and the print will be in vertical format.
Landscape: The display on the screen and the print will be done horizontally.

Configuration (Ctrl+F2)
In this tab you can determine the fields you want to include in the report and in what order they should be.
to appear.
Column
In this column, define the fields you want to display in the report and the sorting of them.
information, through the Order column.
You can choose the following information about the product to display in the report: Code
do Produto, Nome, Unidade de venda, IPI, Desconto, Nome da Moeda, Código do Fabricante,
Estoque (sem grade), Preço Tabela 1, Preço Tabela 2, Preço Tabela 3, Preço Tabela 4m, Preço
Tabela 5, Preço Tabela 6, Nome Pesquisa, Localização
Order
In the Order field, located on the left side of each item, you can specify the order that
wants to view the information in the reports. To do this, fill in with the numbers from one (1) to
eighteen (18), in the order that the information will be printed in the report. Leave with the number
zero (0) the information that you do not wish to include.

120
 Width
In this column, determine the size, in centimeters, of the fields that will be inserted in the
report.
Font size
In this column, choose the font sizes that will be printed in the report.
You can select different sizes for each field.
Spaces between the columns
In this field, indicate the space you want between each of the selected columns, in
centimeters. Please provide a value other than zero (0).

Messages (Ctrl+F4)
In this tab, you can type the messages you want to include in your pricing report and also
inform a title for him.
Title
In this field, enter the title for the report.
Messages
You can include up to five (5) messages in the report.
Digite as mensagens desejadas, com até 50 caracteres cada, nos campos Mensagem 1,
Mensagem 2, Mensagem 3, Mensagem 4 e Mensagem 5.
Record
Click this button to save the settings made for printing the report.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen and make a new setup.
Turn off
Click this button to delete a price report configuration.
To delete the configuration:
• Select in the Configuration Name field the configuration you wish to delete;
• Then click the Delete button.

Options (Ctrl+F3)
This tab allows filtering data by class, subclass, group, and family, search fields,
supplier and manufacturer, at the time of viewing or printing the report. Allows using
all filters at the same time, or just the ones you prefer. Choose the following filters:
Classe, Subclasse, Grupo, Família, Pesquisas, Fornecedor e Fabricante.
Currency
In this field you can choose to print the price according to the product registration, or in
Reais. You may choose between:
Print the price in the registered currency: Select this option to display the price according to
the currency registered in the product registration.
Convert the product value to reais: Select this option to convert the price of
product for Real, if it is registered with a different currency.
Attention: If you only work with the Real currency, it is not necessary to select an option.

121
 Group
Select in this field the option that will be used to group the products. You can group by
class, subclass, group or family. If you do not want to group, leave the option selected as No.
Group.
Order
In this field, select the print order of the products. You can sort by code or
name.
• For printing the price list, it is possible to choose from the following available options:
Print the price with the discount already applied
• Print only products in stock (without Grade or Edition)
• Print inactive products
• Do not print products with a price equal to 0
• Print only products with prices changed from.
Print
Click this button to print the report with the configured information and selections made.
on the screen. The system will print the report first on the screen for viewing, and then
print on paper.

122
Purchasing Movement

123
Purchase Quotation
This screen allows you to quote product prices with suppliers. Through it, you will be able to
compare the prices between suppliers and check the best price.
To open this screen:
• Select the Movement module;
• Click on the Other menu, on the Purchase Quotation option.

Start quotation
Click this button to start a quote.
Start / Quotation (F3)
This tab shows the data for identifying the quotation.
Description: Enter a title for identification of the quote.
Record: Click this button to start the quote.
Cancel: Click this button to cancel the initiated quote.
Attention: The quotation screen does not accept products with the type Edition.

Products
In this tab, provide the Products, the Quantity, and the Unit to request the price quote. After clicking
On the OK button, all selected products will be listed in the table, with the following
informações: Produto, Nome, Qtde, Unid, Tamanho, Nome tamanho, Cor e Nome Cor.
Remove selected product
This button removes the product from the quotation.

To remove the product:

• Select the product you want to remove;
• Click the buttonRemove selected product.
Suppliers
In this tab you can include the Suppliers that will be consulted.
Registered suppliers for the products of this quotation: In this table, the will be listed
suppliers informed in the registration of selected products.
Click on the icon to list the registered suppliers.
Supplier: In this field select the Supplier you wish to quote.
Short name: The short name will be used in the header of the reports to identify
the supplier. Duplicate names for suppliers will not be allowed and can be used up to
8 characters.
Include supplier: Click this button to add the supplier to the board.
Exclude Selected Supplier: This button removes the supplier from the quote.
To remove the supplier:
• Select the supplier you wish to remove;
• Click the button Remove selected supplier.
In the table where the suppliers will be listed, the following information will be shown:
Fornecedor:Mostra o código do fornecedor.
Short name: Shows the name that was provided for the supplier.
Email sent: This field will be marked automatically when sending the email for this quotation.

124
 Conditions: The information that was entered for the supply conditions will be displayed.
This information will be entered in the Launch Quotes tab, in the Launch Conditions button.
supply.
Nome:Mostra o nome do fornecedor.
Email: Shows the supplier's email that is listed in the Customer / Supplier registration.
Email sending (Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows you to send an email to the supplier, requesting a quote.
Option
In this field, determine how the email will be sent by choosing one of the options below:
Selected only: By selecting this option, the email will be sent only to the
selected supplier.
All not sent: When this option is selected, the system will send emails to all
suppliers who do not have the email sent column marked.
Everyone: An email will be sent to all the suppliers listed in the board.
Layout
Select an email layout to send to the supplier. Changes to the chosen layout
can be done before sending the email.
For more information, see the chapter Email Layout Configuration.
Conf. email
Select the configuration that was created for sending email.
For more information, consult the chapter Email Server Configuration.
Send
Click this button to complete the email sending.
Launch Quotations
In this tab, enter the prices of the products that were quoted with the supplier, after receiving a
resposta.
To launch the supplier quotes.
• Click the Update List button;
• The information of the suppliers will be listed in the Suppliers board;
Fornecedor:Mostra o nome do fornecedor.
Code: Shows the supplier's code.
Short name: Shows the name provided in the Supplier tab.
Conditions: The condition will be shown if it has already been registered in the Launch button.
terms of supply.
• Select a supplier, then click the Launch quotes button for the supplier
selected
• In the next panel, the products that were selected will be shown with the following
informações: Produto, Nome, Tamanho, Cor e Preço.
Then click the Save button for this supplier's quote.
Launch supply conditions
A window will open where you can note the delivery and payment conditions of this supplier.
Then click the OK button to save.

125
Record
After entering all the quotation data, click this button to save the
registered information.
Reports
In this tab you can print the reports of the selected products for the price quotation.
between the following reports.
Price Quotation Report - Products
This report shows all the products selected in the quotation, with the prices column in
white. It can be sent to your supplier, printed by fax or exported for sending
by email, so that it fills in with the prices. export of the report.
Price Quotation Report - Products and Prices
This report shows all the products selected in the quotation and the prices from each supplier.
Use it after the price launch in the system to analyze prices by
supplier.
Relatório de Cotação de Preço - menor preço por Fornecedor
This report shows only the products with the lowest price by supplier. With it, you will be able to
analyze the products with the lowest prices from each supplier.
Print one Supplier per Page: Select this option to print the report with a
supplier per page.
Print with Grid: Select this option to print the size and color of the product, if
be a product with a grade.
Print manufacturer code instead of product code: Select this option, if
use the internal code different from the manufacturer's code. By marking it, the code will be printed
from the manufacturer.

Order
In this field, select the order of the products for the report printing. You can order by
code or name.
Print
Click this button to print the selected report. The report will be displayed on the screen for
after being printed on paper.
Close / Generate Order
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Nesta tela poderá gerar um pedido de compra com os produtos da cotação. Na tela de entradas
A sequence of order will be created for this quotation.
Close Quotation
Click this button to close the quote and generate a purchase order.
Generate Purchase Order
In this section, select the method you want to use to create the purchase order and the option that will be
used for this order.
Option
In this field, select an option to generate the input option with the purchase order.
You can choose from the following options:
Generate an order, with all products, for the supplier with the lowest total:
Select this option to create a purchase operation for the supplier that is with the
lowest total value in the quote.

126
 Generate an order for each supplier, with the lowest prices for each item:
Select this option to create a purchase order operation for each of the
suppliers with all the products that have the lowest prices compared to others
suppliers.
Operation
In this field, select the operation related to the purchase order.
Forecast of Receipt
In this field, inform the expected date for the receipt of the products.
Generate Orders
Click this button to generate the purchase order operations. The board will show the
description and the sequence of the purchase order created.

Read Quotation
Click this button to open an existing quote, to check or enter responses from
suppliers' prices.
Home / Existing Quote
In this tab, you can check the existing quotes.
Show quotations
Click this button to show the existing quotes. By clicking this button, the will appear.
following information:
Order: Shows the sequence generated by the system for the quotation.
Description: Shows the title provided for the quotation.
Data Início:Mostra a data em que foi criada a cotação.
Final Date: Show the date when the quote was closed.
Opened by: Shows the code of the employee who created this quote.
Closed by: Shows the employee code that completed the quotation.
Open Selected Quote
Click this button to open a quote.
To open the quotation:
• Select the quotation;
• And click on Open Selected Quote.
Turn Off Selected Quote(s)
Click this button to delete one or more quotes.
To delete the quote:
• Select the quote(s) you want to delete;
• Click the Delete Selected Quotation(s) button;
Cancel
Click this button to exit the screen, Read Quote.

127
Purchase Order
Purchase orders for suppliers must be made through the entry screen using the
operation pre-registered as Purchase Order. Subsequently, this operation may be
located and transformed into a purchase.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the menuEntry;
• In the Operation field, select Purchase Order.
Prerequisites
To make the Entries, the following registrations will be necessary: customer registration /
Supplier, Price List, Employees and Products.

Making the Order

On the Entry screen, using the Purchase Order operation, specify the products you wish to order.
ask the supplier and record. The Purchase Order operation must be configured not to
increase the stock.

Turn this order into a purchase

As soon as you receive the order, you will be able to convert it into a Purchase, without the need to retype.
the products.
To transform the order into a purchase:
• Locate the purchase order using the magnifying glass icon or press F11;
• Click on the Order menu, then turn this Order into a Purchase;
• A screen will open to select the desired purchase operation;
• You will be able to change, delete, and add products in the purchase.
• Then click on Save (F2) and provide the payment method.
Attention: When converting the order into a purchase, with this option, the original order will be deleted.
and a new purchase sequence will be generated.

Partial Receipt of this Order

With this routine, you will be able to make a partial receipt of a purchase order, as it allows
select only the received products. The products that are not selected
they will remain in the order, for later receipt.
To make a partial receipt of the order:
• Localize the purchase order by clicking on the magnifying glass icon or pressing F11;
• Click on the Order menu, then Partial Receipt of this order;
• It will open a screen to select the desired Purchase operation, double click to
open it;
• Next, a screen will open with all the products from the purchase order;
• Check the following order information: Code, Name, Unit, Quantity, Size, and Color.
Quantity Received: In this column, inform the quantity of the products received. The products that
if they do not have this column filled in, in the same quantity as the order, they will be recorded
in the original sequence of the order to make the later receipt.

128
 Qtde Recebida = Qtde
Click this button to fill the 'Quantity Received' column with the same amount requested.
for all products. Later, only change the quantities of the received items
partially.
Quantity received = 0
Click this button to fill the column Quantity Received with zero, for all products.
Then change only the quantities of the items received partially.

Create Partial Purchase

Click this button to generate a partial purchase of the products that have the quantity field
received filled. Locate the operation created and inform the payment method.

Order Committee
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This routine allows merging orders made in different sequences for the same
supplier, generating a unique order to receive the products and make the payment.
To combine the purchase orders:
• Locate a purchase order made to the supplier.
• Then click on the menuOrder on the optionJoin Orders;
• The Import Products screen will open, where all orders made to the supplier will be listed;
• Select the row that has the products you want to import;
• Then click on the Import Products button (F2);
• All products from the selected sequence will be imported. If there are products with the
the same code will be grouped.
Attention: You may make as many imports as necessary, following the same procedure.
explained above.

Accounts Payable Forecast

You can create a payable invoice with a due date, from the order made with the supplier,
depending on the negotiation made.
To generate a projected account:
• Informe todos os produtos do pedido;
• In the field, to the left of the Total field, select the option Expected Accounts Payable;
• A screen will open to provide the following information:
In this field, provide the expected date for the accounts payable.
Valor:Neste campo informe o valor da conta.
Description: This field is automatically filled with a description. This may
to be changed.
• On the Accounts Payable Launch screen in the Financial module, you will be able to locate this.
count it and turn it into an accounts payable. When transforming an order with a forecasted account
In the purchase, select an operation that does not generate the financial.

Record (F2)
Click this button to save the changes.

129
Entrance
This screen allows for inventory input operations, with quick access to information.
of the product that is being chosen. It is possible to perform operations such as Order, Purchase,
Customer return, Stock adjustment, Loan, among others.

Configure this screen

This screen allows you to configure and customize the Inputs screen by selecting the fields that will be
shown and the functions that will be released.
To configure the login screen, you can press Alt+C or click on the Configure menu.
fabric.
To open this screen:
• Select the option Movement;
• Click on the Input menu.
• Click on the menuConfigure this Screenor pressAlt+C.
General
In this tab, you can choose the following functions for using the screen.
Decimal Houses
Select in this box the number of decimal places that will be used in the price field.
unit price of the product. Allows you to choose between 02 and 04 decimal places.
Launch Products with Series
Select here, the way to enter the products with serial numbers:
One per line, with the series informed on the same line: By checking this option, it will be
only one series is allowed to be reported per line at the time of entry.
Allow multiple per line, with the series released on the Series screen (Alt+S): Check this
option to allow the entry of multiple series numbers for the same product. In
input screen, choose a product with a series and press Alt+S.
It will open the Series screen, on this screen there will be the following information:
• It will show the code and the name of the product;
• Quantity to inform: Shows the amount of the product that needs to be provided;
• Informed quantity: Shows the number of series listed in the table.
To add series:
• Inform the product series according to the quantity to be provided;
• Press F2 to confirm and return to the Input screen, then press Enter to
launch the product on the schedule.
To remove a series:
• Select the series you want to remove;
• Click the buttonRemove Selected;
• Press F2 to confirm and return to the Entries screen.
Operation
In this panel, you can configure the functions you want to use.
Show product photo: Check this option to display the photo when informing about the product.
Automatically clear after completing: Check this option to clear the screen.
automatically, after confirming the entry.
Do not allow the same item to be entered twice: Check this option to prevent entering it.
code of the same product twice. With this option selected, you will have to enter the

130
 total quantity of the product in a single line. The system will notify that the product is in the grid.
to alter the data of the line.
Keep the value of the Discount % field: Check this option to maintain the reported discount
for the first product launched in the lineup.

Prices
In this frame, you can select a table to set as the default on the screen.
Additional Observations
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows notes to be added on the input screen after the operation.
to be recorded.
Select one of the options to allow adding observations:
Do not allow: With this option selected, it will not be possible to add notes.
Free edition: With this option selected, the employee will be able to check, add, edit and
turn off the comments in the entries.
Just add text: With this option selected, the employee will be able to check and
add the observations.

Visualization
In this tab, you can select the fields that will be displayed on the Entry screen.

Header - Fields to Display

(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this box, select the fields you want to display in the header of the entry screen. You can
choose the following fields: Series / Note / Issue, Observation, Order and Forecast
Receipt.
Product fields
Neste quadro selecione os campos que serão mostrados na linha do produto. Poderá selecionar
the following fields:
Product, Quantity, and Price: These options are disabled, as it is mandatory to provide.
these data on the product line.
Total Price: Check this option to show the total price field of the products, without the calculation
of discounts and taxes.
Desc. (%): Check this option to allow percentage discount on each line of the
product.
Desc. ($):Marque esta opção para permitir o desconto em valor, em cada linha do produto.
% ICMS: Check this option to allow entering the ICMS percentage in the line of
product. If this option is not enabled, the specified ICMS percentage will be used
in the Tax Class.
Mark this option to allow entering an IPI percentage in the product line.
If this option is not enabled, the stated percentage of IPI will be considered in the
Class of Taxes.
Label: Check this option to register the quantity of product labels for
printing.
Final Price: Check this option to show the final price of the product, considering the
percentages of discounts and taxes.

131
 Seller 1 (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this field to
show the code of seller 1.
Seller 2 (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this field to
show the code of seller 2.
Attention: The seller 1 and seller 2 fields will only appear when using the operation
Customer Return.

Chart of Accounts
In this field, indicate the chart of accounts that will be used for the account entries.
pay, referring to the purchase of goods and freight.
For payment of entries: Select in this field the chart of accounts that will be related to
purchase of goods.
For freight payment: Select in this field the chart of accounts that will be related to the freight
of delivery of the purchase of goods.

Cost
In this tab, configure which options will be considered for the calculation of the cost price of the
product. You can select the following options:
Cost Price Calculation
In this frame, select the options that will be used in the cost price calculation.
- Discount: Select this option to subtract the discount amount from the price calculation.
cost.
Select this option to add the IPI value in the cost price calculation.
(+) ICMS: Select this option to add the ICMS value to the calculation of the cost price.
The percentage of ICMS reported in the product line will be considered.
(-) ICMS: Select this option to reduce the ICMS value in the cost price calculation.
(+) Freight to pay: Select this option to add the value of the freight to be paid.

Number of decimal places for price calculation of

cost
Select in this box the number of decimal places that will be used to record the price
product cost. Allows choosing between 02 and 04 decimal places.
When completing a purchase, update the fields % Freight, %
ICMS and % IPI on the Cost Calculation screen of the registration of
Products
Select this option for the system to save the percentages of freight, ICMS, and IPI provided.
for the product at the time of the purchase launch, on the Cost Calculation screen it states
in the product registration.

Import Products
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab, configure the permissions to import products from other incoming operations.
This function is interesting for companies that make multiple entries with the same items.
You can configure the following options: Does not allow import, Allows import of products from
other operations, only from this branch, Allows importing products from other operations and from
any branch.

132
Prices
In this framework, define the way to use the price at the time of import.
Use the price and table from the original operation: Select this option to import the products
with the prices informed in the original operation.
Use the current screen's price and table: Select this option to use the price and the table that
estiver selecionada na tela deEntrada, ao importar os produtos de outras operações.
Products by Supplier
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab, you can configure the system to check if the product belongs to the supplier.
informed.
Notify if the product is not from the specified supplier: Select this option so that the
the system will notify when the product is not from the provided supplier. The system will notify, but
will allow the product to be entered.
Notify and do not allow to launch if the product is not from the specified supplier: Select this
Option for the system to notify when the product does not belong to the specified supplier. This option
will not allow the product entry with a supplier different from the one registered.
of products.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the selected settings. Then close the screen and log in.
again to save the settings.

133
How to Make a Purchase
In this chapter, we will explain how to record a purchase of goods.
Prerequisites:
To make the Entries, the following registrations will be necessary: client registration /
Suppliers, Price Table, Employees and Products.

Operation
In this field, select the desired input operation. You can create new operations of
Entry in the moduleSettings, in the menuTypes of Operations. The system has some
pre-registered operations. For more information, see the chapter Operations of
Entrance.

Supplier
In this field, locate the supplier of the product.

Pending products with the Supplier

If the company has pending orders with the supplier, a blue square will be displayed.
right side of the supplier field. To view the information about the order, give a
double click on the square. The displayed data will be: Sequence, Date, Order, Forecast
Recebimento, Código, Nome, Qtde, Preço Unit., Preço final, Tamanho e Cor.
Other header fields
General Seq.: The sequence is generated automatically by the system. The movements on the screen
entries can be located by this number, thus facilitating your search.
These numbers will be used as a reference in the Entry reports.
In this field, the date of the recording of the input operation will be displayed.
Typed By: This field will be automatically filled with the name and code of
employee who recorded the operation.
Tabela:Neste campo selecione a tabela na qual será gravada o preço de custo do produto.
Série / Nota / Emissão:Neste campo informe a série, o número e a data de emissão da nota
fiscal.
Note: In this field you can type a note regarding the operation. This can be
printed on the invoice or ticket.
Order: In this field enter the purchase order number.
Expected Receipt: In this field, select the expected date for the order receipt.

Product
Report the product and the quantity that was purchased. The fields price, ICMS, and IPI will be
automatically filled in, as indicated in the Products registration, but can be
altered at the time of entry. Discounts can be informed in percentage or in
value in the fieldsDesc%eDesc$.

Quantity
In this field, inform the quantity of the product that was purchased. If the product is
purchased in boxes and sold in units, please inform the quantity of boxes that is being
purchased and in the box, type the quantity of items in the box.

134
 Example: To enter a CD tube, you can specify the quantity in the Qty field.
of CD tubes that were purchased. In the field box, inform the quantity of CDs that
contains in each tube. The system will enter the stock equal to the quantity calculated in
Field Quantity Total will be the Unit Price for the unit CD.
Total Quantity: This field will display the total quantity of the product. The quantities will be multiplied by
Quantity with the amount provided in the field Boxes.
Price: In this field, inform the price paid for the product.
Unit price: This field shows the unit price of the box divided by the quantity.
informed in the field Boxes with. Below this field, the Total Price will be shown.
product, disregarding taxes and discounts.
Final price: This field shows the total price of the product, considering taxes and the
discounts.
OK: Click this field to add the product to the grid.
Edit product line in the code field
To edit/change a product line, press the equal sign (=) when the cursor is on it.
in the product field. Then a screen will appear for you to enter the line you want to change.
Turn off the product line
Click this button to delete a product listed in the product grid. By clicking this button
A screen will appear to inform the line number you wish to delete.
Product information
By clicking this button, you will be able to check the product information such as: branch stock and
from all branches, sales summary, the latest purchases, pending orders and the products
borrowed.
To verify the product information:
• In the product field, enter the product code and press TAB;
• Click the button .
Making entries with products with a size chart
To enter products with a grid, provide the product code and the grid code.
You can choose between two ways to enter a product with a grid:
Entering the product, launching one grid at a time:
• Provide the data in the header to input the products.
• In the product field, you can type the product code or press Down Arrow to
locate it;
• Then, still with the cursor in the product field, you can type the size and code of the
color or press UpArrow to locate the product grid. All grades of the will be listed.
product with its respective size and color.
• Double-click on the desired size and color, or use the arrow keys and press
Enter.
• The system will complete the product code with the code of the selected size.
• Then provide the quantity and price, among others, to finalize the entry.
Entering the product with various grade combinations:
• Provide the data in the header to input the products;
• Click on the menu 'Type grade', which is located at the top of the screen;
• It will open the Product Entry screen with Grid, to input products with grid.
On this screen, please fill in the following fields:
Order: Select in this field the desired sorting method. You can choose between code
Your name.

135
 Code: In this field, type or press Down Arrow to find the product.
In this field, type or press Down Arrow to locate the color.
After informing the product and color, select up to 22 (twenty-two) sizes to make the
entry.
Size: In this section select the sizes that will be used for making the input of
products. The selected sizes in this field will be listed next to the Color field.
Press the Ctrl key to select more than one line of sizes.
Stock: In the fields next to the color code, enter the quantity you wish to input.
of every size.
After entering the stock quantity for each size, enter the following data:
Preço, Desc (%), ICMS e IPI.
Total: This field will show the total of the products considering all the data.
informed.
Label: In this field, inform the quantity of labels you wish to print for these products.
OK: Click this button to insert all products into the grid.
Delete selected lines
Click this button to delete one or more lines of products. You can press Ctrl to
select more than one row.
Does not accept repeated grades
Select this option to prevent the release of products with the same color, even if
have different sizes.
Do not clean products after launching on the grid
Select this option to not clear the product code field and the selected sizes.
Use it to make a new product launch with a different color.
Return Grade
Click this button to return to the main entry screen, to launch more products or
confirm the entry of the products.

Freight
The freight can be informed by the following options:
Freight value: In this field, enter the amount paid for freight. Next to it, you can select which
type of freight.
The types are:
A pagar (junto com a nota):Selecione esta opção quando o frete foi pago junto com a nota
purchase invoice.
To pay (separately): Select this option when the freight payment is separate from the invoice.
fiscal.
By selecting this option, you will need to provide the shipping payment method, for that click on the
Freight button (F4).
Payment: Select this option when the freight has already been paid by the supplier or when it has not.
charged.
Descrição Conta Pagar:Neste campo digite a descrição referente à conta a pagar do frete.
Freight (F4)
Click this button to inform how the shipping payment will be made. To do this, you will have to
fill in the following fields:

136
 • Fill in the Freight Value field;
• Select the type of freight as Payable (separated);
• In the field Description Account Payable, enter a description;
• Then click on the Shipping button (F4), a screen will open with the following fields:
Supplier: In this field, locate the supplier / carrier for the freight payment.
Series / Note: In this field, provide the series and the note number of the freight.
Inform payment method: Click this button to inform the payment method.
freight will open the Payment screen. For more information, consult the chapter Screen of
Payment.
Return (F2): Click this button to go back to the Entries screen to inform the method of
payment on the invoice.
Record (F2)
Click this button to record the entry of products and also to inform the method of
payment.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen
Pay (F3)
Click this button to provide the payment method for the down payment. For more information,
consult the Payment Table chapter.
Send by email
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Input operations can be sent by email. You can send requests to
supplier, input transfers, orders, among others.
Clicking this button will open the screenSend by email. There, select the following options:
Email layout: In this field, select the pre-configured email layout in the module.
Settings, in the menu Other / Email layout settings.
Sending Configuration: In this field, select the email server configuration
pre-configured in the Settings module, in the Other / Server Configuration menu
the email.
Para:Este campo vem preenchido com o email cadastrado para o fornecedor. Caso queira
to send the email to more than one contact use a semicolon (;) or a comma (,) to separate
the addresses.
Send: Click this button to open the screen with the data that will be sent in the email. In this
the screen may alter the data before sending, depending on the employee's permission.
Esc - Cancel: Click this button to cancel the sending of the email.

Search Entries (F11)

This screen allows you to find entries by clicking on the magnifying glass icon at the bottom of the screen or through
from the F11 key. With it, you can search for purchases and other transactions using
the following filters:
General
In this tab, provide the data that will be used to search for the transactions. Locate
the entries using the following options: Date from, Supplier, Invoice, Order, Operation,
Type of Operation, Sequence and Show only the unfulfilled sales.

137
 Value
In this tab, you will be able to locate entries by value. You will have the following search options:
All: This option is checked by default and will show the transactions with any
value. Select one of the options below to use the value filter.
Equal: It will only show the transactions that have the value equal to the one entered.
It will only show transactions that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will only show the transactions that have a value lower than the one entered.

Search (F2)
Click this button for the system to search the movements with the provided data.
A screen will appear with all the found movements.
To open the desired transaction, click on the line, or find it using the arrow keys.
keyboard.
To hide or display the search screen, click on the icon. , at the bottom of the screen, or press
Alt+F11. This screen will remain available in the footer, through this icon.
To make a new inquiry, press F11 again.
Clear
Click this button to clear the search fields to make a new one.
Cancel (Esc)
Click this button to cancel and exit the search screen.

Options
By clicking on this menu you can execute the following routines:

Show supplier information

Click this option to check information about the supplier such as: Inputs and Accounts
Pay. It is necessary to first inform the name of the supplier.
For more information, consult the chapter on Customer and Supplier Registration.
Import Products from Another Operation
This option allows you to import products from other recorded input operations.
To import products:
• Provide the supplier and the price list;
• Then click on the menu Options / Import Products from Another Operation;
• It will open the system search screen, as explained earlier;
• When selecting the research fields, a screen will open with the following information: Sequence,
Operação, Data, Observação e Total.
• When selecting one of the transaction lines, the data will appear at the bottom of the screen.
entry. You can verify the following information: Details, Operation, Supplier, Products,
Código, Nome, Unid, Qtde, Preço unitário, Preço Total, Desc (%), Desc ($), ICMS (%), IPI
(%), Preço Final,Complemento, Tabela, Vendedor 1, Vendedor 2, Série, Lote, Tipo ICMS,
Valor IPI, Etiqueta, Tamanho, Cor,
• Import Products (F2)
Click this button to import the products from the selected movement.
View / Change Entry Totals (Alt+T)

138
 You can press Alt+T to check the totals, such as: product totals, taxes,
descontos, peso líquido, peso bruto, quantidade de peças, informações sobre frete e plano de
accounts.
On this screen, you will also be able to change the totals by pressing F10. The totals that can be changed
the altered are: the total value of products, Product Desc., ICMS Base, ICMS Value, ICMS Base
Subst, Valor ICMS Dif, Base Dif, Base IPI, Valor IPI e o Total da compra.
Attention: The system calculates the IPI for each product and the total IPI shown will be the
sum of these. In this case, there may be a difference in the value of the IPI. This difference will appear
when comparing the total presented with a calculation made directly on the purchase amount.
Example: When making a purchase of two products with an IPI of 10%, one priced at R$
104.99 and the other one for R$ 16.19, the total purchase will be R$ 121.18. The system will show as
IPI the value of R$ 12.12, sum of R$ 10.50 (rounded IPI of the first item) and R$ 1.62 (IPI
rounded from the second item). When calculating 10% of the total purchase, the result will be
from R$ 12.11.
Additional Observations Info
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Click this option to provide a remark after saving the entry.
To add the observation:
• Localize the desired input;
• Click on the Options menu / Additional Notes Information;
• In the Add Note field, enter the desired text with up to 110 (one hundred and ten)
characters;
• Click the OK button to add the note text to the board;
• After adding, click the Confirm button to save and close the screen or click the button
Cancel to exit the screen without saving the text.

Generate Labels for this Entry

This function allows you to generate labels for all the products specified in the input. This routine
it can be done in multiple entries, printing the labels all at once.
To generate the labels:
• Enter or locate an entry for which you want to generate product labels.
• Click on the Options menu in Generate Labels for this entry;
• A screen will appear with the message: Do you want to add the products from this entry to the list of
products to print?
• Click Yes to generate the labels or click No to cancel the routine.
Launch Composite Product Components
This routine allows the raw materials of the finished product to be entered at the time of entry, if
use the Industry Module. This module is sold separately, only for the version
Corporate. The product composition must be created in the Industry module.
To launch the composition of the products:
• Click on the Options menu in Launch Composite Product Components;
• It will open the product search screen, locate the finished product you wish to enter.
For more information, consult the chapter Product Search Screen.
• When selecting the product, a screen will open for you to enter the final quantity of the product.
• Click OK, in the product grid on the entry screen, all raw materials will be listed.

139
 Import Transfer Products
(Only for Corporate Plus)
This routine allows importing products transferred from another branch registered in the same
system (online branches). This routine is used for the employee to perform an operation of
entry, recording the transfer.
To import the transfer file:
• Inform the operation code, the Transfer operation is already pre-registered in the system.
Entry;
• Then provide the supplier code;
• Click on the Options menu, in Import Transfer Products;
• Locate the transfer you wish to import;
• Double click on it;
• All products from the transfer will be released in the grade.
• In this operation, you can add more products or simply save the entry.
Import Transfer File
This routine allows you to import the file with the inventory data of the products transferred by
another branch.
To import the transfer file;
• Click on the Options menu, then Import transfer file;
• A screen will open to select the transfer file;
• Select the file and click the Open button or double-click on it to import it.
• All products from the stock transfer will be imported;
• In this operation, you can add more products or just record the entry.
Turn off entry
This option allows you to delete an entry that has not had any movement in the product stock and/or
financial.
We do not recommend using this function to delete an entry that generated the financial and/or
the stock of the product has increased, as this information will appear in the purchase reports,
box, inventory and accounts payable. The operation will be erased only from the input screen.

Undo Entry
This function allows you to undo an Entry that had stock movements of the product and /
the financial. This function decreases the product stock and removes the payment method from
box. It can also be used to cancel the printed invoice. The undone entries
they will appear in the cash reports with a positive amount.

Ancillary expenses
Select this option to inform the value of the accessory expenses. By clicking on this option
it will open a screen to inform the value.

Watch Series
Select this option to verify and print the series provided in the input.
Loan Adjustment Date
Select this option to inform the date for the loan settlement, if you are making it.
an entry of consigned products.
Printing
Click this button to print the invoice or ticket for the incoming operation.

140
 To print the invoice or ticket, it is necessary to configure the layout first. For more details
For information, consult the manual available on the Shop Control 8 CD.

Documents
Click this button to add documents related to the entry. For more information,
consult the chapter Documents.

Pay (F3)
This screen is used to launch the payment method. For the use of this function, the input must
to be recorded. For more information, see the Payment Screen chapter.

141
Calculation of Selling Cost
This screen allows you to calculate and update the selling price of the products, using the parameters
from the Cost Price Calculation screen, from the Product registration, and also from the Input screen.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Input menu, under Options, and then on Cost of Sales Calculation.

Sales Price Table

In this field, select the sales table you wish to calculate and update the price.

Calculate the Cost and Sale price using the

Parameters
In this field, choose the parameter that will be considered for the calculation of the selling price.
You can choose from the following options:
From the product cost screen
Select this option to calculate the selling price using the cost parameters and
routine for calculating the selling price of the product registration. Click the Proceed button to
check the calculation.
Code: This field shows the product code of the input.
Nome:Este campo mostra o nome do produto da entrada.
Previous Purchase: This column shows the cost price of the product from the previous purchase,
informed in the List Price field (Excluding IPI) recorded on the Cost Calculation screen, in the registration
of the Product.
Current Purchase: This column shows the cost price of the product, reported in the current purchase.
Previous cost: This column shows the previously calculated cost in the Cost Price field.
calculated on the Cost Calculation screen, in the Product registration.
Custo Calculado:Esta coluna mostra o novo preço de custo calculado. Utiliza o novo valor do
cost price of the Entry screen, with the percentages / values of the expenses registered on the screen
of Cost Calculation, in the Purchase frame.
Current Selling Price: This column shows the current selling price, which is listed in the sales table.
selected.
Current Margin (%): This column shows the new profit margin, considering Price of
Current Sale in relation to Calculated Cost.
New Selling Price: This column shows the new selling price of the product, considering the
cost of the Entry screen and adding the expenses and profit registered on the Cost Calculation screen,
in the product registration.
New Margin: This column shows the new profit margin, considering Selling Price
New in relation to the Calculated Cost.
Difference (%): This column shows the difference between the percentage of the new margin and that of
current margin.
Change: Select this column if you want to change the prices only of the marked products.
From the Input Settings screen (Cost) and Cost of
Products (Profit)
Select this option to calculate the selling price using the Cost parameters.
from the Entry screen and the Profit from the Cost Calculation screen in Product. Click on the button
Proceed to verify the calculation.

142
 Code: This field shows the product code of the entry.
Name: This field shows the name of the product of the input.
Previous Purchase: This column shows the cost price of the product from the previous purchase,
informed in the List Price field (Without IPI) recorded on the Cost Calculation screen, in the registration
of the Product.
Current Purchase: This column shows the purchase price of the product indicated in this entry.
Previous Cost: This column shows the previous cost in the Cost Price field calculated in
Cost Calculation Sheet, in Product.
Calculated Cost: This column shows the new cost price. It uses the expenses and
settings informed on the Entry screen.
Current Sale Price: This column shows the current sale price, which is listed in the sales table.
selected.
Current Margin (%): This column shows the new profit margin, considering Price of
Current Sale in relation to the Calculated Cost.
New Selling Price: This column shows the new selling price of the product, considering the
costs and additional expenses of the Entrance screen and adding the profit option registered in
Cost Calculation screen, in the Product registration.
New Margin: This column shows the new profit margin, considering Sale Price
New regarding the Calculated Cost.
Difference (%): This column shows the difference between the percentage of the new margin and that of
current margin.
Change: Select this column if you want to change only the prices of the marked products.

When saving the changes

In this table, mark the options you wish to save in the Product registration.
Save the new sale price in the indicated table: Select this option to save the price
of the product for sale, in the sales table, indicated on this screen.
Record the purchase value and percentages of taxes in the cost part of products, in the
Product registration: Select this option to save the taxes on the Calculation screen.
Cost, in the product registration.
Save only when the Change column is checked: Select this option to save
only the costs of the products that have the Change column marked.
Save changes
Click this button to save the changes.

143
Payment Screen
This screen can be used by the input screen, through the F3 button, by the screen of
accounts payable maintenance, among others. You can enter the payment methods in it.
Box
In this field, indicate which box will be used to make the payment of the bill. The filling out
this field is mandatory.

Resumo (F3)
Shop Control accepts various forms of payment for the same entry or account payable.
This tab shows the summary of the reported payment methods. These are: cash, checks,
plots, bank account, customer checks, company credit, and exchanged products.
Tip: By clicking on the icon of each payment method, the corresponding tab will open to
make the launch.

Money (F4)
In this tab, you can enter the amount paid in cash.

Installment (F7)
In this tab, you can provide the information for the installment of the down payment.

Please provide the date of the first installment.

Valor:Informe o valor total que será parcelado.
Number of Installments: Inform the number of installments the informed amount will be divided into.
Interval: Enter the interval of the installments and select whether it will be in day(s) or month(s).
Launch (F12)
Click this button or press F12 to launch the installments on the board.
Turn Off Parcel
Click this button to delete the installment(s).
To pay off one or more installments;
• Click the Delete Installment button;
• A screen will appear for you to enter the number of the line you want to delete. Enter the number zero
(0) to delete all the installments.

Checks (F8)
In this tab, provide the information for payment with checks in full and/or in installments.
Account: Enter or locate the account code.
Check: Enter the check number.
Report the due date of the first check.
Value: Please enter the total amount that will be paid by check.
Qty: Please inform the number of checks that will be divided by the informed amount.
Interval: Provide the interval of the installments and select whether it will be in day(s) or month(s).
Launch (F12)
Click this button or press F12 to release the checks on the board.

144
 Cancel Check
Click this button to delete the check(s).
To void one or more checks:
• Click on the Delete Check button;
• A screen will appear for you to enter the number of the line you wish to delete. Enter the number zero.
(0) para apagar todos os cheques.

Credit (F9)
In this tab you can enter payments made with client checks, bank account,
company credit and exchanged products.
Customer checks
You may use the checks received from clients to make the payment for the purchase.
To find the received checks, click the Select Checks button, it will open the screen.
Customer Checks.
Customer Check Search
On this screen, you can select the checks that will be delivered to the supplier.
Options
Neste quadro poderá fazer a pesquisa dos cheques por período ou pelo número do cheque.
Issue of: Mark this field to search for checks by issue date. Next to it
report the start date and the end date of the period you wish to search.
Number: This field can be used to search for a check by its number.
Find (F6)
Click this button to show the search result.
The following information about the check will be shown in this frame:
Cliente, Nome, Banco, Nome do Banco, Agência, Número, Valor, Vencimento, Custodiado
Discounted
To select one or more check(s):
• Select the check(s) by clicking with the mouse on the check line or press
Ctrl to select more checks;
• Click the Add check(s) button on the grid (Ctrl+A).
Check the selected checks, through the fields:
Totals Found: This table will show the quantity and the total value of Checks
Found.
Selected Totals: This field will display the quantity and the total value of the checks that
They are in the selected checks board, to be picked up.
If you want to remove one or more checks from the selection:
• In the Selected Checks frame, select the check(s) you want to remove from the selection;
• After selecting the checks that will not be used to pay the bill,
click the button Delete Check(s) from the grid (Ctrl+E).
F2 - Confirm
Press the F2 key to confirm the movement of the check(s).
ESC - Cancel
Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the screen and cancel the movement.

145
Bank Account
You can make the payment for the purchase by directly withdrawing the amount from your bank account.
Value: Enter in this field the amount of the debit that will be made to the account.
Payment made from this account: In this field, provide the account from which the amount was withdrawn.
Consolidated: Select this field if the value is consolidated.
Company Credit
You can make the payment of the bill with the credit that the company has with the supplier.
Available credit: This field will show the amount of credit that the company has with the
supplier.
Value: In this field, enter the amount you wish to deduct from the credit to pay the bill.
Attention: Payment with the company's credit, directly on the Entry screen, is exclusive for
Corporate. In the Advanced version, you can make the entry payment as an installment and
after making the maintenance of the accounts payable, using the credit.

Exchanged Products
This field will be automatically filled in during the merchandise return operation, generated
through the Simplified Exchange, on the Outgoing screen.

Valor:Este campo mostra o valor do(s) produto(s) devolvido(s).

Sequence Output: This field shows the output sequence number.
Total
This field shows the total value of the purchase that must be paid.
Payment
This field shows the total of the reported payment methods.
Missing
This field shows the amount that still needs to be provided to complete the down payment.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm the down payment. The payment details will appear at the bottom of the screen.
icons informing that the financial has been made effective and informing that it has been made effective
product stock.
Cancel (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the down payment.

146
Movement - Sales

147
Sales / Outputs
On this screen, you can perform the operations and movements of product exits. The Shop
Control 8 has five (5) Output screens for the Corporate version and three (3) screens for the
Advanced version. In it, you will be able to make different access and release configurations for the
employees. In the Employees registration, in Security, you can configure which screens
sales the employee will have access.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Exit menu and then select one of the five output screen options.

Configure this Screen

This function allows the configuration of each of the sales/output screens. Customize yours.
sales screen, choosing the layout, the fields that will be displayed and the functions that will be
allowed.
To open this screen:
• Select the option Movement;
• Click on the Sales menu, select one of the sales screens;
• Press Alt+Click on the icon .

General
In this tab, define the following settings:
When using the reader, do not skip to the next one
product automatically
Check this option if you use the barcode reader, so that the system does not launch the
product automatically in the grid. Thus, the system will find the product and will always enable the
field quantity, to be entered manually.
Use balance labels
Check this option for the system to read the label printed by the scale, through the reader.
barcode.
Number of digits for the product code
Select the number of digits that the scale will use to print the product code.
This code can vary between 3 (Three) to 6 (Six) digits.
Only allows cleaning the screen with products released with
password
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option to allow the employee to clear the screen after entering the products.
only after entering the password.

Only allows editing or deleting products launched with

password
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option to allow the employee to edit or delete products, only after
provide the password.

148
Additional Observations
You can add notes regarding sales, before or after saving them. You can configure
the following permissions for this option:
Do not allow: Select this option to prevent adding notes on the sales screen.
Free edition: Select this option so that the employee can launch or change the
observations already recorded.
Only add text: Select this option for the employee to only add the
observations, without altering previous observations.

Products
In this tab, define the settings that will be allowed when entering the products.
Maximum number of product lines
In this field select the number of product lines that will be displayed on the screen.
sales. In this field, enter a number between 1 and 1000 to define the number of lines of
products.
Color of the alternating lines
In this field, select the color that will alternate in the product grid on the sales screen.
Attention: If you do not want alternating colors to appear on the sales screen, select the color.
white. With the Market layout it doesn't work.
To change the color of the lines:
• Click on the button.
• Select a color;
• Click the OK button;
• Click on Save (F2);
• Close the screen and enter again so that it has the new configuration.
Launch products with series
(Available only in Corporate versions)
In this framework, determine how you prefer to launch the sales of products with a series.

One per line, with the series indicated on the same line.
By selecting this option, only one series will be allowed per line at the time of
sale. It will be possible to view the product's serial number when locating the sale itself.
as long as the series field is in the Preview tab.
Allow multiple per line, with the series released on screen
of Series (Alt+S)
Marque essa opção para permitir informar vários números de séries ao selecionar um produto.
To launch the series press (Alt+S) on the Outputs screen.
The Series screen will show the following information: Product code and name, Quantity
informed quantity.
To add series:
• Report the product series, or press Down Arrow to locate them;
• Click on Include;
• Press F2 to confirm and return to the sales screen;
• Perform this procedure until you complete the selection of the series and then press F2 on the keyboard, to
return to the sales screen.

149
 To remove a series:
• Select the series you want to remove;
• Click the Remove Selected button;
• Press F2 to confirm and return to the sales screen.

Services
In this tab, define the permissions to launch a service and to import an order of
service.
Allows services (with the F6 key)
Check this option to allow service sales by pressing the F6 key.
Does not allow changing the unit price of the service
Available only for Corporate versions
Check this option to prevent the unit price of the services from being changed.
When importing Service Orders
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Neste quadro configure a importação dos camposDetalhes da Ordem de Serviço.
Do not import Detail fields: Select this option so that the system does not import the
fields Service details.
Import details fields to the Observation field on the screen: Select this option to
that the system imports the Service Details fields into the Observations field, on the screen of
sales.
Import fields from Details to the Notes screen: Select this option so that the
system imports the service details fields to the Observations screen. This screen will be
viewed by pressing (Alt+B), after locating the sale.
Fields to Import
In this table, the fields created in Service Order / Configure Order will be shown.
de Serviço. Selecione apenas os campos que deseja importar para a tela de vendas.

Stock
In this tab, set the configuration for stock reduction during sale.
Allows exit without stock
Check this option to allow the sale of products that are out of stock and/or
negative.
Recheck the stock at the time of recording (More
slow)
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Check this option so that the system rechecks your stock when recording a sale. This
the option will make your sale slower.
We advise the use of this option for sales made by telephone, when the company
has a high sales volume relative to its inventory. It may happen that two
employees are selling the same product, which only contains
stock for a sale. As soon as one of the employees completes the sale, the system will give the
stock depletion, when the second one is confirmed the system will recheck and notify that there is none
more stock available.

150
 When converting budget into sales, recheck the stock and exclude products without
sufficient stock
Select this option for the system to recheck the stock of the selected products in
budget and exclude those that did not have sufficient stock.

Operation
In the field StandardOperation you can define a standard operation for the sales screen.
Allow change operation: Check this option to allow the default operation
selected, may be changed at the time of sale.

Operation
In this tab, define the settings for using the output screen.
Clear the screen after receipt
Check this option so that the system automatically clears the sales screen after
confirm the receipt of the sale.
If you can't find the product by the code, search by the
Supplier Code
Check this option for the system to locate the product by the Supplier Code, if
não encontre com o código cadastrado para o produto. Essa opção deve estar marcada, caso
use more than one code per product.
Does not allow ticket printing before finalization
Check this option to prevent printing the ticket before confirming the receipt of the
sale.
Does not allow printing of invoice before confirming
Check this option to prevent printing the invoice before confirming receipt.
of the sale.

Does not allow launching the same product more than once,
in the same operation
(Available only in Corporate versions)
Marque essa opção para não permitir o lançamento do mesmo produto duas vezes na mesma
sale.
With this option, you will have to enter the total quantity when listing the product for sale. The system
will notify when the specified product is already on the sales roster, so that its quantity can be
altered.
Ao lançar dois itens iguais e com os mesmos valores
(prices, discounts, and taxes), merge into a single line
(Available only in Corporate versions)
Check this option for the system to group, in a single line, the products that have
with all the same data. This option will not leave the same product, with the same values,
in several lines.

151
 Show and confirm the Delivery Address when saving a
sale
(Available only in the Corporate versions)
Check this option so that the system shows the customer's address screen, allowing
confirm it at the time of sale.
When clearing the screen, the focus remains on the field.
This option allows you to select which field you want the mouse cursor to be in after the
confirmation of receipt of the sale.
You may choose from the following fields:
Operação, Cliente, Tabela de preços, Vendedor, Referência interna, Observação, Comissão
fix, Commissioned, Seller 2 or Product Code.
When undoing an exit
Choose in this field the desired procedure to undo a departure.
Allow to clean / change: Select this option to allow changing the sale, if necessary, or
You can clear the screen to make a new sale. This option does not keep the sale recorded in
system.
Leave the operation recorded as undone (Available only in Corporate versions):
Select this option to keep the canceled sale displayed on the sales screen.

Visualization
You can configure, in this tab, the fields that will appear on the sales screen.

Screen Layout
In this panel, select the layout you want to use on the sales screen.
Initial layout
In this field, choose the layout you want to use on the output screen. The available layouts are:
Complete
This layout allows you to choose the fields to be displayed in the header of the sales screen, the
product fields and the information to be displayed in the product grid.
Use this layout to launch specific information by product, such as seller and table.
price.
Market
This layout is recommended for quick sales. Because it is simplified, it allows for selection
only a few fields to display on the screen. To use this layout, it is necessary to use some
default settings, such as Table and Client. In the market layout, you can choose between the
gray, blue, and green colors.

Product Grid - Fields to display

In this panel, select the fields that will be shown in the product grid on the sales screen.
The fields that can be selected to be displayed in the product grid are:
Código, Nome, Unid, Qtde, Preço unitário, Preço Final, Desc. (%), Desc. ($), Complemento,
Table, Vendor 1, Vendor 2, Commissioned, Downloaded OS (when there is an import of
OS), Taxes, Series and Batch.

152
Stock
Do not show stock when launching a product
Check this option so that the product stock is not shown when the code of
even so typed on the Outputs screen. If it is not checked, the product stock will be
shown above the product field, on the sales screen.
Header Fields
In this panel, select the fields you want to display in the header of the screen, you can select
the following fields:
Operation: Select the type of transaction that will be made. Example: State Sale,
Budget, Goods Reservation, etc.
Client
Price Table
Sequence: This field is generated automatically by the system and cannot be edited.
Seller
Internal Reference: This field is used to provide a reference regarding the sale, for
facilitate the search.
Observation: Used to provide a note regarding the sale. This field may be
printed on the invoice.
Fixed Commission (Available only for Corporate versions): This field is used
to inform a commission for the sale. This commission will override the other commissions
registered in the system.
Commissioned (Available only for Corporate versions): Used to inform the
Commissioned who will receive a percentage of commission on the sale.
Seller 2 (Available only for Corporate versions): Used to inform the
code of the second seller.
Product Fields
In this frame, select the fields to be displayed for filling in when launching a
product on screen. You can select the following fields:
Total Price: This field shows the total value of the quantity of products entered. It is the value
unit multiplied by the specified quantity.
Desc. (%):Este campo é utilizado para mostrar e alterar o percentual de desconto.
Desc. ($):Este campo é utilizado para mostrar e alterar o valor de desconto.
This field is used to show and change the ICMS percentage.
This field is used to show and change the percentage of IPI.
Label: Used to register the quantity of labels to print for the entered product.
Final Price: It is used to show the final price of the product, considering the values of the fields.
mentioned above.
Product Photo: Shows the product photo as soon as selected on the sales screen.
The fields Seller, Seller 2, Price Table, Commissioned can be selected
per product. To do this, enable them here. These fields will be available only for the
Corporate versions.
Seller: It is used to locate the name of the seller, in the column next to the product.
Seller 2: It is used to locate the name of seller 2 in the column next to the product.
Price Table: Used to locate the table, used for the product.

153
 Commissioned: Used to locate the name of the commissioned person in the column next to it.
product.
Attention: The fields Seller, Seller 2, Price Table, and Commission cannot be
chosen for the two frames (Campos do CabeçalhoeCampos do Produtos)
simultaneously. Define only a frame to display them.
If you configure the sales screen to show the Seller field in the header when making sales
with different sellers, the system will fill the field with code -1. This will occur
due to having several sellers. The same will happen with the price table, if it is
set up to be displayed in the header as well. When making sales with different tables, the
the field will be empty.

Client
In this tab, you can set the following configurations for the sales screen.
Standard Client
In this field you can select a customer to set as default on the sales screen.
If you do not control the sales by customer, use customer 1 - Counter Customer, which will already go
pre-registered in the system.
Allow changing: Select this option to allow changing the default client at the time of
sale.
Credit Limit Check
Mark this option so that the system checks the credit limit at the time of sale.
approved for the client, in the registration of Client / Supplier.

Client with Overdue Accounts

This option allows the system to check if the customer has overdue accounts.
When entering the client, inform if there are any overdue accounts.
Select this option for a message to appear notifying when the customer has accounts.
in delay. A red square will appear on the left side of the field with the name of the
client.
Do not sell on credit to customers with overdue accounts
Select this option to prevent installment sales for customers who have accounts in
delay.
Do not sell for cash or on credit to customers with overdue accounts (Available only
for the Corporate versions)
Select this option to prevent sales to customers with overdue accounts.
Deadline after due date (in days) to be considered overdue (Available only for
as Corporate versions)
In this field, provide the grace period in days from the due date for the system
consider that the bill is overdue.
Allow viewing overdue accounts (Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows the employee to view the customer's accounts through the sales screen.
that are overdue.

Prices / Discounts
In this tab, define the settings that will be accepted for prices and discounts on the screen of
outputs.

154
 Prices
In this panel, you can set the permissions for the price tables for the Sales screen.
Standard Price Table: In this field you can select a table to set as default.
on the sales screen. Use it if you are with the layoutMercado, mandatorily.
Allow price table changes: Check this option to allow the price table to be changed.
of standard prices, on the sales screen.
Allow changes to the table with already entered products: Check this option to allow changes to the
table, after the launch of some products in the lineup, without changing the prices of the existing products
released. Select this option if you use different tables for the same sale.
When changing the table, recalculate the values (lose discounts): Check this option so that the
system recalculates the prices of the products if the price list is changed. With that, the discounts
data in the products, at the time of sale, will be deleted. This option cannot be used,
if you use more than one price table in the same sale.
Show cost price tables: With this option checked, the cost table will be displayed.
on the sales screen, and it will be possible to make transactions with it.
Show average cost price table: With this option checked, the table will be shown.
average cost, on the sales screen, and it will be possible to make transactions with it.
Allow unit price change: Check this option to allow the price to be changed.
unit price of the product at the time of sale.
Do not allow moving products with a price of 0: Check this option to block
the sale of products at zero price.
Allows using Ctrl A while in the Qty field to increase the unit price (Available
only for Corporate versions): To select this configuration, the option Allows
changing unit price must be unchecked. When pressing Ctrl + A at the time of sale,
It will be possible to change the unit price of the product. This option only allows changing the price if
enter a value greater than what is in the selected table.
Discount
In this section, configure the discount that can be provided on the sales screen.
Attention: In sales, the system will consider the lowest discount percentage registered among the
maximum discount options by product, employee, price table, and output screen.
Maximum Discount Products (in %): Enter the maximum discount, in percentage, that will be
allowed to provide in the sale of products.
Maximum Discount Services (in %): Enter the maximum discount, in percentage, that will be
allowed to provide in service sales.
Consider the limit of the discount: Use this to configure what the maximum discount should be.
considered among the employees. The sale can involve two employees: the logged-in user
In the system, the seller is informed.

Receipt
In this tab, define the types of payments that will be accepted on the output screen.

Possible Types of Receivables

In this section, configure the payment methods that will be accepted on the Payment screen.
The types of receipts are:
Voucher: Allows receipt with meal, food, or other vouchers.
Client Account: Allows receipt in the account that the client has with the company, where not
There will be a date for receiving the bill. (Notebook account)

155
 Installment: Allows you to split the sale amount into installments.

Checks: Allows receipt by checks.

Credit Card: Allows receiving payments by credit card.
Maximum number of installments: Please specify the maximum number of installments you will accept with the
Credit Card.
Debit Card: Allows receiving payments via debit card.
Bank Account (Available only in Corporate versions): Accepts direct receipt
as a bank account deposit. Example: The sale is recorded, when checking the
extracts.
Previous Client Credit (Available only in Corporate versions): Allows you to make the
payment with the credit that the customer has with the company, directly through the sales screen.
Attention: In sales, the system will consider the smallest number of installments registered among
the price table settings and output screen.
Option
Allows you to save payment methods for later receipt
Check this option to allow the payment method to be saved and its execution.
carried out later, through the Miscellaneous Receipt screen.
Example: The seller makes a sale and records the payment method, so that the cashier
complete the receipt.
Checks
In this table, define the deadlines, days, and intervals for receiving payments by checks.
Maximum number of checks: In this field, specify the maximum number of checks that will be
acceptances.
Maximum period in days: In this field, enter the maximum amount, in days, for the checks.
installments, considering the total amount of the installments.
Type of interval: In this field, choose the type of interval that will be accepted for checks.
parcelled.
You can choose between:
• Day(s): By selecting this option, you will need to inform the number of days between the checks.
The installments will be every 15 days, 30 days, 45 days.
• Month(s): By selecting this option, you will need to provide the number of months between the checks.
The due dates of the checks will be set for fixed days of each month. Example: The
installments will be every 1 month, 2 months, 3 months.
• Standard deadline: Please specify the maximum interval that will be used for the division of installments.
If the Type of Interval is in Day(s), inform how many days until the next check.
If the type of interval is in Month(s), please inform how many months will be the next ones.
checks.
Allows changing the default range: Check this option to allow the Range type
the standard should be changed at the time of sale.

Installment
In this table, define the deadlines, days, and intervals for making payments in installments.
Maximum number of installments: Specify the maximum number of installments that will be accepted.
Maximum deadline in days: Enter the maximum amount in days for the installments, considering
the total amount of the installments.
Interval type: Choose the type of interval that will be accepted for the installments.

156
 You can choose between:
• Day(s): By selecting this option, please specify the number of days between installments.
• Month(s): By selecting this option, you will need to specify the number of months between the installments.
The due dates for the installments will be set for fixed days each month.
Standard deadline: Enter the maximum interval that will be used for the division of the installments.
If the Interval Type is in Day(s), inform how many days until the next installment.
If the interval type is in month(s), inform how many months the next installments will be.
Allow changing the default interval: Check this option to allow the interval type
the standard should be changed when receiving the sale.
Type of installment: In this field, select the type of installment that will be standard for
generate a installment. The standard type should be the most used by the company.
Os Tipos são:Banco / Boleto, CarnêeCarteira.
Allow changing: Select this option to allow the default installment type to be
changed when processing the sale receipt.
Do not allow change for a different payment method
of money
(Available only in Corporate versions)
Check this option to not provide change for other forms of payment such as: card,
check, voucher, etc. If this option is selected, receive only the exact amount of the sale.
Select this option when it is set to allow a higher receipt.
Ask if they want to turn the change into credit.
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option to allow generating credit for the customer, with the value of the change.

Upon entering the screen

This tab allows you to configure to display the Input Screen with the fields that will be
requested, when entering the Exit screen. This will allow the Exit screen to be cleaner and
não seja necessário informar sempre os mesmos dados, como Cliente e Vendedor.
With this option checked, when entering the sales screen, the provided data will no longer be
requested. Therefore, the fields chosen here should not be marked to appear in the
output screen.
If you have configured the sales screen with the layoutMarket.
Use 'Input Screen'
Check this option to enable the login screen when entering the sales screen.
Fields to be required on the Login Screen
In this section, select the fields to be filled in on the Entry Screen.
The fields that may be required on this screen are: Client, Seller, and Seller Password.

Exchanges
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This tab allows for simplified exchange, automatically generating the operation of
Return, on the Incoming screen.

157
 Allows Simplified Exchange
Check this option to allow merchandise exchanges through the sales screen.
Simplified Exchange Configuration
Define in this table the options that will be allowed to exchange the merchandise.
Allow to enter products and prices: Check this option to allow the employee
report the product that is being returned and change the price.
Allow finding previous sale: Mark this option to enable the employee
find the previous sale to exchange the goods.
Allow changing the price: Check this option to allow the employee to change the price of
returned product.
Operation code for the entry to be created
When carrying out the product exchange operation, the item will return to stock through a
entry movement, automatically generated by the system.
In this field, inform the return operation that will be created on the Entries screen, to
confirm the exchange of the merchandise.

Chart of accounts for the exchange

In this field, select the chart of accounts related to merchandise returns.

Import Products
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab, configure the permissions to import products from other outgoing operations. This
the function is used to group several sales and issue an invoice and is also
interesting for companies that make many sales with the same items.
It is possible to enable one of the following options: Does not allow import, Allows import
products from other operations, only from this branch or allows importing products from
other operations, from any branch.
Prices
Use the price and table of the original operation: Check this option to import the products.
with the price informed in the original operation.
Use the price and table of the current screen: Check this option to use the price and table that
is selected on the sales screen when importing products from other operations.
Sellers
Use the sellers from the original operation: Check this option to import the(s)
vendor(s) informed in the original transaction.
Use the current screen vendors: Check this option to use the vendor that is present.
selected on the sales screen, when importing products from other operations.
Discounts
Zero discounts: Check this option to eliminate the provided discounts in other operations.
or when importing.
Customer discount / current product: Check this option so that, at the time of importation
of the products, the current discount indicated in the customer registration should be considered and
products.

158
 Discount from the original sale, overlapping the operator, seller, and current table limits:
Check this option to import the discounts reported in the original operation, regardless.
of the registered limits for operator, seller, and table used for import.
Original discount, limited to the operator, seller, and current table: Check this option to
that, at the time of importing the products, the original discounts are taken into account, but
do not consider the maximum discounts registered for the operator, seller, and table
current, before the confirmation.

Impressions
In this tab, select the options for printing the ticket and invoice.
Automatic ticket printing upon saving
In this section, you can configure the system to print the ticket when saving the sale.
Print: Check this option to allow the ticket to be printed automatically when
record a sale.
Choose the layout: Select this option to define at the time of printing which layout
which will be used. All configured layouts in the system will be listed.
This layout: Check this option to define the layout that will be used for printing the ticket.
Automatic ticket printing after receiving
In this panel you can configure for the system to print the ticket automatically only
after confirming the receipt of the sale.
Select one of the options (Print, Choose the layout, and This layout) as explained in
previous item.

Freight
In this tab, define the options that will be used for shipping.
A carrier must be chosen before finalizing
Mark this option to make it mandatory to fill in the Carrier field beforehand.
to complete the sale.
The freight must be paid by
In this field, define the payment method for the freight. Choose from the following options:
Get customer registration information: Select this option for the system to verify
as the freight was informed in the registeredClient / Supplier, in the Additional tab (Ctrl+F3).
Always by the company: Select this option when the freight payment is always.
performed by your company.
Always by the customer: Select this option when the freight payment is always paid by the customer.
client.
Decided by the operator: Select this option to allow the seller to choose how
the freight payment will be made.

Packing list
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab, define the settings for the shipment manifest.

159
Cargo manifest
In this section, select one of the options to use the load manifest. Available options:
Does not allow, Allows or Obligates.

Existing delivery note in

In this section, choose which operations will be allowed to provide the loading manifest.
Sales only: Select this option to allow entering the invoice number only.
for sales operations.
All operations: Select this option to allow entering the waybill number for
all exit operations.
When showing to inform the shipment list
In this panel, you can set the number of days you wish to view the information from.
delivery note, in the field Show the identifications in the last days.

160
How to Make a Sale
In this chapter, we will explain how to use the Outputs screen with all the available options.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Exit menu and choose an exit screen of your preference.
Prerequisites
To make the sales, the following registrations will be necessary: Customer Registration, Price Table
Prices, Employees, Products, and Credit Card (if payment is made with a card).
Para iniciar uma venda, preencha os campos conforme o layout selecionado no botão
Configure (Alt+C). The fields to be filled in the header are: Operation, Client,
Vendedor, Vendedor 2, Ref. Interna, Comissão Fixa e Comissionado.
Operation
In this field, select the desired operation to carry out the product movement. You will be able to
create new exit operations in the Settings module in the Operations Types menu.
The system already has some registered operations.
Attention: To change the operation after the recorded sale, press Alt+O or click on the icon
, at the bottom of the screen.

Client
In this field, locate a registered customer in the system.
Register a new client through the Exit screen
You can register a new client directly from the Sales screen. To do this, press
Alt+Lou click on the icon at the bottom of the screen, in the option Register new Client (Alt+L).

Verify the Customer's Photo

You can view the client's photo on the Outputs screen, for that press Alt+F or click on
icon, at the bottom of the screen, in the Customer Photo option (Alt+F).

Customer Information
You can check the client's financial information. To do this, press Shift+F11 or click on
icon, at the bottom of the screen, in the Customer Information option (Shift+F11). It will be displayed
sales information, entries, installment payments, checks, cards, and others.
Clients with Overdue Account
If the customer has overdue accounts, a square will be shown at the time of sale.
red on the left side of the Client field.
To view the information about the overdue account, double-click on the square.
The following information will be shown:
Type: Shows the type of account that is pending. E.g., checks, accounts receivable, etc.
Description: Shows the sales sequence number and the installment number.
Valor:Mostra o valor da parcela.
Due date: Shows the due date of the installment.
Delay: Shows how many days the installment is overdue.

161
 Customers with Reserved Products
If the customer has reserved products, at the time of sale, a square will be displayed.
blue on the right side of the client field.
To view the information about the reservation, double-click on the square. There will be
the following information is shown.
Sequence: Shows the code of the generated sequence for the reservation.
Show the date when the reservation was made.
Code: Shows the code of the reserved product.
Nome:Mostra o nome do produto reservado.
Qtde:Mostra a quantidade do produto reservado.
Unit Price: Shows the original unit price of the product.
Final Price: Shows the product price multiplied by the quantity.
Size: Shows the size of the product, in case it is a product with a size chart.
Color: Shows the color of the product, if it is a product with size options.

Clients with Product Orders

If the customer has orders for products, it will be displayed next to it at the time of sale.
The peasant's right of the customer a green square, informing that there is an order.
To verify the order, double click on the square which will open a screen with the
information about it. This screen will show the following information: Code,
Nome, Qtde, Data da Encomenda, Data do Pedido, Situação, Observação e, no caso de
products Grade, Size and Color.
Delivery Address
At the time of sale, the employee can inform which address the customer wants.
make the delivery. Press Alt+E or click the icon at the bottom of the screen, to choose the
Delivery Address (Alt+E), the system will show the addresses that are in the registration of
client.
Use
In this field, select which address will be used for the delivery of the product.
Billing address: Shows the address that was provided in the Customer registration
For the cadastral providers.
Billing address: Shows the address that was provided in the Client registration/
Supplier, in the Additional 2 tab in Billing Information.
Delivery address: Shows the address that was provided in the customer registration/
Supplier, in the Additional 2 tab in Delivery Address.
Another address: By selecting this option, you can inform a new delivery address.
as requested by the client.
The following information will be displayed on the screen: Address, Additional Information, Neighborhood, City,
State, ZIP code. The delivery address will be used for printing the dispatch sheet. If
if you have not specified an address on this screen, the system will use the registered address in
Additional 2, Delivery Address. If there is no registered address in this tab, the
the system will consider the main address listed in the Register tab.

General Sequence
The sequence is generated automatically by the system. The screen movements of outputs
They can be located by this number, thus facilitating the search.

162
 These numbers will be used as a reference in reports involving an output.
To locate an output sequence:
• Double-click on the field General sequence;
• A box will open to type the desired sequence number;
• Click OK to open the Output.

Product
Specify the product and the quantity to be sold. The fields Price, Total Price, Discount %,
Desc.$, ICMS, IPI and Final Price will be filled in automatically, as informed in
product registration, but can be changed at the time of sale, depending on the
chosen screen configuration.
- Edit product/service line when in the field
code
To edit/change the line of a product or service, press the equal sign (=) when the
the cursor is in the Product field. Then a screen will appear to inform which line
should be changed.
Product Sales with Series (Alt+S)
Press Alt+Sou or click the icon at the bottom of the screen, in the option NotLaunchedProducts
active product series (Alt+S). This option allows you to launch several series of the product from a
only once.
It will open the Series screen, this screen will have the following information:
• It will show the code and the name of the product;
• Quantity to report shows the amount of product that needs to be reported;
• Informed quantity shows the number of product series that have already been released.
To add series:
• Provide the product series, or press Down Arrow to locate them, according to the quantity.
informed;
• Press F2 to confirm and return to the sales screen.
To remove a series:
• Select the series you want to remove;
• Click the button Remove Selected;
• Press F2 to confirm and return to the sales screen.
Attention: When using Alt+S to inform the product series during printing
The invoice or ticket will only print the first series issued.
The Sales Report - Series can be sent along with the invoice for later verification.
the sold series.
To open this report:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Reports menu, in the Sales / Analysis option and select Sales - Series.
Attention: In the Corporate Plus version, the serial and lot numbers can be provided.
subsequently, on the Dispatch screen. To access this screen, in the Exits menu, of the module
Movement, click on Expedition - Release of Series and Lots.
Change the price of the line that is being typed
This function allows the employee to change the price of the product that is being launched.

163
 Release this Sale
This function can be used by a manager to release the employee who is doing the
sell, all the functions that are not allowed for him, in the Employee registration. With
This will allow him to offer greater discounts, change prices, and release payment methods.
Attention: The functions Change the price of the line being typed and Release this sale
must be released on the employee registration screen.
Import Products from Another Operation (Alt+I)
(Available only for Corporate versions)
Press Alt+I or click on the icon at the bottom of the screen. This option allows importing
products from other operations.
To import products:
• Press Alt+I;
• It will open the Exit Search screen;
• On this screen, you can search by the following fields: Date, Client, Invoice, Reference
Internal, Operation, Type of Operation and Sequence.
• Show only not completed (F6): Check this option to show only the not completed exits.
effected.
Search (F2)
Click this button or press F2 at the bottom of the screen to show the search results.
Search Result
The system will open the Import Products screen, where the search results will appear.
In this table, the following options will be shown: Sequence, Operation, Date, Internal Ref.
Observation and Total.
The following information about the selected line will appear in the frame.
Details
This tab will show the operation used and the name of the client.
Products
In this tab, you can check all the product data in the found operation.
Services
In this tab, you can check all the service data performed in the found operation.
Import Products (F2)
Click this button to complete the import of products from the selected exit.
Launch Components of Composite Products
If you use the Industry module, this option allows you to register the raw materials in the grid.
composite products.
To launch the components of the composite product:
• Click on the icon at the bottom of the screen;
• Select the Exit option and click on Launch Components of Composite Products;
• It will open the Product Search screen. For more information, refer to the chapter Screen of
Product Search;
• Double-click on the desired product;
• It will open a screen to enter the quantity of the composite products being sold and
click OK to confirm;
• The system will release all the raw materials of the composition in the product list.

164
Services (F6)
To make service sales press F6, or click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, to open
the Services screen. On this screen, provide the services that will be performed for the client, at
moment of sale.
If you are viewing a completed output, the F6 button will show the recorded services.
Attention: Services must be recorded before confirming the receipt of the sale.
On the services screen, provide the following information:
Code: In this field, enter the code or search for the service by name.
Name: The name of the service will appear in the field next to it. Depending on the configuration, in
service registration, the name can be changed.
Quantity: In this field, inform the quantity of the service.
Unit Price: In this field, the price of the service will be displayed. Depending on the configuration,
In the services registration, it can be changed.
Preço Total:Este campo mostra o valor da quantidade multiplicado pelo preço do serviço
chosen.
Desc.%: Enter the percentage of discount that will be provided for this service.
Desc.$:Please specify the amount of discount that will be provided for this service.
Attention: When filling in one of the fields, percentage or discount amount, the system will calculate
and automatically fill in the other field.
Final Price: This field shows the final price, considering the provided discounts.
Technician 1: Locate the technician who will perform the service.
Technician 2: Locate technician 2, if the service is performed by more than one technician.
Completed: Select this field if the service has already been performed.
OK: Click this button or press Enter to launch the service on the grid.
F6 - Delete Line: Press F6 to delete an entered service.
To delete / cancel a service:
• Press F6;
• A screen will open to inform the line you wish to delete or zero (0) to delete all;
• Click the OK button.
F2 - Returns
Press F2 to confirm the services and return to the output screen.
Import Services (Alt+F6)
Press Alt+F6 or click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, in the Services option in Import
Service Order Alt+F6. This option allows importing Service Orders. For more information
for information, see the chapter Import Services.

Notes (Alt+B)
On this screen, you can type up to eight (8) observations to be printed on the invoice/ticket.
These observations will be recorded automatically and can be accessed and reprinted.
You can access this screen by pressing Alt+B or clicking on the icon. , at the bottom of the screen, in
optionOutputs.

165
Discounts (Alt+D)
To provide discounts at the time of sale, press Alt + double click on the icon. , no
footer of the screen. On the screen, Discounts will show the following data:

Discounts Already Provided

This table shows the total discounts already provided for products and services in
percentage and in value. The discounts informed in the customer registration will be considered.
Supplier, Product and those already informed in the product line.
Totals (Products without IPI)
This chart shows the totals of service and product sales without including the IPI.

Discount on Products
In this section, indicate the discount you wish to provide for the products. You may provide
discounts in percentage (%) or in value (R$).
• Percentage discount
In the sale, the final price of the product and the discount value will appear with two decimal places.
for the purpose of receiving and printing the invoice and ticket.
Consider the following rounding rules:
When choosing a discount percentage that generates a discount value with three or more digits
Decimals, the system will adjust the percentage of the discount.
The example, with the parameters below, shows this calculation:
Product value: R$ 2.50
% de desconto: 1,5%
Valor do desconto: R$ 0,0375
The system will adjust the percentage to 1.6% so that the discount amount is R$ 0.04.
the percentage and the value were adjusted upwards because the number in the third decimal place is
greater than 5) and consequently the final price will have two decimal places (in this case, at
value of R$ 2.46.
For the same example, if a discount percentage of 1.75% is chosen, the amount of
the discount would be R$ 0.04375. The system will also adjust the percentage to 1.6% with the
purpose of rounding the final value (the percentage and the amount were adjusted downwards because
the number of the third decimal place is less than five.
When displaying a discount percentage on the discount screen, the system will perform these
roundings in each product line. This may generate a small difference between the
final value in Shop Control and the final value calculated for validation. This
the difference, as explained, is shown in the adjustment of the percentage and subsequently through
of a message when confirming the discount.
• Discount in amount
The discount displayed on the sales screen will be divided among the products. In the case that the amount is not
divisible, the system will apply the discount to one or more products. If the discount is of
R$0.01 (one cent) will be launched on the product with the highest value.
When entering the discount in value, the system will find the equivalent percentage of the value.
typed and this will be filled in automatically.
Example:
Sale value: R$ 2.46
Discount amount: R$ 0.06
The percentage of the discount that will be calculated automatically is 2.4390%.

166
 Discount on Services
In this section, inform the discount you wish to provide for the services. You may provide
discounts in percentage (%) or in value (R$). Consider the rounding rules
explained for products.
Release Discount (F1)
By pressing F1 on this screen, the employee who is registered with a discount percentage
superior, will allow the employee who is making the sale to provide a discount
greater. For this, the option 'Can release' must be set in the Employee registration.
discounts on sales from other sellers, and set the maximum percentage that he will be able to
to free.
To release the discount to the seller:
• On the discounts screen press F1;
• The option to Release Discount Limit will appear at the bottom of the screen;
• The employee who is granting the discount must enter their code and password;
• In the Discount field, he must indicate the percentage of discount he is authorizing for
this sale;
• Then click the button , to confirm.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel the discount released to the employee.

Totals (Alt+T)
Press Alt+Touch and click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, to check the totals, such as: Totals
of Products, Taxes, Discounts, Services, Net Weight, Gross Weight, Quantity of Pieces,
Information about Freight and Carrier.
To inform the freight:
• Click on the Freight Search button;
• Check which carrier will handle the shipping and double click on the line;
• The fields Freight and Carrier will be filled with the selected information.
On this screen, you can also change the totals by pressing F10. It is possible to change the Total Amount.
de produtos, Desc. Produtos, Base ICMS, Valor ICMS, Base ICMS subst., Valor ICMS subst.,
Base IPI, Valor IPI, Serviços, Valor ISS e o Total da venda.
Attention: The system calculates the IPI for each product and the total IPI shown will be the
sum of these. In this case, there may be a difference in the value of IPI when comparing the total
presented on the screen, with a calculation done directly on the sale value.
Example: When selling two products with IPI of 10%, one with the price of R$
104.99 and the other one is R$ 16.19, the total sale will be R$ 121.18. The system will show it as IPI
the amount of R$ 12.12, the sum of R$ 10.50 (rounded IPI of the first item) and R$ 1.62 (IPI
rounded of the second item). When calculating 10% of the total sale, your result will be
R$ 12.11

View Total in Other Tables Alt+P

(Available only for Corporate versions)
Press Alt+P or click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, to check the total sales in
other tables. On this screen, it is possible to verify the total of the installment, if the plan is configured
of payment on the screenConfigure Table, in the moduleRegistration in the Prices menu.

167
Save Payment Methods (Shift+F3)
You can record the payment methods of the sale to later process the receipt.
the use of this screen will be the same as the Receipt screen as explained above. To save the
payment method, click or press Shift+F3 or click on the icon at the bottom of the screen,
to record the payment method. The confirmation of receipt can be done through the screen of
Outputs, after locating it, or through the Single Receipt screen.
Print Note (Shift+F4)
To print invoices, through the system, press Shift+F4 or click on the icon. , no footer
of the screen.

On the Output Operations screen, you can configure the function that will be used for printing.
of the invoice.
Attention: The invoice layout must be configured in the Settings module.
For more information, consult the manual available on the Shop Control 8 CD.
Print Ticket (F4)
To print the sales ticket, press F4 or click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen.
On the Outgoing Operations screen, you can configure the function that will be used for printing.
of the ticket.
Attention: The ticket layout must be configured in the Settings module. For more details
for information refer to the manual available on the Shop Control 8 CD.

Laser Voucher
(Available for Corporate versions)
To print a ticket on a laser printer, click on the icon at the bottom of the screen, in the option
Laser Ticket.
Ticket
To print the pre-printed ticket, click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, in the option Boleto.

Attention: The boleto layout must be configured in the Settings module. For more
For information, please consult the manual available on the Shop Control 8 CD.

Receipt
To print the payment slip, click on the icon. , no rodapé da tela, na opçãoCarnê.
Attention: The booklet layout must be configured in the Settings module. For more details
for information, consult the manual available on the Shop Control 8 CD.

Invoice
To print the invoice, click on the icon at the bottom of the screen, in the Invoice option. The layout of the
invoice is already pre-configured in the system.

Print Checks
To print the check, click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, in the Print Checks option.
Sheet for Dispatch
To print the dispatch sheet, click on the icon. at the bottom of the screen, in the option Sheet for
Office.

168
Send by email
Outgoing operations can be sent by email to the client. Follow the steps below,
for sending the email:
First Step
Configure the email server data used by the company.
• Select moduleSettings;
• No menu-email in Email Server Configuration. For more information consult
the corresponding chapter.
Second Step
Configure the email layout to send to clients.
• Enter the moduleSettings;
• No menu email, email layout configuration. For more information, consult the
corresponding chapter.
Third Step
Send the output by email.
• Localize the output you want to send by email;
• Click on the email icon , at the bottom of the screen.
• The screen will openSend by email, where you can select the following data:
Email layout
In this field, select the configured email layout, as explained in step 2.
Configuration for sending
In this field, select the email server configuration that will be used for sending,
as explained in step 1.
Send: Click this button to send the email to the client.
Esc - Cancel: Press Esc to cancel the submission.
To: This field is automatically filled with the email provided in the registration.
client. If you wish to send the email to more than one contact, use a semicolon (;)
comma (,)

Search Exits (F11)

This screen allows you to find sales through the F11 button or by clicking on the magnifying glass icon.
bottom of the screen.
With it, you will be able to search for sales and other transactions using the following filters:

General
In this tab, provide the data that will be used to search for transactions. Fields
available for search: Date, Client, Internal Reference, Invoice, Operation, Type of
Operation and Sequence.
Show only non-closed: Check this option to search only for the sales that
they still haven't had the stock and/or financials finalized.

Value
In this tab you can find sales by value. You will have the following search options: All
The option is pre-checked, it will show transactions with any value. Select
one of the options below to use the filter by value.
Equal: It will only show the transactions that have the value equal to what was entered.

169
 Will only show transactions that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will only show the movements that have a value less than the one typed.
Search (F2)
Click this button for the system to search the movements with the data.
A screen will appear with all the found transactions. To open the transaction
desired click on the line, or find it with the arrow keys on the keyboard.
To hide or show the search screen click on the icon , at the bottom of the screen, or press
Alt+F11. Essa tela permanecerá disponível no rodapé, através do ícone.
To make a new inquiry, press F11 again.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen and make a new entry.
Cancel (Esc)
Click this button to cancel leaving the receiving screen.

Shipping Information (Alt+R)

To report the shipping list, click on the icon. at the bottom of the screen, in the Exit option and in
Shipping Information (Alt+R). You can manage the shipments through the Shipping report
of Load. To open this report, go to the Movement module, in the Report menu, in
Stock / Analysis optionLoad Manifest.

Shift+F7 - Open Reserve

This option allows you to open a goods reservation. For more information, consult the
chapterReserve.

Turn off Output

This option allows you to delete an output that has not had any stock movement of the product and/or
financial, as it will only be erased from the Outgoing screen.
We do not recommend using this function to delete an output that generated the finance and/or
the product stock decreased, as this information will continue to appear in the reports of
sales, cash, inventory, and accounts receivable.

Deactivate Exit
This function allows you to deactivate an exit that had stock movements of the product and /
or finance. This function returns the product stock and removes the receipt from the cash register. It may
to be used to cancel the printed invoice as well. The canceled sales will appear
in the reports with the negative value.

Documents
Click this button to add documents regarding exits. For more information
consult the chapter Documents.

170
Receipt Screen
In this chapter, we will explain the receiving screen that will be used in the Sales screen.
also on the accounts receivable maintenance screens, checks, among other screens of the module
Financial.
Box
Please indicate which box will be used for receipt. This field is required.
mandatory.

Resumo (F3)
The Shop Control allows receiving in multiple forms of payment. This tab shows
the summary of the reported payment methods. The available payment methods are:
Money, Checks, Installments, Bank Account, Customer Account, Cards, Vouchers, and Credit
Client.
Tip: Clicking on the icon of each payment method will open the corresponding tab for
make the launch.
Quick Cash Receipt (F11)
Press F11 to make the full cash payment. The system will fill in
automatically the Money field, in the Money/Voucher/Account tab (F6), with the total amount of
sale.

Money / Vouchers / Account (F6)

In this tab, you can enter the amount received in cash, voucher, or enter the total amount in the account.
client.
Enter the total amount in the customer account: Check this option to enter the total sale amount
in the client's account. To receive in the client's account, you will need to enable in the registration of
Cliente / Fornecedora opçãoCliente tem conta.
Attention: The system will automatically enter the total sale amount, not allowing the use of
other forms of payment.

Installment (F7)
In this tab, you can receive payments in installments.
Report the date of the first installment.
Valor:Informe o valor total que será parcelado.
Number of Installments: Inform the number of installments that the informed amount will be divided into.

Interval: Specify the interval of the installments and select whether it will be in day(s) or month(s).
Type of Installment: Select the type of installment between: bank slip, wallet, installment book.
Launch (F12)
Click this button or press F12 to launch the installments on the board.
Turn Off Parcel
Click this button to delete the installment(s).
To pay off one or more installments;
• Clique no botãoApagar Parcela;
• A screen will appear for you to type the line you want to delete. Type the number zero (0) to
pay off all installments.

171
Cheques (F8)
In this tab, provide the data for payment with checks either in full or in installments.
Bank: Enter or locate the bank code.
Agency: Please provide the bank agency code of the check.
Cheque:Informe o número do cheque.
Report the due date of the first check.
Value: Please inform the total amount that will be paid with checks.
Name: Enter the name of the person responsible for the check, if it is from a third party.

Qtde:Informe a quantidade de parcelas que será dividido o valor informado.

Interval: Please specify the interval of the installments and select whether it will be in day(s) or month(s).

Launch (F12)
Click this button or press F12 to launch the checks on the board.
Cancel Check
Click this button to delete the check(s).
To delete one or more checks:
• Click the Delete Check button;
• A screen will appear for you to enter the line you want to delete, Enter the number zero (0), to
cancel all checks.
Table Division
On the exit screen, you can use the registered payment plan for the table to make the
receipt as installments and checks. Click the button Table Division to be divided
automatically the sale value, according to the selections made on the screenConfigure Table,
considering the percentages and the amounts of the installments.
For more information, see the chapter Configure Price Table.

Cards (F9)
In this tab, enter the payments made with debit and/or credit card.
Card: Locate the card, the name will appear next to it. The cards accepted by the company must
be previously registered in the Basics menu.
Number: Please provide the credit and/or debit card number.
Value: Please enter the total amount to be paid with this card.
Divide into: Inform the number of installments in which the informed amount will be divided.
Launch (F12)
Click this button or press F12 to launch the cards on the board.
Turn Off Card
Click this button to delete the card transaction line.
To turn off:
• Click on the button Delete Card;
• A screen will appear for you to enter the line you wish to delete. Type the number zero (0) to
turn off all the lines.

172
Credit (F10)
In this tab, report the payments made with the customer's credit, bank account, and entries.
unidentified.
Customer Credit
You can use the credit that the customer has with the company to make the outgoing payment.
the system will automatically deduct the customer's credit.
Value: Enter in this field the amount of credit that will be deducted upon exit.
Available credit: This field shows the amount of credit available to the customer.
Bank Account
You will be able to receive the sale, with the deposit made into the company's bank account, by
client.
Value: Enter the deposit amount in this field.
Payment made to this account: In this field, indicate the account where the deposit was made.
Attention: Receiving with the customer's credit, directly through the Outgoing screen, is exclusive for
the corporate versions. In the advanced version, you will be able to receive with the option
installment and then maintain the accounts receivable, using the credit.
Identified Releases
You can make the receipt with a deposit, already credited to the bank account, that is not
identified.
Select Launch: Click this button to locate open launches.
Identify Bank Transactions
On this screen, select the bank transaction related to the sale or account. You can fill in the
The following fields to locate the bank transaction: Account, Date and Amount.
Attention: To receive payments in installments, checks and cards will be considered.
settings made in the Registration module, on the Configure Price Table screen and on the screen
sales, inConfigure this Screen.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm the receipt of the sale.
Cancel (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the receipt of the sale.

173
Individual Receipt
This screen can be used by the employee responsible for receiving the sales. They can
to be located are the recorded sales, which did not have the financial defined and also those that
they had the payment method defined through Save Payment Method (Shift + F3).
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Exit menu and select the option Single Receipt.

Configure this Screen

This screen will use the receiving settings from the Exit screen.
Use screen receiving settings
In this field, choose from which Outputs screen you want to use the receiving settings.

To process the sale receipt

• Click the Update button (F6);
• Only the sales of the day that have not had confirmed receipt will be shown;
• Select the sale you wish to receive payment for;
• Click the Receive Selected Exit button (F2);
• It will open the receipt screen, which will be filled in if the seller has recorded the payment method.
payment. For more information, see the chapter Receiving Screen.

174
Sale with Future Delivery
This screen will be used to confirm the delivery of the products made in an operation of
Future Delivery Sale, carried out previously. This operation is used by companies that
they make the sale of the products, effecting the receipt, however, the delivery is made
later, in one or more instances.

Making the Sale

On the Output screen, use the operation Sale of Products with Future Delivery. This is already
pre-registered in the system. When making the sale, provide all the products and the method of
receipt. The stock will be reduced later through the Sales screen with Future Delivery
and the receipt will be completed at the time of the sale, on the Outgoing screen.
For more information, consult the chapter How to Make a Sale.

To make the delivery of the products

To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Outputs menu, on the Future Delivery Sale option.

Search
You may use the following fields to locate the customer's products for delivery:
Client, Sequence and Sales Period
Search: Click this button to list the customer's products. You will be able to check the following
dados:Produto, Nome, Edição(para produtos do tipo Edição), Saldo(quantidade de produtos
what the client is to receive), Size, Size Name, CoreColor Name (these 4
latest, only for products of Grid type)
Group: Click the button to group products with the same code that are in
different sales sequences. This way you will be able to check the total stock of the product.
With this option, the sequence column of the output will not be shown.
Update: Click this button to refresh the screen with the new sales made.
Delivering right now
In this section, you can inform about the products that the customer is picking up. For this:
• Click on the desired product line or enter the product code;
• In the field Qtde, specify the quantity of the product that is being delivered;
• Then click OK, the product will be launched in the grid.
Finish Delivery (F2)
Click this button to complete the product delivery and update the inventory.

View History
Click this button to check the delivery history of the product for the customer. With this
you can check the following options:
This column shows the date of product withdrawal.
Previous Balance: This column shows the previous balance of the product, before the withdrawal on the date.
presented.
Debit: This column shows the quantity of the product delivered to the customer.
Credit: This column shows the quantity of the product sold to the customer.
Final Balance: This column shows the amount of the product balance that the customer has to receive.

175
 Completed: This column will be checked when the quantity requested by the customer has
has been delivered.

Remove Line
Click this button to remove the product line.
To remove the product line:
• Select the line you want to remove;
• Click on the Remove Row button.

Print Receipt
Click this button to print the receipt for the delivery of the products.
A screen will open to provide the following information:
Header Text of the Receipt
You can add up to 5 (five) lines with 50 (fifty) characters each, in the header of
receipt.
Footer text of the receipt
You can add up to 2 (two) lines with 50 (fifty) characters each in the footer of
receipt.
Print Date
Select this option to print the delivery date of the products on the receipt.
Print Space for Signature
Select this option to print the space for the customer's signature on the receipt.
Record Text
Click this button to save the texts entered in the header and footer lines.
Type
In this field, select the type of receipt you wish to print. You can choose between:
Only the names of the products will be printed.
The names of the products and the colors and sizes will be printed when there is a product.
type Grade.
Print
Click this button to print the receipt. The receipt will first be printed on the screen, for
visualization.
Group
Click this button to group identical products that are in different rows. In case
belong to different sales.
Update
Click this button to update the customer's data.

176
Sales Budget
Sales budgets for clients should be made through the Outputs screen, using the
operation pre-registered as Budget. Subsequently, this operation can be located.
it is transformed into a sale.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Outputs menu;
• In the Operation field, select the Budget operation.

To Make a Budget
On the Output screen, using the Budget operation, provide the products from the budget
the client is serious. The budget can be sent by email to the client or printed out in a
ticket. The pre-registered operation as Budget must be configured not to download.
stock.

Transform Budget into Sale

If the client approves the budget, they can convert it into a sale without needing to re-enter the details.
products.
To transform the budget into sales:
• Locate the client's budget by pressing F11 or clicking on the magnifying glass icon;
• Click on the icon in Budget, in the option Transform Budget into Sale;
• You can change, delete, and add products in the sale.
• Then click Save (F2) and specify the form of receipt.
Attention: When converting the budget into a sale, with this option, the original budget will be
deleted and a new sales sequence will be generated.

Maintains Original Budget and Creates a Sale

With this routine, you will be able to transform the budget into sales, maintaining the sequence of
original budget to be used in the future.
To maintain the budget and create a sale:
• Localize the client's budget;
• Click on the icon In Budget, in the option Keeps this Budget and creates a Sale;
• You can change, delete, and add products in the product sale;
• Then click on Save (F2) and provide the method of receipt.

177
Verify / Provide Shipping Data of Sales
This screen allows you to check and report the data about the shipment of the sold products. You will be able to
control the date, the tracking number and the way it was sent.
To open this screen:
• Select the Movement module;
• Click on the menu Outputs, on the option Check / Inform Shipping Data of Sales.

Search
You will be able to locate the outputs that will be sent by the following information:
Outputs between: In this field, inform the period in which you want to locate the outputs. Next to it,
Fields will appear for you to enter the start and end date.
Sales only: Select this field to show only sales.
Search By: In this field you can select the option you wish to use to locate the data
for sending individual entries. You can locate by city, name, state, and address.

Outputs / Sales (Ctrl+F2)

This tab will list all the outputs for the selected period. You will be able to check the following
output information: Sequence, Note, Date, Type of Output, Code and Name of the Client and the
City.
The columns below will be filled in if the shipping data has been entered.
Shipping Mode: Shows the shipping mode of the products. Example: Regular mail, Sedex, among others.
others.
Shipping Date: Shows the shipping date.
Envio Número:Mostra o número do protocolo de envio.
Launch Shipping Data
Click this button to provide the shipment details of the products.
To launch the shipping data:
• Select the output you want to provide the shipping data;
• Click the Launch shipping data button (F2) or press F2;
• The Shipping Data screen will open, where you will provide the following information: Shipping Date, Mode of
Shipping and the Shipping Number.
F2 - Save: Click this button to save the submission data.
Esc: Click this button to cancel the entered data and close the screen.

Single Shipment (Ctrl+F3)

In this tab you can manually enter shipping data. Example: sending documents that
they are not tied to a sale.
Launch new shipment
Click this button to manually enter the data for submission.
For this, please provide the following information in the New Individual Shipment form: Recipient, Address,
Bairro, CEP, Cidade, UF, Conteúdo, Modo de Envio, Número de Envio e Data.
Record
Click this button to save the data entered in the box.
Cancel

178
 Click this button to cancel the new launch.
Edit selected line
Click this button to change the information for the one-time shipment.
To edit the line:
• Select the line you want to edit;
• Then click on the line you want to edit;
• In the New Ad Hoc Shipment section, change the information about the shipment;
• Click the Save button.

179
Other Exit Movement

180
Goods Reservation
(Available only for Corporate versions)
The reservation of goods for the customer must be made through the Output screen, using the operation
pre-registered as Goods Reserve.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the menu Outputs;
• In the Operation field, select the Goods Reservation operation.

To make a reservation
On the Output screen, using the operationReserve, inform the products that the customer wishes.
reserve and record. The Reservation operation must be configured to decrease the product stock.
Subsequently, you will be able to convert this reservation into a sale.

Open Reservation
This routine allows opening the merchandise reserve to make a sale. To do this, please do the
following procedure:
• Localize the merchandise reservation sequence by pressing F11 or clicking on the icon.
Forget
• Click on the icon , inOutput, in the Open Reservation option (Shift + F7) or press Shift + F7;
• In the field, change to a Sale operation;
• You can change, delete, or add products in the sale;
• Then click on Save (F2) and specify the method of receipt.
Attention: When opening the reservation, the quantity of the reserved product returns to stock, so that
can perform the sale operation.

181
Simplified Exchange
(Available only for Corporate versions)
The simplified exchange screen is used to exchange goods directly through the screen.
of outputs. This way, the system will automatically generate an entry operation, such as
Return of Goods, and you can proceed with the exit of the new products using the value of the
returned products.
For this canvas:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Output menu.
Attention: Check the Output screen settings before exchanging goods.
To check the settings press Alt+C or click the button .For adults
for information, consult the chapter Sales / Outputs.
Carry out the following procedure for the simplified exchange:
• On the Output screen, select the Sale operation in the Operation field;
• Inform the products that the customer is returning;
• Click the Save button (F2) or press F2;
• Then click the button Simplified Exchange (Ctrl+S) or press Ctrl+S;
• The Simplified Exchange screen will open, which will be explained below.

Starting the Simplified Exchange

On the Simplified Exchange screen, locate the sale of the products that the customer is returning or
enter the code of the returned products.
Find Sale (Ctrl+F3)
In this tab you can find the sale of returned products:
Search sales
Use the available search options to locate the desired output. All will be listed.
sales with the requested search, in the box on the left side of the screen.
You can locate the sale using the arrow keys or with the mouse. The will be shown
seguintes dados sobre a venda:Seqüência, Data, Cliente, Total da Saída, Financeiro OK
(This column will be marked if the finance is finalized) and Stock OK (This column
It will be marked if the inventory is confirmed.
When selecting one of the rows from the output, all will be listed in the panel on the right.
exit products. In it, check the following information: Product Code, Name of
Produto, Unidade, Quantidade Vendida, Preço Unitário, Preço Total, Desc.(%), Desc.($),
ICMS(%), IPI(%), Preço Final, Complemento, Tabela, Vendedor 1, Vendedor 2,
Commissioned, Downloaded OS (if OS was imported), Series, Batch, Type, IPI Value, Label,
Size, Color, and Fractionated.
Launch Selected
Click this button to launch the selected products in the grid for return.
To return the product on this screen:
• Select one or more lines of the products being returned by pressing Ctrl.
• Click the Launch Selected button;
• In the Returned Items frame, the selected products will be entered.
Release Items (Ctrl+F4)
Click this tab to manually register the product(s) returned by the customer.

182
 Table: In this field, select the sales table you wish to use. We advise using the
same used in the original sale.
Fri. 1: In this field, provide seller 1.
Vendor 2: In this field, provide the vendor 2.
Attention: We advise that the same seller(s) who made the sale be informed.
original, to reduce the seller's commission with the exchange of goods.
Código:Neste campo informe o código do produto devolvido.
Quantidade:Neste campo informe a quantidade do produto devolvida.
Price: This field will be automatically filled with the product price.
Total:Mostra o total do produto, considerando a quantidade informada.
Desc. (%):Neste campo digite o percentual de desconto do produto.
Desc. ($): This field shows the value of the discount, considering the informed percentage.
ICMS: This field shows the percentage of ICMS reported in the product registration.
IPI: This field shows the percentage of IPI reported in the product registration.
Final Price: Shows the final price of the product, considering discounts and taxes.
Series: In this field, enter the serial number, in the case of a series type product.
Batch: In this field, enter the batch for products of the Batch type.
Click this button to launch the product on the Returned Items board.
Returned Items
In this table, all the products that will be returned will be listed.
Change Quantity
Click this button to change the quantity of the returned product.
Change Price
Click this button to change the price of the returned product.
Remove Line
Click this button to remove a product line from the Returned Items box.
Quantity of Items

This field shows the total quantity of products being returned.

Total
This field shows the total value of the products being returned.
Cancel (Esc)
Click this button to cancel the product return and return to the Output screen.
Confirm returned products (F2)
Click this button to confirm the return of the products and return to the Outgoing screen.

Confirming Receipt
The value of the returned products will appear at the bottom of the screen as Exchange. The system will
deduct the exchange value from the total of the new sale. If the value of the products is greater than the value
from the exchange, proceed to receive the difference by pressing Receive (F3). If the amount is less
One can return the change or generate a credit for the customer. Check if these options are available.
liberadas emConfigurar essa Tela.

183
Order Release
This screen is used to manage the orders placed by customers for out-of-stock products.
out of stock. On this screen you can control the order from the request with the supplier to the
product delivery to the customer. This control can be done through the reports available on
system.
To open this screen:
• Select the module Movement;
• Click on the Orders menu, on the Orders Entry option.

Configure this Screen

On this screen, configure the permissions to place orders.
Before recording, check the stock in all branches: Select this option so that the
the stock of the ordered product should be checked in all registered branches at the time
to record the order. A screen will appear with all the branches and their respective
stocks.

Order Registration
To register an order, provide the following information: Branch, Customer, Product, Quantity,
Data Encomenda, Gravado por(mostra o código e o nome do funcionário que está gravando
the order), Supplier (Please provide the supplier that will be used to place the order
product), Order Date to Supplier and Observation.
Situation
In this field, select the order status from the following options:
Open: Select this option if the order has not been placed with the supplier.
Pending: Select this option if it has already been sent to the supplier. This option will be
selecionada automaticamente ao imprimir o relatório dePedidos por Fornecedore selecionar
the option to update the order date and status in the order registration.
Delivered: Select this option if the customer has already purchased the ordered product.
This option will be automatically selected when making a sale to the customer with the
ordered product.
Gave up: Select this option if the customer has given up on buying the product, or
order canceled.
Reserved: Check this option if you have received the product at the company and have reserved it.
for the client. This option will be selected automatically when executing the command Verifica.
stock with order.
Not available: Select this option if the supplier no longer has this product
available.
Awaiting Supplier: Select this option if you are waiting for a response from
order placed with the supplier.
Client notified: In this field, inform the date on which the client was notified about the arrival of the
product.
If this field is filled in, when printing the Customer Notification report and checking the
option to update the notification date to the customer (for customer not notified) this field will not be
updated.

184
Product Details
This tab shows the class, subclass, group, family, and the extra fields of searches created in
Product registration.
Suppliers
This tab shows the suppliers provided in the product registration.
Record (F2)
Click this button to place the order.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the order screen, to make a new entry.
Cancel (ESC)
Click this button or press ESC to cancel the search.
Finding the Order
To find the order, click the Search button F6 or press F6.
Through this screen, you can search for orders using the following filters: Branch,
Cliente, Produto, Fornecedor e Situação.
Find
Clique neste botão para fazer a pesquisa das encomendas com os dados digitados.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel the search and close the screen.
Search Result
After clicking the Find button, all orders with the filters will be displayed.
selected. The information shown in the grid will be: Branch, Client, Client Name,
Produto, Nome do Produto, Tamanho, Cor, Fornecedor, Quantidade, Data da Encomenda, Data
of the Order, Date of Notice to Customer (This field will be filled automatically when
print the Report for Customer Notice and check the option to Update the notice date to
client), Observation, Situation (This field will show the acronyms related to the situation,
as per the list below) and Recorded by.
Acronyms of Types of Situation:
A = In Open
P = Pending
E = Delivered
D = Desisted
R = Reserved
N = Not available
F = Awaiting supplier

185
Routines to Update the
Orders
In this chapter, we will explain how to use the routines available through the reports, to
monitor and update the status of the orders.
To open this screen:
• Select the Movement module;
• Click on the Orders menu, select the desired routine.

Order Distribution Report

This report allows you to check the stock of a branch and compare it with the orders.
carried out at all branches. With it, you can check if the branch being inquired about
You will be able to distribute the product stock to meet the orders made at other branches.
To print this report, fill in the following fields:
Branch where the stock to be distributed is located: In this field, enter the branch you want to check.
Show Size and Color: Check this option to add the size and color
in the reports for products with size chart.

Supplier Order Report

This report allows you to check and update the products made to the supplier.
You can choose the following fields for the query in the report:
Branch: Report the branch.
Supplier: Please provide the name of the supplier.
Situation: Select the order situation or leave it as All.
Update the order date and status in the order registration: Check this option to
update the order status to Pending and update the Order Date field when printing
the report. Only the orders that are with the situation will be updated.
Open.
Text of the order: Type in this field the text that will be printed on the report, to be sent
to the supplier.
• Print in italics: Check this option for the typed text to be printed in the font.
italic
• Record Text: Click this button to save the typed text. A file will be generated.
in text format, which can be found and opened in the printing of the next reports.
• Click this button to open the saved text file, with the message for the
supplier, for the printing of the report.
Do not include product code: Select this option to not print the product code
in the report, if the code is different from that of the supplier.
Only one supplier per sheet: Select this option to print one supplier per
sheet. For this option, it is necessary that the supplier field has been filled in on the screen.
Order Release.
Include Research: Select this option to include the Research column in the report. It will be
printed the product classification registered in the search field 1, in basic registration.
Show size and color: Select this option to print the size and color of the products
with grade.

186
Pending Orders Report
This report allows you to verify the orders that have already been placed with the supplier. They will be
list all orders that are in the status Pending.
You can choose the following fields for the report query: Branch, Product, and Date of
Order.
Skip a page after each supplier: Check this option to print one supplier on each
page.

Check Stock with Orders

This routine compares the stock of products and the orders entered in the system and checks if
There is enough stock at the chosen branch to fulfill the placed orders. Use this routine.
after having launched the purchase of the goods on the Entry screen. With this, for the products that
Once there is enough stock, the system will automatically reserve the product for the customer.
according to the orders. Only the orders that are with the
fieldStatusselectedasOpenorPendingforReserved.
To check the stock:
• In the fieldBranch, inform the branch you wish to check the inventory for;
• Then click the Check button;
• You can print the General report to check the orders.

Client Notification Report

This report allows you to check the clients who have not yet been notified that the product
Ordered is now available in the store and also update the Notification Date field, available
in the search result.
You can provide the following fields as filters to conduct the search in the report: Branch and
Supplier.
Update the notification date to the customer (for unnotified customers): Check this option to
update the column Date Notice customer when searching for an order, on the Releases screen
Order.
Attention: Only orders with the Status Reserved on the screen will be changed.
Order Launch.
Clients
In this field, select the type of customer you wish to check or update in the report. You will be able to
choose among the following types:
Not notified: Select this option to print only the customers who have not been.
notified about the order reservation.
All: Select this option to print all customers. If you select the option Update
the notification date to the customer (for unnotified customers) will only be updated for the date of the
customers who have not yet been notified.
Print price: Check this option to include product prices in the report. Next to it.
The field table will appear to select the desired price table.
Print size and color: Select this field to include the size and color data of
product in the report, for products with size chart.
Order
In this field, you can select the print order of the report. You can choose between the
ordens:Nome do Cliente e Nome do Produto.

187
General Report
In this report, you will be able to view the customers and the ordered products, making it possible to
check what situation it is in.
You can use the following fields to search in the report: Branch, Supplier, Customer.
Product and Order Status.
Order
In this field, you can select the printing order in the report. You can choose between the
orders:
Cliente - Código:Selecione esta opção para ser ordenado pelo código do cliente.
Client - Name: Select this option to be sorted by the client's name.
Product - Code: Select this option to be sorted by product code.
Product - Name: Select this option to be sorted by product name.
Print layout
In this field, select the layout you want to print from the report. The two available layouts
are
Layout without price: This layout prints the report without the prices of the products.
Layout with price: This layout prints the report with the prices of the products. When selecting
This option will display the Price Table field, to select the desired table.

188
Consignment Movement

189
Outgoing Loans
In this chapter, we will explain the process of borrowing goods. Allowing
to control and monitor the loans made to customers.

To make the loan of outputs

The loan of goods begins on the Outbound screen, using an operation of
Loan of goods. This operation decreases the stock of the product when the exit is executed, and
In the end, it will be necessary to inform the date for the loan settlement.
In the system, the operation is already pre-registered as Merchandise Loan.
for more information about the exit operations, consult the correspondent and for
Information about using the Outputs screen, refer to How to Make a Sale.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Other menu in the Loan Exit option and in Adjustment.

Configurar essa Tela

On this screen, you can configure the permissions for using the loan adjustment screen.
Types of Allowed Hits
In this section, you will be able to release access to the tabs for loan adjustments.
Detailed: Select this option to allow the employee to use the detailed option in
loan agreement screen. With this option, the products will be displayed separately, by
operation completed.
This option allows you to settle the loan by providing the details of the return and the sale.
and if you wish to take out a new loan for the products listed in a grid.
Summary: Select this option to allow the employee to use the summary option in the
loan adjustment screen. This option groups products with the same code,
borrowed in different operations, on the same line. This option allows for the adjustment.
through the grid and also launching the products via keyboard.
Prices
In this section, configure the price permissions that can be used at the time of
loan settlement.
Allows using the original loan price: Select this option to allow the adjustment
using the same price, provided at the time the loan was generated, on the screen of
Outputs.
Allows the use of price tables: Select this option to allow the selection of another table.
of prices to settle the loan, different from the one used in the Outgoing screen.
Allows changing the price in the grid: Select this option to allow the unit price
the products are manually adjusted when making the loan settlement.
Mandatory to Generate Operations
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this table, define the operations that will be mandatory when updating the loan of the
products.

190
 Sale: Select this option to make it mandatory to generate a sales operation
products reported as sold, in the loan settlement. Subsequently, it will be enough that the
Employee, locate the operation to complete the receipt and issue the invoice.
Return: Select this option to make it mandatory to generate an incoming transaction of the
products returned by the customer. This operation will appear on the Entry screen.
New Loan: Select this option to make generating a withdrawal operation mandatory.
new loan of products. This operation can be found on the output screen to
issuance of the invoice.

Loan Disbursement Adjustment

This screen is used to settle the loan(s) taken out by the client. In it, you can
inform the quantity sold, returned, or the balance that remained with the customer and if they wish to proceed
a new loan.
Upon finalizing the merchandise loan agreement, it will be possible to automatically generate a
exit operation for the sold products and/or for a new loan and an operation of
entry for returned products.

Selection
In this tab, provide the customer's information to make the loan settlement.
Client: In this field, enter the name of the client who took out the loan.
Product: In this field, locate the product or leave blank to search for all products
loaned to the customer.
In this field, indicate the sequence related to the outgoing loan, or leave it blank.
to search for all sequences.
Type of Hit
In this field, select the type of adjustment you wish to make. It contains the following options:
Detailed: Select this option to enter the client's loan adjustment data.
manually. As you proceed with the loan adjustment, the tabs will be enabled.
Grade Summary / Hit.
Summary (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this option to
use the automatic calculation for loan settlement. When proceeding with the settlement of
Loan will enable the tabs Launch in Grid, Launch Via Keyboard and Summary /
Correct.
Attention: If you use the borrowing operations for outputs with different prices, for the
same loans. By using the Summary option, the loan settlement will be at the price
used in the last loan operation of outputs.
Product Prices
In this field, you can choose to keep the table with the original prices used in
moment when the loan was generated, or if you wish to use a new table.
Price used at the time of the loan: The prices used at the time of
loans will be maintained, without considering subsequent changes to the same table.
Price of a price table: Select this option to choose a new price table
to be used for loan settlement. Next to it will appear a field to choose the table
of price.

191
 When Launching on the Schedule
This option will be enabled when selecting the option Summary in the Accuracy Type.
choose the option for automatic calculation when entering the data for the loan adjustment in
launch on the grid.
• Normal, the system calculates the balance: Select this option for the system to calculate,
automatically, the final balance of the settlement. This option allows you to report the quantity sold,
returned and/or the new loan.
• Returns and balance will be reported, the remainder is for sale: This option allows you to inform the
returned quantity and/or the customer's product balance. The difference will be shown as
quantity sold.
Selecting this option will not allow you to provide the data for a new loan.
• Sale and balance will be informed, the remainder is a refund: This option allows you to inform
the quantity sold and/or the customer's product balance, the difference will be shown as
quantidade a ser devolvida.
Show Photo (Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option to display the photo of the products in the loan agreement.
Proceed
Click this button to continue the loan settlement.

Correct
In this tab, provide the data for the loan settlement of exits, according to the selections.
chosen.
Loan Settlement Out
This screen is used to adjust the loan(s) made for the client. In it, you can...
inform the quantity sold, returned or the balance that remained with the customer, and if you wish to do
a new loan.
At the end of the merchandise loan settlement, it will be possible to automatically generate a
exit operation for the sold products, a new loan and an entry operation
for the returned products.
Launch on the Schedule
This tab will list all the products borrowed by the customer. Here you can provide the
data of the loan merchandise settlement.
The following information will be shown in the frame:
Product: This column shows the product code.
Nome:Esta coluna mostra o nome do produto.
Previous balance: This column shows the balance of the product borrowed by the customer.
New Loan: In this column, you can make a new loan of products for the customer.
It will not be allowed to make a new loan with products of the type Series, due to the series.
be unique for each product unit. For new borrowing, do it on the Exits screen. For the
Products of type Grade, Batch and/or Edition will be allowed to make a new loan, through
from this screen, for the products listed in the grid.
Vendas:Nesta coluna informe a quantidade de produtos a serem faturados.
Return: In this column, indicate the quantity being returned by the customer.
Balance: This column shows the total of all the data reported in New loan,
returns and sales.
$ Unitário:Esta coluna mostra o preço unitário do produto.
Size: This column shows the size code for products with a range.

192
 Name: Show the product size name.
Color: This column shows the color code of the product, for products with a size chart.
Name: Shows the name of the product color.
Edition: This column shows the product edition.
Series: This column shows the product series.
Lot: This column shows the product lot.
Last Loan Adjustment: This column shows the date of the client's last loan adjustment.
product.
When selecting a product, the following information will be displayed below the list:
Product: This field will display the product code and name.
Últ. Acerto:Este campo mostra a data do último acerto de empréstimo realizado para o cliente
of the selected product.
Series / Lot / Edition: This field will show the information related to the series, lot and the
editing of the selected product.
Grade: This field shows the code and the name of the size and color of the selected product.
Total Emprestado:Este campo mostra a quantidade total dos produtos emprestados.
Total Vendido:Este campo mostra a quantidade vendida.
Total Devolvido:Este campo mostra a quantidade devolvida no acertos de empréstimos.
Lançar Via Teclado
In this tab, you can settle the loan by locating the products that are listed in
grade. This tab will only be enabled when selecting in the Selection tab, in the Type field.
Right, the option is Summary.
In this tab, provide the quantity returned and/or the balance that remained with the customer. The remainder will be
considered as a sale.
To use this screen:
• In the product field, locate the product or click on its line in the grid;
• Click the Launch button to enter the loan data;
• The field LoanBalance shows the quantity of the product that has been loaned out to the
client. This information will also be in the table, in the Previous Balance column;
• In the Quantity Returned field, inform the quantity of the product that is being returned.
client
• In the fieldBalance Client, inform the quantity of product that is still loaned to the
client
• In the Sold Quantity field, the system will subtract the data entered in the Quantity fields.
Return to Client Balance, considering the remainder as sold product;
• In the Unit Price field, the unit price of the product will be displayed. The price can be changed.
depending on the configuration released on the screen;
• After entering all the data, click the OK button to submit it in the grid.
Transform unreported into sold:
Click this button to mark the total balance of products that do not have as sold.
information about the amount returned or balance with the customer.

Summary / Settlement
In this tab, check the provided data and the date for the new agreement. In this screen, you will also be able to
create sales operations for loaned products, for a new loan and/or entry of
returned products.

193
 Summary
This table shows the quantities and totals of the products changed in the loan adjustment.
Changed Items: This field shows the quantity of items, that is, the lines changed in the adjustment.
of loan.
Quantity of New Loans: This field shows the total amount of products that were
submitted to a new loan.
Qtde Devoluções:Este campo mostra a quantidade total de produtos devolvidos pelo cliente.
Qtde Vendas:Este campo mostra a quantidade total de produtos vendidos para o cliente.
New Loan Amount: This field shows the total value of the new loan.
products.
Valor Devoluções:Este campo mostra o valor total dos produtos devolvidos.
Valor Vendas:Este campo mostra o valor total dos produtos vendidos.
Settlement Date
In this box, fill in the date for a new loan adjustment.
In this field, provide the new date for the loan adjustment.
Only changed: Select this option to change the settlement date only for the
products that were changed.
Schedule in my Appointments (Available only for Corporate versions):
Select this option to have it scheduled on the employee's Appointments screen, the date of
loan agreement.
In the Update Loan frame
In this section, you can create entry and exit operations for the products with the provided data.
in the loan settlement. Below we will explain how to generate these operations.
• Create Operation for Selling Borrowed Products - Exits
In this panel, you can create an exit operation with the sold products, informed in the
loan adjustment. This option allows you to generate the operation automatically on the Outflows screen.
Create: Select this field to create a sales operation for the borrowed products.
Operation: Select in this field the outbound operation corresponding to the sale of products
borrowed.
In the system, the operation is pre-registered under the name Sale of Loaned Products. For
For more information about exit operations, please refer to the corresponding chapter.
Stock: This field will be marked when the selected operation is configured.
to reduce the stock of the product. Use an operation Sale of Loaned Products that
do not decrease the stock, as this will be deducted when updating the loan. And that it is configured
to put money in the cash register.
Sequence: In this field, the sequence number of the output created will be shown. On the screen of
Local exit to proceed with the loan disbursement and for the issuance of the invoice.
• Create Return - Entry
In this panel, you can create an Entry operation with the returned products, as informed.
in loan settlement. This option allows you to automatically generate the return operation.
on the screenEntries.
Create: Select this field to create a return operation.
Operation: Select in this field the corresponding input operation for the return of the
borrowed products.

194
 In the system, an entry operation must be created regarding the return of products.
borrowed, that does not increase the product stock. For information on how to create a
entry operation, see the chapter Entry Operations.
Sequence: This field will display the sequence number of the entry created. On the screen of
Localize it to issue the invoice.
• Create New Loan Operation (Adjustment Outputs) - Output
In this panel, you can create an exit operation with the products stated as new
loan. This option allows you to locate loans through the output screen and also issue
invoice.
Create: Select this field to create an outgoing operation for the new loan.
Operation: Select in this field the corresponding output operation for the loan of
merchandise (inventory already decreased). The operation is already pre-registered in the system under the name
Loan (stock already depleted). For more information about the exit operations
consult the corresponding chapter.
Estoque:Neste campo aparecerá marcado quando a operação selecionada estiver configurada
to decrease the product stock. Use a Merchandise Loan operation that does not
decrease the stock, as it will be reduced as soon as the loan is updated.
Sequence: This field will show the sequence number of the output created, for the new
loan. On the Exit screen, locate it to issue the invoice.
Price table to be used in operations
In this field, select the price table that will be displayed on the Exit / Entry screen when
generate an operation for filling the fieldTable. The prices will be considered
used in the loan approval grid.
Update loan
Click the Update Loan button to finalize the settlement and thus update the stock of
products.
Start again
Click this button to start a new loan settlement.

195
Loan of Inputs
In this chapter, we will explain the process of borrowing merchandise entries.
consigned. Allowing to control and monitor the loans made by the suppliers.

To apply for a loan for expenses

The loan of goods begins on the Entry screen, using an operation of
Loan Receipt. This operation increases the product stock, upon effecting the
entry, and in the end, it will be necessary to inform the date for the loan settlement.
In the system, the operation is already pre-registered with the name Loan Receipt.
for more information about the entry operations, refer to the corresponding chapter for
For information about using the Entries screen, see the chapter How to Do It.
Entrance.
To open this screen:
• Select the option Movement;
• Click on the Other menu in the Loan Entries option in Settlement.

Set up this screen

On this screen, you can configure the permissions for the use of the loan adjustment screen.

Allowed Types of Correction

In this module, you will be able to enable access to the tabs for the loan adjustment.
Detailed: Select this option to allow the employee to use the detailed option in the
loan adjustment screen. With this option, products will be displayed separately by
operation completed.
This option also allows for the loan settlement by providing the return details.
enter and if you wish to take a new loan on the products listed in a grid.
Summary: Select this option to allow the employee to use the summarized option on the screen.
of loan settlement. This option groups the products with the same code that have been borrowed.
in different operations on the same line. This option also allows for adjustments through the
grade and launch the products via keyboard.

As for price tables

In this box, set the price permissions that can be used at the time of
loan agreement.
Allow using the current loan price: Select this option to allow the
settlement using the same price stated at the time the loan was generated, in the
inputSheet.
Allows using price tables: Select this option to enable the selection of another table.
prices, to make the adjustment of the loan, different from the one used on the entry screen.
Allow to change the price in the grid: Select this option to allow the unit price of the
products should be manually changed when making the loan adjustment.
Mandatory to Generate Operations
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this framework, define the operations that will be mandatory at the time of the update.
loan of products.
Purchase: Select this option to make generating a purchase operation mandatory.
products reported as purchased in the loan settlement. Subsequently, it will be enough that the
employee locate the operation to process the payment and issue the invoice.

196
 Return: Select this option to make it mandatory to generate an outgoing operation of
returned products to the Supplier. This operation will appear on the Exits screen.
New Loan: Select this option to make it mandatory to generate an operation of
entry of new product loan. This operation can be found on the screen of
entry for issuing the invoice.

Loan Adjustment of Inputs

This screen will be used to settle the loan(s) made with the supplier. In it
Inform the amount that will be returned, the balance that remained with the company, and if you wish to make
a new loan.
Upon finalizing the merchandise loan settlement, it will be possible to generate, automatically, a
entry operation for the new loan, a return operation of merchandise for the
supplier on the output screen and/or a purchase operation for the purchased products.
Selection
On this tab, provide the supplier's information to settle the loan.
Fornecedor:Neste campo informe o nome do fornecedor do empréstimo.
Product: In this field, locate the product or leave zero (0) to search for all products.
borrowed from the supplier.
Produtos com vendas (Disponível somente para as versões Corporate):Selecione esta
option to show the borrowed products that had sales.
Seq.: In this field, enter the sequence related to the loan of inputs or leave zero (0)
to search for all sequences.
Type of Hit
In this field, select the type of adjustment you wish to make. It contains the following options:
Detailed: Select this option to enter the loan adjustment data from the supplier.
manually. As you proceed with the loan adjustment, the tabs will be enabled.
Grade Summary / Score.
Summary (Available only for Corporate versions): Select this option to
use the automatic calculation for loan settlement. When proceeding with the settlement of
loans will enable the tabs Launch in the Grid, Launch Via Keyboard and Summary /
Correct.
Attention: If you use the loan operations with different price entries,
same product, select the detailed option to adjust the loan with the price
original of the entry. When using the summarized option, the loan adjustment will remain at the price
used in the last loan operation of Inputs.
Product Prices
In this field, choose to keep the table with the original prices, provided at the time of
which generated the loan, or if you want to use a new table.
Price used at the time of the loan: The prices provided will be used.
moment that generated the loan. Later changes to it will not be considered.
table.
Price of a price table: Select this option to choose a new price table
to be used for loan settlement. Next to it, a field will appear to choose the table.
of price.

197
 When Launching on the Grid
This option will be enabled when selecting in Type of adjustment the option Summarized. In this field
choose the option for automatic calculation when entering the data for loan adjustment in the
Launch on the grid.
Normal, the system calculates the balance: Select this option for the system to calculate,
automatically, the final balance of the settlement. This option allows you to specify the quantity purchased,
repaid and/or the new loan.
Refund and balance will be informed, the remainder is a settlement: This option allows you to inform the
amount returned and/or the product balance, the difference will be shown as the quantity
bought.
By selecting this option, it will not be allowed to provide data for a new loan.
The adjustment and balance will be informed, the rest is a refund: This option allows you to inform
quantity purchased and/or the product balance in the company. The difference will be shown as
amount to be refunded.
Show Photo (Available only for Corporate versions)
Select this option so that, when settling the loan, it shows the photo of the products.
Proceed
Click this button to continue the loan settlement.

Agreement
In this tab, provide the data for the loan settlement of entries, according to the selections.
chosen.
Loan Entry Adjustment
This screen is used to settle the loan(s) with the supplier. You can provide information on it.
quantity purchased, returned or the balance that remained with the company and if you want to make a new one
loan.
Upon finalizing the agreement for the loan of goods, it will be possible to automatically generate a
entry operation for purchased products and/or for a new loan and a
outbound operation for returned products.
Launch on the Grid
This tab will list all the borrowed products. In it, you can provide the details of the
settlement of the merchandise loan.
The following information will be displayed in the frame:
Product: This column shows the product code.
Name: This column shows the name of the product.
Previous balance: This column shows the balance of the borrowed product.
New Loan: In this column you can take out a new loan for products with the
supplier. A new loan with products of type Series will not be allowed,
due to the series being unique for each unit of the product. For a new loan, do it on the screen of
Entry. For products of the type Grade, Lot and/or Edition, a new one will be allowed to be made.
Loan, through this screen, only for the products listed in the grid.
Correction: In this column, indicate the quantity of products to be invoiced.
Return: In this column, indicate the quantity being returned to the supplier.
Balance: This column shows the sum of all data provided in New Loan.
Return and Purchase.

198
 Unit Price: This column shows the unit price of the product.
Size: This column shows the size code for products with a range.
Nome:Mostra o nome do tamanho do produto.
Color: This column shows the color code of the product, for products with size variations.
Nome:Mostra o nome da cor do produto.
Edition: This column shows the product's edition.
Series: This column shows the product series.
Batch: This column shows the product batch.
Last Adjustment: This column shows the date of the last loan adjustment with the supplier.
for this product.
Start Date: This column shows the date on which the loan was made.
When selecting a product, the following information will be displayed below the grid:
Produto:Neste campo mostrará o código e nome do produto.
Last Adjustment: This field shows the date of the last loan adjustment made for the
selected product company.
Series / Batch / Edition: This field will display information regarding the series, batch, and the
editing of the selected product.
Grade:Mostra o código e o nome do tamanho e da cor do produto selecionado.
These data will be displayed when selecting the Detailed option in the Acerto Type field.
Total Emprestado:Mostra a quantidade total do produto emprestado.
Total Acertado:Mostra a quantidade acertada, em outros acertos de empréstimos.
Total Devolvido:Mostra a quantidade devolvida em outros acertos de empréstimos.
Launch via Keyboard
In this tab, you can adjust the loan by locating the products that are listed in the
grade. This tab will only be enabled when selecting in the Selection tab, in the Correction Type field.
the option Summary.
In this tab, report the quantity returned and/or the balance that remained with the company. The remainder
it will be considered as a purchase.
To use this screen:
• In the Product field, locate the product, or click on its row in the grid;
• Click the Launch button to enter the loan details;
• O campoSaldo Emprestadomostra a quantidade do produto que foi emprestada do
supplier. This information will also be in the grid, in the previous balance column.
• In the field Quantity Returned, inform the quantity of the product that is being returned to the
supplier.
• In the Balance field, inform the quantity of the product that will remain loaned to the company.
• In the field Corrected Quantity, the system will subtract the data provided in the Quantity fields.
Refund Client Balance, considering the remainder as settled product.
• In the Unit Price field, the unit price of the product will be displayed. The price can be changed.
depending on the configuration released on the screen.
• After all the data is entered, click the OK button to launch in the grid.
Transforming unreported into accurate:
Click this button to confirm the total balance of the products that do not have it.
information about returned quantity or balance to the company.

199
 Summary / Settlement
In this tab, check the provided data and the date for the new settlement. You can also
create operations for purchasing borrowed products, a new loan, and/or an exit
of the returned products.
Summary
This table shows the quantities and totals of the products changed in the loan adjustment.
Changed Items: Shows the number of lines changed in the loan adjustment.
Qtde Novos Empréstimos:Mostra a quantidade total de produtos que foram submetidos a um
new loan.
Qtde Devoluções:Mostra a quantidade total de produtos devolvidos para o fornecedor.
Qtde Acertos:Mostra a quantidade total de produtos comprados do fornecedor.
Value of New Loans: Shows the total value of new product loans.
Valor Devoluções:Mostra o valor total dos produtos devolvidos.
Valor Acertos:Mostra o valor total dos produtos comprados.
Settlement Date
In this box, fill in the date for a new loan agreement.
In this field, please provide the new date for the loan settlement.
Only changed: Select this option to change the settlement date, only for the
products that have been changed.
Schedule in my Appointments (Available only for Corporate versions):
Select this option to schedule the date on the employee's Appointments screen.
of the loan agreement.
In the Update Loan frame
In this section, you can create entry and exit operations for the products, with the provided data.
in the loan settlement. Below we will explain how to generate these operations.
• Create Purchase Operation for Loaned Products - Entry
In this section you can create an entry operation for the products received by the loan,
informed in the loan agreement. This option allows them to generate the operation automatically
na telaEntrada.
Create: Select this field to generate a purchase operation for borrowed products.
Operation: Select in this field the corresponding entry operation for the purchase of products
borrowed.
For more information, please refer to the chapter on Input Operations.
Stock: This field will be checked when the selected operation is configured.
to increase the product inventory. Use a Purchase operation of Products
Borrowed items that do not increase the inventory, as this will be added when updating the loan, and
that is configured to dispense money at the counter.
Sequence: This field will show the sequence number of the generated entry. On the screen of
Localize it to make the loan payment and to issue the invoice.
• Create Return - Entry
In this panel, you can generate a transaction for the return of the products mentioned in
loan settlement. This option allows you to automatically generate the return operation.
on the Output screen.
Create: Select this field to generate a return operation.

200
 Operation: Select in this field the corresponding output operation for the return of the
products, lent to the supplier.
In the system, a Exit operation must be created, referring to the return of products.
borrowed to the supplier, which does not reduce the product stock. See the chapter
correspondent about exit operations.
Stock: This field will be marked when the selected operation is configured.
to reduce the product stock. Use an operation that does not decrease the stock, as it already
will be updated upon completing the loan, and that it is not set up to withdraw the money on
box.
Sequence: This field will display the sequence number of the output created. On the screen
It is necessary to localize it to issue the invoice.
• Create New Loan Operation (Adjustment Outputs) - Output
In this panel, you can create an entry operation with the products listed as new.
loan. This option allows you to locate loans from the Entry screen and also
issue an invoice.
Create: Select this field to generate an entry operation for the new loan.
Operation: Select in this field the corresponding input operation for the loan
merchandise (inventory has already increased).

The system already has the operation pre-registered with the name Loan (inventory already executed).
For more information about input operations, please refer to the corresponding chapter.
For information on using the Entry screen, consult the chapter How to Do It
Entry.
Stock: This field will be marked when the selected operation is configured
to increase the product stock. Use a goods loan operation that
Do not increase the stock, as this will be done as soon as the loan is updated.
Sequence: This field will display the number of the generated entry sequence for the new
loan. On the entry screen, locate it to issue the invoice.
Price table to be used in operations
In this field, select the price table that will be displayed on the Exit / Entry screen when
generate an operation for filling the fieldTable. The prices will be considered
used in the loan accuracy grid.
Update loan
Click the Update Loan button to finalize the settlement and thus update the stock.
products.
Start again
Click this button to make a new loan adjustment.

201
Stock

202
Stock Count
The inventory count will be used to balance or correct the stock of products.
On this screen, you can start a countdown or open an existing countdown.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the menu Other in the Stock Count option.

Start Counting(F3) / Counting

Click this button to start a countdown. Please provide the following information:
Description
Enter a title to identify the count. This text can be, for example, the start date.
of the counting or the reason.
Products
In this field, select the type of product for which the counting will be done.
You can count the stock only with products that are registered with the
Normal Type or Grade.
Include inactive products
Check this option to show the products that are marked as Inactive in the registration of
Products.
Do not include products with stock 0
Mark this option to not show products with stock equal to zero.
Do not include products with negative stock.
Check this option to not display products with negative stock.
Selections - leave blank for all
In this panel, you can use the following fields to filter the data in the stock count:
Classe, Subclasse, Grupo, Família, Fornecedor, Pesquisa 1, Pesquisa 2, Pesquisa 3 e
Location.
Attention: Depending on the number of products registered, the counting may take a while to
open. To prevent this from happening, it is recommended to use the options in the selection box to
filter the count data.
Start Counting
Click this button after selecting all options to proceed with the count.
Next, the Products tab will be displayed where the quantity of your should be informed.
stock.
In the system, it is possible to do manual counting and/or with the barcode reader.
Inform in the product line
In this tab, a manual stock count will be conducted, where a list will be displayed with the
produtos selecionados. Essa tela mostra o código, o nome do produto e as seguintes colunas:
Existing: This column shows the current stock of the product.
Please inform the current total stock of the product after counting it.
Difference: This column will show the difference between the columns: Existing and Entered.
If you wish to correct the stock of some products on the list, select this option.
for each product. For the correction of the entire list, the system has a specific function.

203
 Automatically save when changed
This function allows the information entered in the columnDigitado to be saved.
periodically.
It is possible to configure the count so that the system records the data.
automatically, according to the amount of information entered. Choose for the system
make the recording every 10, 30, or 50 altered lines.
Update schedule
This option should be used after the counting with the reader. The system will update the list at this.
to make the comparison between the stocks.
Save Changes
Use this button to save the data entered in the stock count.
Use this option whenever you finish or interrupt the count so that you don't lose data.
Leave this Count
Use this option if you finish the count or if you are going to stop the count for a while. Before
when leaving the count, do not forget to save the changes made, to do this go to the Inform tab
product grid and click the Save changes button.
Inform using reader / keyboard
Use this screen to count the stock with the barcode scanner or to
counting with the keyboard in a faster way.
Option
Select the option to stop reading in case of wrong product, so that the system alerts.
when launching a product with the wrong code.
Attention: To inform the total stock, type the asterisk (*) before passing the barcode reader.
scan the barcodes or type the product code on the keyboard.
To make the count:
• Enter the product code or scan the reader for each counted unit or use the asterisk
(*) before the product code;
• The quantity field will only be available to enter the total stock if you type the
asterisk (*)
• After reporting the stock of all products, click on the Inform tab in the grid.
products
• Click the Update Grid button to display the reported stock;
• You will then have the option to continue or complete the inventory count;
• To continue the count, click on the Inform tab using the reader / keyboard;
• To conclude, click on the Adjust stock tab.
Read count file or Data Collector
This option allows you to read the count file generated by a data collector.
The file generated by the data collector must be in text format, with the configuration below:
File extension: CTE
File name: Any valid name for Windows
File Format: Text (TXT), fixed columns.
First Line: Must contain *** STOCK COUNT SHOP 8 ***
Last Line: Must contain *** END ***
The other lines should be:
• Columns 1 to 20: String - Product Code, left aligned, even if it is composed
only by numbers.

204
• Columns 21 to 23: Numeric - Product Size. Right-aligned WITH leading zeros.
Use 000 for products that do not have a size chart.
• Columns 24 to 26: Numeric - Product Color. Right-aligned WITH leading zeros. Use
000 for products that do not have a grade.
• Columns 27 to 36: Numeric - Inventory counted. Aligned to the right, without leading zeros.
Only integers.
Last products read
In this table, the products that are being counted and properly registered will be listed.
in the system.
Errors found
In this table, the products that are not registered or have the code will be listed.
wrong.
Adjust Inventory
This tab will be used to finalize the inventory count. It contains some options that
they must be defined before getting your product stock right.
Set 0 as the count for undigitized products: This option fills the column
Digitized stock equal to zero for products that have not had their stock reported.
Adjust the stock of the following products: In this table, check the options related to your
inventory count.
Adjust inventory for all that have a difference between the existing stock and the entered stock:
Select this option to correct the stock of products that have a Difference column.
filled. The stock will be adjusted to the quantity indicated in the Entered column.
Adjust the inventory only for the products that had the 'Correct' column checked
Select this option to correct only the stock of products that have the column
Corrected marked.
Differences
During the inventory count, there may have been movement of products (sale of some
products, for example). In this frame you can select which option you prefer if that
occur.
Adjust the stock in the same way
By selecting this option, the inventory will be updated with all the provided data, without considering
If the stock has been changed after the counting started, the reported stock will remain valid.
Do not adjust the inventory of these products and leave them in the count. Remove all the others.
counting products
This option updates the stock only for products that have not had any movement during the
count. Separate the products that had their stock changed, keeping them the same
counting, allowing them to be counted again to then conclude.
Do not miss the inventory of these products. Do not delete any product from the count.
This option does not adjust the stock if you have changed the stock of products during the
counting. All products will be kept on the list, so that the counting can be done
again.
Correct Inventory
After finishing the inventory count and marking the desired options on this tab, click the button.
Correct Inventory.

205
Read Count / Existing Count
This tab allows you to check the counts that are open and closed.
Open: By selecting this option, all counts that are open will be displayed.
Select a count and then continue the inventory of the products.
Closed: By selecting this option, you will be able to consult the completed counts.
All: By selecting this option, the Open and Closed counts will be displayed.
After selecting one of the options above, click the Show button.
To Open an Existing Count:
• Select the desired count;
• Then click on the Open Selected Count button.
To Turn Off an Existing Countdown:
• Select the desired count;
• Then click the Delete Selected Count(s) button.
Attention: Once a count is deleted, it can no longer be found on this screen. The correction
The stock movement, if completed, will not be undone.

206
Transfer between Branches
On this screen, it is possible to transfer stock between branches; it can be done between branches.
registered in the same system or also among remote branches.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the Other menu, on the Transfers between Branches option.
Upon entering this screen, you will have three options:

Start Transfer: Click this button to initiate a new transfer.

Read Transfer: Click this button to view existing transfers.
Receive Transfer from Another Branch: Click this button to read the transfer file
or to confirm a transfer.

Start Transfer (F3)

To initiate a transfer, fill in the fields in the Transfer / Transfer tab.
New, which are:
Type
Select the type of transfer that will be made.
• Branches registered in this Shop Control
This option performs transfers between branches that use the same database (branches
online). In this option, the stock of the product is deducted from the originating branch and recorded in the branch of
destination automatically.
• Separate branches with file generation
Choosing this option will generate a file with the transfer information. This
it must be sent to the destination branch that will verify and confirm the transfer.
The stock will be deducted from the source branch when generating the file and will be received at the branch of
destination only after importing the file.
• Branches registered in this Shop Control with receipt confirmation (Available
only for the Corporate Plus version)
This option performs transfers to the branches that use the same database (branches
on-line).
Use it if you prefer that an employee from the destination branch checks the transfer before then.
confirm. With this option, the stock will be automatically deducted from the source branch and will be
received at the destination branch only after verification and confirmation by the employee.
Branch Origin: The system will fill this field with the code of the branch that is being
accessed. This is the branch that is sending the products.
Branch Destination: Enter in this field the code of the branch that will receive the products.
For the separate Branches option with file generation, this field will not be shown.
The destination branch will be determined at the time of reading the file.
Description: Enter a description for the transfer made. The name of the must be used.
operation so that it can be identified.
Allow transfer even without stock
Check this option to make the transfer, even if the originating branch has no stock.
of the chosen products. Use it, if you haven't started or don't control the stock of
products.

207
 Show Prices
Check this option to show the prices of the products when selecting them for the
transfer. If this option is checked, the employee of the destination branch will be able to see the
prices. This option can be unchecked before completing the transfer.
Table
Selecione a tabela de preço que prefere visualizar, durante a transferência.
Proceed
Click this button after filling out all the fields in the Transfer tab
New Transfer.
Transfer Data
The selected data in the Transfer / New Transfer tab will be displayed in this tab.
OptionsAllow transfer even with no stock,Show PricesandTable, may
to be altered before Confirming Transfer.
Save Changes
It is used to save the changes made on this screen. Save it before finalizing the transfer.
Effectuate transfer
Click this button to confirm the transfer.
It is necessary for the products to have been launched in the Products tab, which we will explain below.

Advanced Options - When Transferring

(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this panel, it is possible to configure to generate labels and send an email about the transfer.
Prepare Labels
By selecting this option, labels with the selected products for transfer will be generated.
These tags can only be printed at the branch of origin.
Send email to
By checking this option, the system will send a notification email to the destination branch about the
transfer. Please provide the recipient's email address in the adjacent field.
Email configuration
Select one of the email configurations created with the data from this field.
provider. This configuration is created in the moduleSettingsin the menu-email. For
for more information consult the chapter Email Configuration.

Products
In this tab, choose the products and inform the quantity that will be transferred.
To add the product to the transfer:
• In the product field, enter the code or use the Down Arrow to search for the product;
• In the quantity field, enter the amount of stock that will be transferred.
• Click the button or press enter after typing the quantity, so that they will be submitted
products on the grid;
• Click the Save Changes button;
• Go to the Transfer Data tab;
• Click the button to Confirm Transfer.

208
Read Transfer (F4)
This option is used to check the transfers that are in progress and those that have been completed.
Search
Choose the transfer status you want to locate. The options are:
In progress: It will show all transfers that have not yet been completed. In these, it is
allowed to include, change, or delete products.
Completed: It will show the transfers that have already been made.
All: It will show all the transfers In progress and Completed.
Below these options, a list of transfers will be shown, according to your
search.
Open Selected Transfer
Select the transfer and click this button to open it.
Delete Selected Transfer(s)
This option deletes one or more selected transfers.
To delete multiple transfers, use the Shift and Ctrl keys as explained in the Tips chapter.
of Use.

Receive Transfer from Another Branch (F5)

At the branch where the goods are being received, use this option to check and
confirm the transfer. This option should be used if the originating branch has chosen
the branch types separated with file generation or branches registered in this Shop
Control with acknowledgment of receipt.

Transfer / Receive Transfer from another Branch

To receive the transfer, select one of the available options in the field,
Choose the Option.
Receive through file
Selecione essa opção para confirmar a importação do arquivo gerado pela filial de origem, caso
have used the typeBranches separated with file generation.
By selecting this option, the field will be displayed. Enter the file. Locate the file from the
transfer through the Search button next to it.
Just confirm the transfer already made at another branch (Available only for the version
Corporate Plus
Select this option to confirm the receipt of the transfer generated with the typeBranches
registered in this Shop Control with confirmation of receipt.
Selecting this option will display the field Enter the transfer. Locate the
transfer through the Search button next to it.
Confirming Receipt
After selecting the transfer, click the 'View products' button. All will be listed.
products and information.
Description for stock: Enter a description related to the transfer. This description will be
shown in the report Last Movements, in the product registration, identifying the
operation.
Receive transfer: After checking all the products, click this button to complete the
transfer.

209
Service Order
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This template is intended for companies that work with service provision, maintenance and
technical assistance. In it, it is possible to submit a part for repair, provide details and
schedule a technician to perform the necessary services.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleMovement;
• Click on the menu Order of Service on the option Open OS.
To set up this screen, it is necessary to start the registration of the Details Fields. To do this, enter
In the Service Order menu, in the Service Order Settings option.

Service Order Menu / Order Settings

Service
On this screen you can configure up to 8 (eight) Detail fields and also define the types and
service order situations.
Details
In this tab, register the fields that will be used for the entry of the Service Order, for
specifications of the products to be repaired.
Nome:Informe o nome do campo que será utilizado na tela deOrdem de Serviç[Link]:
type, model, series, license plate, etc. The fields that remain blank will not be displayed on the screen
Service Order.
Uppercase: Check this option to display the fields created in uppercase letters on the screen.
Service Order.
Types / Situations
This tab allows you to register the types and situations of Service Orders used in the company.
Type
In this field, you can register the types of work orders that will be used in the company.
This screen already contains pre-registered types: budget, factory warranty, store warranty,
pre-approved budget, contract.
To add a Type:
• In the field, enter the name of the type you wish to use;
• Click on the Include button to be added to the list.
To delete the Type in the list:
• Click on the gray field of the line you want to delete;
• Clique no botãoApagar.
Attention: We recommend not deleting the registered types to use in the work order, because
it cannot be undone. When deleting a type, make sure it has not been used in
no work orders, as this information will no longer appear in the prints of
reports, in search of a work order.
Situation
In this field, you can register the service order situations that will be used. On this screen
It already contains pre-registered situations: verification, budget, in execution, completed and not.
found problem.

210
 To add the Situation:
• In the field, enter the name of the situation you wish to use;
• Click the Add button to be added to the list.
To erase the Situation from the list:
• Click on the gray field of the line you want to delete;
• Click on the Delete button.
Attention: We recommend not deleting the registered types to use in the service order, as
it cannot be undone. When deleting a type, make sure that it has not been used in
no work order, as this information will no longer appear on the prints of
reports, in the search for a service order.

Situation "Completed"
In this field, select the Status that will be considered as completed in your company.
Select in this field the situation 'Completed' or another one that you have registered to consider
as completed.
Record
Click this button to save the changes made.

Service Order Screen / Configure this screen

After setting the configurations on the Service Order Settings screen, on the screen
Service Order, click on the menu Set Up this Screen.
Detail Fields
This tab will display the fields created on the Service Order Settings screen.
Determine which fields will be mandatory and which will be used to make
search for Service Order.
Mandatory: Select this option for the fields that will be required to be filled in, when
launch a service.
Search: This option searches, in the selectedDetails fields, if the information that was
typed belongs to other service orders. Allows quick identification of a part or
equipment that has already been in the company for repair, allowing verification of the services provided and
copy the data from the fieldsDetails. Select this option in the fields that will be used
to perform the search.

Scheduling
In this tab, define whether the company works with scheduling services for the technicians and
configure the information that will be detailed in the service scheduling.
Allows Scheduling
Check this option to allow scheduling service times for the technicians.
Standard employee group
In this field, select the default employee group for scheduling services.
Example: If you have created a specific group for the technicians, select this group as
pattern on the screen.

Allow changing group: Select this option to allow changing the user group
standard, on the scheduling screen. By checking this option, you can also change the fields
EmployeeGrouping.

211
 Information to include in the agenda
This option allows you to select the data that will be automatically inserted when scheduling the
service for the technician.
You can add the customer's name, address, phone numbers, detail fields, and the problem.
reported.
Record
Click this button to save the settings.

How to Launch a Service Order

To issue a Service Order, fill in the following fields:
Client: Select the client in this field. To register a new client directly from this screen,
click on the icon , or press Alt+L.
Product: Please provide the product that will be repaired.
If you do not want to register all the products to create the service order, the system will allow
Change the description. In this situation, register a product to use in the service orders.
exclusively.
Detail fields: The detail fields that were created on the screen will be shown.
Service Order Settings. These fields must be filled out depending on the
screen configuration.
If some of the detail fields are marked for search, when filling in with
Any registered information will appear next to the field with the magnifying glass icon. When clicked
no ícone abrirá uma tela com as ordens de serviços lançadas com essa informação. Poderá
select one of them to verify and copy the details field data.
Type of O.S.
In this field, select the type of service provision, as registered on the screen of
Service Order Settings.
Situation
Neste campo selecione a situação do serviço, conforme cadastrado na tela deConfigurações
Service Order.
The situation can be changed according to the progress of the service. To change it, locate the
service order, choose the desired new status and click the Save button.
Verification and Services
Verification: Select this option to have the reported problem checked.
Services: Select this option for the specified services to be executed.
Verification + Services: Select this option so that the reported problem can be verified
services mentioned have been carried out.
Reported Problem (Alt + R)
Neste quadro digite o problema relatado pelo cliente, para análise do técnico.
Services to Execute (Alt + S)
In this section, provide the services that will be performed on the product.
By clicking this button or pressing Alt + S, the Services screen will open. In this screen, provide the
services that will be performed.
On the services screen, provide the following information:
Code: In this field, enter the code or search for the service by name.

212
 The name of the service will appear in the field next to it. Depending on the configuration in the registration of
Services, the name may be changed.
Qty: In this field, specify the quantity of the service.
Unit Price: This field will show the service price. Depending on the configuration,
In the service registration, it can be changed.
Total Price: This field shows the value of the quantity multiplied by the price of the service
chosen.
Desc.%: In this field, inform the percentage of discount that will be provided for this service.
The system will automatically fill in with the corresponding value.
In this field, provide the amount of the discount that will be offered for this service.
the system will automatically fill in with the corresponding percentage.
Final Price: This field shows the final price, taking into account the provided discounts.
Technician 1: Locate the technician who will execute the service.
Technician 2: Locate technician 2, in case the service is performed by more than one technician.
Attention: Services may be recorded without informing technicians 1 and 2, these technicians
can be informed on the Service Order Maintenance screen before closing the
Service Order.
Completed: Select this field if the service has already been performed.
OK: Click this button, or press Enter, to launch the service in the grid.
F6 - Delete Line
Press F6 to delete a typed service.
To delete / cancel a service:
• Press F6;
• A screen will open to inform the line you wish to delete or type zero (0) to delete all.
• Click the OK button;
Edit Product Line
To edit the product line, position the cursor in the code field and press the key with
equal sign (=).
F2 - Returns
Press F2 to confirm the services and return to the Service Order screen.

Budget
In this section, please provide the completion date of the budget; you may use the following options:
Promised for: In this field, provide the date when the budget will be completed.
Contato:Neste campo informe o nome da pessoa de contato, responsável pela peça.
Save (F2)
Click this button or press F2 to complete the service order.

Sign
In this box you can indicate the advance or total payment for the service. The amount of the deposit
It will be issued as a credit for the customer, to finalize the payment when importing the order in the
Output screen.
To launch the service signal:
• Click on the Informa Sinal button;

213
 • It will open the Customer Credit Launch screen with the Company;
• For more information, consult the chapter Customer Credit Release with the
Company..

Scheduling (F6)
Click this button to schedule the service or a visit time for the technician. The buttonF6
open the same screen of Appointments from the Office module.

Visualization (CTRL + F2)

This tab allows you to choose the view of your appointments, of another employee or of
several, according to the groups created.
Employee: Check this option to select the employee you wish to verify or
register the commitments.
Grouping: Check this option to select the created grouping to verify or
register the appointments. The appointments of all will be shown on the right side of the screen
employees belonging to the grouping. This field will show only the
groups created by the employee who entered the system.
Attention: To create the Groups, go to the Groups tab (Ctrl + F3).
User Groups: Check this option to select the user group you wish to
verify or register the commitments. The system will show all the commitments of
employees that belong to the group. The user group must be defined in the module
Registration, in the Basics menu, in the User Groups option.
The employee who is viewing the appointments on the Service Order screen will be able to
change them regardless of the permission set for them in the employee registration for the
use of the appointments screen.
This option will be marked as default on the Scheduling screen on the Order screen.
Service.
Attention: For these functions to be available, the screen to allow changing the group of
standard user, must be configured. If it is not configured this way, the system will
show only the selected employees in the User Group.
Text to insert in the scheduling
This field will display the customer information that was selected in the menu
Configure this screen, in the Scheduling tab, in the Information to be inserted in the agenda box.
You may include or change the data in this table. This information will appear in the field
Description, on the New Appointment screen.
Para abrir a telaNovo Compromissoe gravar o agendamento, localize a data e dê um duplo
click at the desired time. For information about this screen, consult the chapter Appointments.

Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the registered service orders.
General
In this tab, you can search for service orders by the following fields:
OS Number: Enter in this field the sequence of the service order generated by the system.
Client: Please provide the client for whom you want to search for the service order.
Tipo de OS:Informe o tipo da ordem de serviço que deseja buscar.
Situation OS: Inform the status of the service order you wish to search for.
Open: Select whether you want it to show:

214
 • All: To show open and closed work orders.
• Closed: To show only the completed service orders.
• Open: To show only the service orders that are open.
Advanced
In this tab, you can locate the open Work Orders within a period.
Open between
Check this option to locate the service orders that are not completed by period.
Next to this field, inform the period you wish to check.

Search (F2)
Click this button or press F2 at the bottom of the screen to display the search results.

Search Result
The system will open the Service Orders Found screen, where the search results will appear.
To open or close this panel, press Alt+F11.
The following options will be shown on this panel:
Sequence: Shows the sequence number of the service order.
Client: Show the client code.
Nome Cliente:Mostra o nome do cliente.
Shows the service registration date.
Closed: If this field is checked, the service order has already been completed.
Produto:Mostra o nome do produto no qual foi executado o serviço.
Situation: Shows the status of the work order.
Tipo:Mostra o tipo da ordem de serviço.
Help (F1)
Click this button to check the existing shortcut keys on the Work Order screen.

215
Maintenance of Service Order
This screen can be used by the technicians to perform maintenance on the service order. In it
You can add or remove products and services before completion and report the issue.
found. This will facilitate the delivery of the repaired part/equipment by better specifying the
procedure performed in the service.
To open this screen:
• Select the Movement module;
• Click on the menu Service Order, in the option OS Maintenance.

Set up this screen

On this screen, you can configure the permissions to use the order maintenance screen.
service.
Products
On this screen, choose the functions for selling products, on the Service Order screen.
Standard Price Table: In this field, select the table that will be used as standard for
product launches.
Allow change table: Select this option to allow changing the standard price table,
to launch products.
Allow unit price change: Select this option to allow changing the unit price
of the products.
Allows product stock to be reduced in the OS: Select this option to allow reducing the
stock of products on the service order screen.
Check stock before launching / lowering: Select this option for the system to verify
the stock at the moment it is launching the product on the shelf.
At this moment, the system will notify that the product is not in stock and the quantity that
contains.
Services
In this box, choose the functions for the sale of services on the Service Order screen.
Maximum discount for services: Enter in this field the maximum discount for the services, in
percentage.
Keep technician 1 when launching services: Select this option to keep technician 1 on the screen.
launching services after launching the first service.
Keep technician 2 when launching services: Select this option to keep technician 2 on the screen.
launch of services after launching the first service.
Record
Click this button to save the settings of this screen.

Find (F11)
Antes de fazer a manutenção da ordem de serviço, localize-a utilizando a tela de busca.
OS: In this field, the service order number found will be displayed.
Client: The client's name will be displayed in this field.
Product: This field will show the product that was left for the service.
This icon will only appear when an appointment for the service is scheduled.

216
Details (Ctrl+F2)
In this tab, you can check and change the information registered in the service order.
Fields Details
The data provided in the detail fields, which were registered on the screen, will be displayed.
Service order configuration.
Type O.S.
This field will show the type of service order that is being executed. The types of order
Service orders are registered in the Service Order Configuration screen.
Open O.S. by
This field will display the name of the employee who issued the work order.
Last Modified by
This field shows the name of the employee who last altered the work order.
Current Situation
This field shows the current status of the service order.
New Situation
In this field, select the new status of the service order.
Imported for Output
This field will be automatically marked when importing the work order, to the screen of
outputs. Next to it, in the Sequence field, the number of the created sequence will appear.

Reported (Ctrl+F3)
In this tab, you can consult or add information related to the service.
Reported Problem (Alt+R)
In this section, the information regarding the issue reported by the registered customer will be displayed.
through the service order screen. You can add more information in this field. To enter more
information:
• Click the Report Problem button (Alt+R) or press Alt+R on the keyboard;
• Type the desired text;
• To confirm press F2, or to cancel press ESC.
Problem Found (Alt+E)
This form can be used by the technician to record identified issues. To record the
problem encountered:
• Click the Found Problem button (Alt + E) or press Alt + E on the keyboard;
• Type the desired text;
• To confirm press F2, or to cancel press ESC.
Executed Services - Description (Alt+X)
In this section, the technician will be able to enter all the repairs that were made to the product. For
launch the services performed:
• Click the buttonExecuted Services - Description (Alt+X) or press Alt+X on the keyboard;
• Type the desired text;
• To confirm press F2, or to cancel press ESC.

217
Services (Ctrl+F5)
This tab can be used to check the services that have been or will be performed. In it
It will be possible to launch, edit, or withdraw the services of the order.

Launch (Alt+S)
Click this button to open the Services screen, where you can check the recorded services. In it
You can also launch, change, and remove services on the screen.
For more information about this screen, check the chapter How to Make a Sale.
Technical Report
In this box, you can choose the technician who will carry out the work order, if you don't have one.
was informed at the moment it launched the services.
To add technician 1:
• In the Technical field, locate the employee who will perform the service;
• Select the service line that the technician will execute the service;
• Press F7 to insert the name of technician 1 in the selected line.
To add the technician 2:
• In the Technical field, locate the employee who will carry out the service;
• Select the service line that the technician will carry out the service;
• Press F8 to insert the name of technician 2 in the selected line.
Attention: You will need to inform the technician for each of the lines.
Transform marked services into completed / not completed
Click this button to turn the selected services into completed or not
completed.
To transform the services into completed:
• Select the products that do not have the Completed column selected;
• Click the button to mark services as completed / not completed;
• The system will automatically mark the Completed column of the service.
To transform the services into not completed:
• Select the products that have the Completed column selected;
• Click the button to mark services as completed / not completed;
• The system will automatically uncheck the Completed column of the service.
Total
Show the total value of the services entered.
Items Used (Ctrl+F5)
This tab can be used to add, edit, and remove products from the order. You can check
the products released before completing the service order.
Launch (Alt+P)
Clicking this button will open the Products screen where you can enter, change, and remove products.
For more information on product launches, consult the chapter How to Do It
a sale.
Download / Return stocks of the selected lines
This button is used to decrease the stock of the released products, or click this button to
return the stock. When running this routine, the work order will be automatically saved.

218
 Total
Show the total value of the released products.

Budget / Sign (Ctrl+F6)

Use this tab to report the data that have been approved for the service and also to enter if
a signal was given.
Prometido para:Este campo mostra a data prometida para finalizar o orçamento do serviço.
Contact: Shows the name of the contact person.
Budget Amount: This field shows the total budget amount of the service order.
If you have launched services or products, click the button next to update the value of
budget.
Client contacted: Select this field if the client has been informed about the budget of the
service order.
Approved budget: Select this field if the client has approved the budget.
service order.
Approved by: In this field, enter the name of the client who approved the budget.
Note: In this field you can enter a remark.
Prazo para Conclusão:Neste campo informe a data prevista para a conclução do serviço.
Signal
In this box, you can indicate the advance or total payment for the service. The amount of the deposit
it will be issued as credit for the customer.
To launch the service signal:
• Click on the button Information Signal;
• It will open the Customer Credit launch screen with the Company.
Delivery Data
In this section, you can provide the delivery information for the product. To do this, click the button.
Delivery Notification will open a screen with the following information:
This field shows the current date of the system.
Delivered to: In this field, type the name of the customer who picked up the part.
Delivered by: In this field, select the employee who made the delivery.
Confirm: Click this button to confirm the delivery details.
Cancel: Click this button to cancel and close the screen.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the service order data.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen for a new launch.
Turn off the OS
Click this button to delete a service order.
To delete the order:
• Localize the service order by the Find function (F11);
• Select the desired order to open on the screen;
• Then click the Delete OS button.

219
Date OS: Click this button to close the service order. To do so, find the order.
desired.
Reopen OS: Click this button to open a closed service order. If you wish
add more information to the work order.
Print ticket: Click this button to print the service order ticket.
Ticket printing requires configuring the layout before printing. For more information
For information, consult the manual available on the Shop Control 8 CD.

220
Import Services (Alt+F6)
This function allows you to import the services in the Sales / Outputs screen to confirm the
receipt of the service and for the printing of the invoice.
To import the service on the Sales / Exits screen:
• Enter the Movement module, in the Exit menu choose an exit screen;
• Press Alt+F6 or click on the icon in the footer of the screen, to open the search OS screen, to
locate the service orders already registered.
General
In this tab, you can search for the service order using the following fields:
OS Number: Enter in this field the sequence of the service order generated by the system.
Client: Inform the client for whom you wish to search for the service order.
Type of OS: Please specify the type of service order you wish to search for.
Situação OS:Informe a situação da ordem de serviço que deseja buscar.
Open / Closed: Select if you want to show: All, Closed, or Open.
Advanced
In this tab, you can find the open Work Orders for a given period.
Open between: Select this option to locate the closed service orders for a
determined period. Next to it, specify the desired period.
Search (F2)
Click this button or press F2 at the bottom of the screen to show the service orders
found.
Service Orders Found: This screen will list all the service orders
found with the provided data.
The following information will be shown: Sequence, Client, Name, Date, Closed, Product,
Situation, Type OS and Imported Sequence.
• Details
This tab will show the fields created in Service Order / Configure Order of
Services filled in the Service Order screen.
Situação:Mostra a situação da Ordem de serviço selecionada. Exemplo: concluída, em
execution, budget ready, etc.
Cliente:Mostra o código e o nome do cliente da ordem de serviço.
Type: Shows the type of service order that is being executed. Example: contract, warranty
factory, store warranty, etc.
Product: Shows the name of the product that was left for repair.
Total:Mostra o valor total dos serviços.
• Reported
This tab will show the problem reported by the customer.
• Found
In this tab, the problem found will be shown, described by the technician.
• Services
This tab will show all services performed in the Work Order. You will be able to verify
os seguintes dados: Nome, Unidade, Qtde e Preço Final.

221
 Completed: This column will be marked if the service has been completed in the order of
service.
• Items Used
This tab will show all the products that were used for the repair of the product.
You can check the following product data: Code, Name, Unit, Quantity, Price
Unitário, Preço Total, Desc.(%), Desc.($), ICMS(%), IPI(%), Preço Final, Complemento,
Table, Downloaded OS, Series, Batch, ICMS Type, IPI Value, Size, Color, and Fractioned.

Selected Imports
Click this button to import the service order to the sales screen. The system will open the
Service screen will show all the services performed to be checked and changed.
Press F2 to confirm the import of this order. If you have added products to the order
the service can also verify or launch if desired.

222
Financial

223
Account Plan Registration
The account plan registration is used to classify, organize and group revenues and expenses.
expenses of your company. The creation of a well-structured chart of accounts is important for the
analysis of the Demonstrative Report of Results.
There are some account plans registered in Shop Control 8 that cannot be changed.
or deleted, for being used by the system. The Chart of Accounts for revenues are
configured to group sales according to payment methods. The plans for
Registered expenses are intended for the purchase of goods.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleRegistration;
• Click on the Basics menu, on the Financial option and on Chart of Accounts.
Account Plan Registration - Level 1
(Available for the Corporate versions)
When registering an account plan on this screen, indicate whether it refers to an income or to a
expense.
Account Plan Registration - Level 2
(Available for Corporate versions)
The Level 2 Chart of Accounts will belong to a Level 1 Chart of Accounts. In this screen,
report which level 1 chart of accounts it refers to.
Account Plan Registration - Level 3
Inform which Level 2 Chart of Accounts the new plans created on this screen refer to.
In this registration, it is possible to provide the following options:
Interest (%) (Available only for Corporate versions)
In this field, enter the percentage of interest you wish to consider for accounts payable that
they use this chart of accounts.
Do not show in the Results Statement report (usually purchases of
merchandise
Esta opção será utilizada para que o plano de contas criado não apareça no relatório
Income Statement.
For the chart of accounts related to the purchase of goods, this option must be checked.
then the report will show the cost related to the goods sold in the period
selected. Thus, the display of these plans would lead to incorrect results.
Also use it to hide other account plans that are not part of the results of
company. For example: some personal accounts of the partners are paid by the company, in this case create
a specific chart of accounts and check this option.
Example:
Level 1 - Recipes.
Level 2 (Contained in level 1): Sales.
Level 3 (Included in level 2): Cash sales;
Level 3 (Contained in level 2): Installment sales;
Level 3 (Included in level 2): Credit card sales;
Level 3 (Contained in level 2): Sales with check.
Level 1 - Expenses.

224
 Level 2 (Contained in level 1): Operating Expenses.
Level 3 (Contained in level 2): Rent;
Level 3 (Contained in level 2): telephony;
Level 3 (Contained in level 2): water;
Level 3 (Contained in level 2): light.
To register the Level 2 or Level 3 Chart of Accounts, the previous levels must be
registered.

See Chart of Accounts

On this screen you can check all the registered account plans.

225
Cash Movement
In this chapter, we will explain how to make transactions of incoming and outgoing amounts.
cash box, transfer to the checking account and also entries of paid and received invoices
directly at the counter.
Attention: The employee's access settings to the cash register functions must be released.
in the employee registration. It may also make the generation of a paid account mandatory.
You are requested to inform the client/supplier, chart of accounts, and description.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Caixa menu, in the Mov. Caixa option.
When accessing the cash register screen, fill in the following data: Branch and Cash Register

Move Cash and Check Totals

Click this button to move and check the total cash in each form of
Receipt. You can add and withdraw amounts from the cash register, depending on your permission.

Move the Cash

This option allows the employee to only handle the cash register, restricting their access to
information on the totals of payment methods.

Money (F6)
In this tab you can make credit and debit transactions in the cash register. When making transactions
In the cash register, it will be possible to generate receivables, payables, and transfers to other cash registers or accounts.
banking.
Current Value
In this field, the total cash amount in the register will be displayed. This option will appear when
move the cash through the Move Cash button and Check Totals.
Amount Moved
In this field, select the type of transaction that will be performed at the cash register:
Credit: Select this option to add money and also generate a receivable account.
To record credit in the cash register
• In the Amount Moved field, select the Credit option;
• Next to it is a field to enter the amount that will be added to the cash register;
• In the footer, there is a field Description Mov, type a description about the generated credit;
• Then click the Confirm Movement button (F2).
To issue credit and generate an accounts receivable in the cash register
• In the Transferred Value field, select the Credit option;
• Next to it, there is a field to enter the amount that will be added to the cash register;
• Marque a opçãoGera conta recebida,para gerar uma conta recebida com o valor informado;
• In the Received Account (Cash) section, fill in the following details to generate the account
received.
Client: Select the client who is making the payment of the bill.
Plan 3: Select the account plan related to the payment received.
Description: Enter a description regarding the movement in this field. This description will be
shown on the screens and in the accounts receivable reports.

226
• In the footer there is a field Description Mov., enter a description of the generated credit.
This description will be shown in the cash reports.
• Then click the Confirm Movement button (F2).
Debit: Select this option to withdraw money, generate a paid account or make
transfer between cash registers or to current account.
To Launch a Debit
• In the field Amount Moved, select the option Debit;
• Next to it, there is a field to enter the amount that will be withdrawn from the cash register;
• When making a withdrawal from the cash register, inform the type of withdrawal movement that will be recorded.
in the box. Select one of the options below:
Transfer to bank account
This option allows you to withdraw the amount from the cash register and transfer it to a bank account. Upon selecting
For this option, fill in the following data:
• Account: Select the bank account to which you want to transfer the cash.
• Consolidated: Check this option for the transferred money to appear as available, in the
current consolidated bank balance.
• Description: In this field, enter a description to be identified on the launch screen
bank accounts and in the bank reports.
Transfer to another box (Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows transferring money from one cash register to another. It can also be done between
boxes from different branches. When selecting this option, fill in the following information:
• Branch: Select the branch to which the transfer will be made;
• Cash register: Select the branch cash register to which the transfer will be made;
• Description: In this field, type a description to be identified in the cash reports.
is receiving the money.
Withdraw and generate paid invoice

Esta opção permite retirar o dinheiro do caixa e gerar uma conta paga. Ao selecionar essa
option fill in the following data.
• Supplier: Select the supplier to whom the payment will be made.
• Plan 3: Select the chart of accounts related to the paid account.
• Description: In this field, enter a description regarding the payment of the bill, to be
identified in the screens and in the accounts payable reports.
• Note: In this field, enter the invoice number.
Withdraw and generate various paid accounts (Available only for Corporate versions)
This option allows you to withdraw money from the cash register and record several paid bills. A will be generated
account for each of the entries. When selecting this option, you will need to fill in the following
data for each account you wish to post.
• Supplier: Select the supplier to whom the payment will be made.
• Plan 3: Select the chart of accounts related to the paid account.
• Description: In this field, enter a description regarding the payment of the bill.
identified in the screens and in the accounts payable reports.
• Valor:Neste campo digite o valor da conta que está sendo paga.
• Launch: Click this button to launch on the grid, the account you wish to make the payment.
• Delete: Click this button to delete an entered account. A screen will open, where you can
inform the line number to be deleted or type the number zero (0) to delete all.
Just take it off
This option allows you to withdraw cash without stating the destination of the money. The withdrawal
It will only appear in the cash report, for control.
We do not recommend using this option, as there is no information on the destination of the withdrawn money.

227
Check (F7)
In this tab, you can issue and withdraw cash checks and make transfers to other cash drawers or
bank accounts.
Current Value
In this field, the total value in cash checks contained in the cash register will be displayed. This option only
it will appear when you move the cash using the Move Cash button and Check Totals.
Add Check(s)
This screen allows you to enter checks into the cash register.

To add a check to the register:

• Click on the icon or press the Ctrl key and the plus sign (+) on the numeric keypad;
• It will open the screenAdd Checks:
• On this screen, provide the following information:
Client: Select the client who is making the payment with the check.
Bank: Report or locate the check's bank number.
Cheque Nº.:Informe o número do cheque do cliente.
Agency: Please provide the agency code
C.C: Please provide the checking account number.
DV1: Enter the verification digit 1 of the check.
DV2: Enter the check digit 2.
Third: Enter the name of the check owner, if it is not the selected client.
Valor:Informe o valor do cheque.
Ok
Click this button to launch the check on the grid.
New
Click this button to clear the data entered in the fields and add a new check.
in grade.
Turn off
Click this button to delete the check(s) entered in the grid, before Confirming the
Movement (F2).
To cancel a check:
• Click the Erase button;
• Enter the line number you want to delete, or type (0) zero to delete all lines.
• Press OK.
F2 - Confirm
Click this button or press F2 to confirm the cash movement.
ESC - Cancel
Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the launch screen and cancel the movement.
Withdraw Check(s)
This screen allows you to withdraw the checks contained in the cash register.

To withdraw one or more check(s) from the cash register:

• Click on the icon or press the Ctrl key and the subtraction sign (-) on the numeric keypad;
• It will open the screenWithdraw Checks:

228
 • Find the checks you want to withdraw from the cashier.
• Provide the destination of the check.
• Press F2 to confirm the withdrawal of the check.
To find the check(s), you can fill in the following fields:
Options
In this panel, you can search for checks by period or by check number.
Issue of: Check this box to search for checks by issue date. Next to
report the start date and the end date for the research.
Number: This field can be used to search for a check by its number.
Find (F6)
Click this button to show the search result.
The following information about the Check will be shown: Client, Name,
Código e Nome do Banco, Agência, Núm. do Cheque, Valor e Vencimento.
To withdraw one or more check(s) from the cash register:
• Select the check(s) you want to withdraw;
• Click the Add check(s) button in the grid (Ctrl+A);
Check the selected checks through the fields:
Totals Found: This table will show the quantity and the total value of Checks
found.
Selected Totals: This field will show the quantity and total value of the checks that
They are on the board Selected checks, to be cashed.
If you want to withdraw any check from the selection:
• In the Selected Checks section, select the check(s) you wish to remove from the selection;
• After selecting the checks that will be withdrawn, click on the Delete Check(s) button.
to grade (Ctrl+E).
After checking the checks to be withdrawn, in the destination field, select a checking account.
Other cash register (Available only for Corporate versions), Exchange check for cash.
It can also be done between boxes from different branches.
Checking Account
Select this option to issue the checks to the bank account. By selecting this option
fill in the following fields:
Current Account: Inform the current account where the checks will be issued.
Consolidated: Check this option for the check amounts to appear as available,
no current consolidated balance.
Outro box
Select this option to transfer the checks to another cash register. By selecting this option
fill in the following fields: Branch and Cash Register
F2 - Confirm
Press the F2 key to confirm the cash movement.
ESC - Cancel
Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the launch screen and cancel the movement.

Pre-Cheque (F8)
In this tab, you can issue and withdraw pre-printed checks from the cash register through transfers to others.
boxes or bank accounts.

229
 Valor Atual
In this field, the total amount in pre-printed checks contained in the cash register will be displayed. This option only
It will appear when you move the cash using the Move Cash and Check Totals button.
Add Check(s) Pre
Esta tela permite inserir cheques no caixa.
To add a pre-check in the cash register:
• Click on the icon or press the Ctrl key and the plus sign (+) on the numeric keyboard;
• It will open the Add Check(s) Pre screen;
• On this screen, provide the following information:
Client: Select the client;
Bank: Report or locate the bank of the check;
Cheque Nº:Informe o número do cheque do cliente;
Agency: Enter the agency code;
C.C: Please provide the checking account number;
DV1: Enter the check's verification digit 1;
DV2: Enter the verification digit 2 of the check;
Third: Enter the name of the check owner, if it's not the selected customer;
Value: Enter the amount. In the case of installments, enter the total of the checks;
Report the date of the first pre-check.
Divide into: For the issuance of installment payments with checks, inform how many checks
the total amount will be divided.
Interval: Please specify the interval for each pre-check, in days;
• Then click OK;
• This check will be displayed on the screen.
Click this button to launch the pre-check in the grid.
New: Click this button to clear the data entered in the fields and add a new one.
check on the grid.
Delete: Click this button to delete the selected check(s) from the grid, before
Confirm the Transaction (F2).
To delete the pre-check(s):
• Click the Delete button;
• Enter the line number you wish to delete, or type (0) zero to delete all lines;
• Press OK.
F2 - Confirm
Press the F2 key on the keyboard to confirm the cash movement.
ESC - Cancel
Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the launch screen and cancel the movement.
Withdraw Pre Check(s)
This screen allows you to remove the checks contained in the cash register.

The operation of this screen is the same as the Cheque Withdrawal screen, explained earlier.

230
Debit Card (F9)
In this tab you can add values from the Debit Card(s) in cash.
Current Value
This field will display the total amount in debit cards contained in the cash register. This option only
it will appear when you move the cash using the Move Cash button and Check Totals.
Add Debit Card(s)
This screen allows adding debit cards at the checkout.
To add a card at the checkout:
• Click on the icon or press the Ctrl key and the plus sign (+) on the numeric keypad;
• It will open the screenAdd Debit Card(s):
• On this screen, provide the following information:
Client: Select the client who is making the payment with the card.
Admin.: Select the card administrator.
Card No: Enter the card number.
Valor:Informe o valor a ser debitado do cartão.
OK: Click this button to add the debit card to the grid.
New: Click this button to clear the data entered in the fields and add a new one
debit card in the grid.
Delete: Click this button to delete the debit cards from the grid, before Confirming the
Movement (F2).
To delete a debit card:
• Click the Delete button.
• Please enter the line number you wish to delete, or type (0) zero to delete all lines;
• Press OK.
Totals
Show the total number of SelectedFound cards.
Found: This field will display the total value of the debit cards that are in
Checks found.
Selected: This field will display the total value of the debit cards that are in
selected checks.
F2 - Confirm
Press the F2 key to confirm the cash movement.
ESC - Cancel
Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the launch screen and cancel the movement.

Credit Card (F10)

In this tab, you can add or remove credit card amounts from the cash register.
Current Value
This field will display the total value in credit cards contained in the cash register. This option only
It will appear when you move the cash using the Move Cash button and Check Totals.
Add Credit Card(s)
This screen allows you to add credit cards at the checkout.

231
 Para adicionar um cartão de crédito no caixa:
• Click on the icon or press the Ctrl key and the plus sign (+) on the numeric keypad;
• It will open the Add Credit Card(s) screen:
• On this screen, provide the following information:
Client: Select the client who is making the payment with the card.
Administ.: Select the card administrator.
Card No: Enter the card number.
Valor:Informe o valor total da operação.
Divide into: Inform how many times the card will be installment.
Okay: Click this button to add the credit card to the grid.
New: Click this button to clear the data entered in the fields and add a new one
credit card in the grid.
Delete: Click this button to delete the credit cards from the grid, before Confirming the
movement (F2).
To cancel a credit card:
• Click the Delete button.
• Please enter the number of the line you wish to delete;
• Press OK.
F2 - Confirm
Press the F2 key on the keyboard to confirm the cash movement.
ESC - Cancel
Press the ESC key on the keyboard to exit the launch screen and cancel the movement.

Vale (F11)
In this tab, you can make credit and debit transactions of cash vouchers (for example:
food and meal). Allows generating accounts receivable, payable, and transfers to others.
boxes or bank accounts.
Current Value
In this field, the total value in vouchers contained in the cash register will be displayed. This option will only appear
when moving the cash using the Move Cash button and Check Totals.
Amount Transacted
In this field, select the type of transaction that will be made at the cash register:
The functioning of this tab is the same as that of the Money tab, explained earlier.

Finalizing the Transactions

After launching all the desired movements, across the different tabs, please provide the
seguintes dados:
Movement Description
Enter information about the movement. This description will be shown in the reports of
box.
Confirm Movement (F2)
Click this button to finalize the cash movement.

232
1RUPDOWKH
V\VWHP
FDOFXODWHV
WKH
EDODQFH
6HOHFW
WKLV
RSWLRQ
IRUWKH
V\VWHP
WRFDOFXODWH

5HWXUQV
DQGEDODQFH
ZLOO
EHUHSRUWHG
WKHUHPDLQGHU
LVIRUVDOH
7KLVRSWLRQ
DOORZV
\RX WR
LQIRUPWKH

6DOH
DQGEDODQFH
ZLOO
EHLQIRUPHG
WKH
UHPDLQGHU
LVDUHIXQG7KLVRSWLRQ
DOORZV
\RX WR
LQIRUP

6KRZ3KRWR
$YDLODEOH
RQO\IRU&RUSRUDWH
YHUVLRQV

3URFHHG

3URGXFW
7KLVFROXPQ
VKRZV
WKH
SURGXFW
FRGH
1RPH(VWDFROXQD
PRVWUD
RQRPHGRSURGXWR
3UHYLRXV
EDODQFH
7KLVFROXPQ
VKRZV
WKH
EDODQFH
RIWKH
SURGXFW
ERUURZHG
E\ WKH
FXVWRPHU
1HZ /RDQ ,Q WKLV
FROXPQ\RX FDQPDNHDQHZORDQ
RISURGXFWV
IRUWKH
FXVWRPHU

9HQGDV1HVWD
FROXQD
LQIRUPH
D TXDQWLGDGH
GHSURGXWRV
D VHUHP
IDWXUDGRV

8QLWiULR(VWD
FROXQD
PRVWUD
RSUHoR
XQLWiULR
GRSURGXWR
6L]H 7KLVFROXPQ
VKRZV
WKH
VL]H
FRGHIRUSURGXFWV
ZLWK
DUDQJH
Bank Transactions
On this screen, you can make entries related to the movement of the bank account(s) of
company. You can use this screen to control bank balances, check transactions and
pre-check, consolidated and non-consolidated and also generate payments or receipts
made directly to the account.
To use this screen, it is necessary to have pre-registered the bank account in the Registration module.
Basic Menu in Bank Accounts.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Bank menu, in the Launch option.

Configure this screen

On this screen, configure the permissions for the use of bank transactions.
General
In this tab, choose the permissions you want to grant for the use of the bank entry screen.
Generate Received Invoice
When crediting the bank account, you will have the option to generate a received invoice. Select
one of the options below:
Do not allow: Check this option to prevent generating an accounts receivable. In this case, there will be
only entered data that is on the Launch screen: account, date, value, description, etc.
Allow: Check this option to allow the employee to choose between making the entry or
generate an incoming invoice.
Require: Check this option to make the generation of a received account mandatory when making the
bank transaction. Therefore, he must inform the client and the chart of accounts. If not
with this data in hand, it will be possible to launch an Unidentified Account.

Bill Paid
When debiting the bank account, you will have the option to generate a paid invoice. Select one.
the options below:
Do not allow: Check this option to not allow generating a paid account. In that case, there will be
lançados apenas dados que estão na tela de Lançamento: conta, data, valor, descrição, etc.
Allow: Check this option to allow the employee to choose between making the entry or
create a paid account.
Require: Check this option to make it mandatory to generate a paid account when making the
bank transaction. Therefore, he must inform the supplier to whom he made the payment,
and the chart of accounts.

Options
This option speeds up bank entries, as it avoids retyping. In this menu, select the
fields that you wish to keep filled, after completing the first bank entry of the session.
You can choose the following fields Keep account, Keep date, and Keep Doc Type.

234
How to register a bank transaction
Below we will explain how to register debit and credit entries on the entries screen.
bankers.
Account: In this field, locate the bank account where the amount will be recorded.
Report the date.
Example: In the case of credit, inform the date the deposit was made, as it appears in your
bank statement. For debits already made, provide the date when it was carried out, in the case of
check issuance please provide the due date.
Description: Provide a description regarding the launch.
Doc Type: In this field, select the type of receipt or payment that will be recorded.
• Check: Select this option to report the accounts listed as checks.
• Pre-check: Select this option to inform the accounts registered as pre-check.
• Select this option to inform the accounts recorded as Doc.
• Ted: Select this option to report the accounts listed as Ted.
• Document number: Enter the document number in this field.
Value: In this field, indicate whether you are recording a credit or a debit.

Credit
Select this option to add a value or generate a received invoice. Next to it will be a
field to inform the amount that will be added to the bank account.
Debit
Select this option to launch a charge on the account or generate a paid invoice. Next to it, there will be a
field to inform the amount that will be withdrawn from the bank account.

Consolidated
Select this option if the amount has already been credited to the bank account. If the amount
if it has not been compensated, leave it unchecked and later use the routines of
consolidation.
This option should be used for the control of consolidated and non-consolidated balance of
bank accounts.
Received Invoice
Select this option to generate a received invoice for the amount being credited.
banco. Essa opção irá aparecer caso tenha selecionado a opçãoCrédito,no campoValor.
By checking this option, click on the icon. , to open the screen where the data will be entered for the
received account or press Alt+F12 to open and close the screen. In this screen provide the following
data:
Define unidentified account
Select this option to launch an account that has not yet been identified, allowing you to
subsequently link this launch to an account receivable.
Example: Contains a deposit in the company's account that has not yet had the depositor.
identified, in this case, you can enter the account in the system as unidentified. Upon identifying
Whoever made the deposit can link this account with a sale, received in installments.
Account information
Select this option to provide the received account data.
Client: In this field, inform the client who made the payment.
Plan3: Provide the chart of accounts related to this account.

235
 Description: Provide a description regarding the receipt of this bill. In the case of
Account launch as Unidentified this option will be disabled.
Gera Conta Paga
Select this option to generate a paid account for the amount being withdrawn from the account.
banking. This option will appear if you have selected the Debit option in the Value field.
, to open the screen where the data will be entered
When selecting this option, click on the icon
conta paga ou pressioneAlt+F12para abrir e fechar a tela.
On this screen, provide the following information: Supplier, Plan3, and Description.

Consolidated Balances
This table shows the balance considering only the amounts that are consolidated in the
bank accounts, that is, those that have already been cleared.
The values will be displayed after saving the entry or when locating an entry.
Previous consolidated: This field will show the balance prior to this entry.
only the consolidated values are considered.
Current consolidated: This field will show the current consolidated balance, after the
launch in the account.
Unconsolidated Balances
This table shows the total balance, considering the consolidated and non-consolidated values of
bank accounts.
Previous Unconsolidated: This field will show the balance prior to the entry.
considering consolidated and unconsolidated values.
Current Non-Consolidated: This field will display the current non-consolidated balance, after the
release in the account.

Subsidiary Cash Flow

In this field, you can specify the branch that will be used as a filter in the cash flow report.
of the finance. By entering zero or leaving it blank, the bank transaction will appear for all
the branches.

Search (F11)
Click this button to locate the bank transactions.
On this screen you can search with the following data:
Account
In this field, enter the account in which you wish to locate the transactions, or leave it blank to
search everywhere.
General
In this tab, you will find some filling options for searching the entries.
bancários: Data, Tipo Doc, Num. Doc, Descrição, Mostrar Consolidados, Mostrar Não
{"consolidated":"Consolidated","show_deductions":"Show entries made with debits","show_entries":"Show entries made"}
with credits.
Value
In this tab, you can locate the entries by value through the following options.
All: This option is checked by default and will show entries with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the filter by value.

236
 Equal: It will only show the entries that have the value equal to the one entered.
It will show all entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show all the entries that have a value lower than the one entered.
Search (F2)
Click this button for the system to search the entries with the provided data.
A screen will appear with all the found entries. To open the desired entry
click on the line, or find it with the arrow keys on the keyboard.
This screen will show a maximum of the first 500 entries found with the
requested research.
Cancel (Esc)
Click this button or press Esc to cancel the search and close the screen.
Search Result
At the bottom of the bank transactions screen, the transactions will be displayed.
found with the following data:
Origin: Shows the origin of the bank transaction. See more details below.
This field shows the balance before posting, with the non-consolidated value.
Previous Balance: This field shows the balance prior to the entry, with the consolidated amount.
This field shows the release date in account.
Account: This field shows the bank account code to which the entry was made.
Desc.: Este campo mostra a descrição referente à conta.
Credit: This field shows the amount that has been added to the account.
Debit: This field shows the amount that was withdrawn from the account.
Current NC: This field shows the current account balance with the non-consolidated amount.
Current Balance: This field shows the account balance only with the consolidated amount.
Cons.: This field shows whether the entry is consolidated or not.
Origin
Click on this column to check the bank transaction history.
Select / Deselect
Click this icon to select all the entries found in the search. This option
it can be used to transform all entries into consolidated or not
consolidated.
Consolidated
Click on this icon to turn the selected entry/entries into consolidated.
Not Consolidated
Clique neste ícone para transformar o(s) lançamento(s) selecionado(s) em não consolidado(s).
Turn off
Click this button to delete a bank entry.
To delete an entry:
• Localize and select the entry you want to delete;
• Click the Delete button.

237
Clean (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the entry.

238
Transfers between Bank Accounts
This screen is used for making transfers of checks, doc, ted, cards, and others between accounts.
banking.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the menuBank on the option Transfers between bank accounts.

It accounts
In this section, provide the details of the source account that will be used to make the transfer.
Source Account: In this field, locate the source account from which the amount will be debited.

For the bill

In this box, provide the information of the destination account that is being used for the other.
Destination account: In this field, locate the destination account that will receive the transfer.
In both frames, you can inform the following options:
Doc Type
In this field, select the type of document that will be transferred to the other account or leave it.
in white.
Check: Select this option for transfers with check.
Pre-check: Select this option for transfers with pre-check.
Select this option for transfers with Doc.
Ted: Select this option for transfers with Ted.
Debit card: Select this option for transfers with a debit card.
Credit card: Select this option for transfers with a credit card.
Others: Select this option for transfer in another way.
Doc. Number
In this field, enter the number of the document generated by the transfer or leave it blank.
Consolidated
Select this option if the amount has already been credited to the bank account. If the amount
if you have not been compensated, leave this option unchecked and later use the routines of
consolidation.
This option should be used for the control of consolidated and unconsolidated balance of
bank accounts.
Amount to be transferred between the accounts
In this field, enter the amount that will be transferred between the accounts.
Carry out transfer (F2)
Click this button to confirm the transfer.

239
Transfer of the Account to the Cashier
This screen is used to make transfers of amounts from the bank account to the cash register.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Bank menu, on the option Transfer from the account to the cash register.

Make it count
In this box, please provide the details of the bank account from which the amount will be withdrawn.

Source Account
In this field, locate the source account to transfer the values.
Document Type
In this field, you can only select the Others type to make the transfer to the cash register.
or leave it blank.
Others: When selecting this option, there will be a field next to it to specify the type of transfer.

Document Number.
In this field, enter the number of the document generated by the transfer or leave it blank.
Consolidated
Select this option if the amount has already been cleared in the bank account. If the amount
if it has not been compensated, leave this option unchecked and later use the routines of
consolidation.
This option should be used for the control of consolidated and unconsolidated balances of
bank accounts.
Descrição
In this field, enter a description related to the transfer you are going to make.

For the cash register

In this frame, locate the box that will receive the transfer amount.
Amount to be transferred
In this field, enter the amount that will be transferred to the cash register.

Make transfer (F2)

Click this button to confirm the transfer.

240
Unidentified Account
This screen is used to link the deposit entries made in the bank account, as not
identified, to one or more installments.
Example: a customer made the payment of a installment through a deposit into the account, but
sent the receipt identifying themselves only a few days later. With this option, the
the deposit launch can be recorded on the day it appears on the statement (as account not
identified) and subsequently the installment will be removed through the identification on this screen.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Bank menu, in the option Set unidentified account.

Identifying an Account
To link an account, locate the bank deposit that generated an unidentified account.
You can use the following fields to locate the deposit:
Account: You can use this field to locate the unidentified entries of a
determined account.
By Value: Select this field to locate the unidentified deposit by a
determined value. In this field, you can use the equal sign (=), greater than or equal to (>=) or
less than or equal to (<=) to locate the installment amount. In the adjacent field, enter the desired amount.
By Data: Select this field to locate the unidentifiable deposit for a period of
data.
By Recording Date: Select this field to locate the deposit not identified by the date
of recording in the system.
By Doc Type: Select this field to locate the deposit not identified by type of
document (check, pre-check, Doc, Ted, Debit Card, Credit Card and Others).
By Doc number: Select this field to locate the unidentified deposit
document number.
By description: Select this field to locate the deposit not identified by the description
of the launch.
Encontrar (F11)
Click this button to list all unidentified deposits posted.

Found Releases
Check the following information from the found deposits:
Show: Click on this column to check more details about the unidentified accounts.
Account: This column shows the bank account number.
Name: This column shows the name of the bank account.
Recording: This column shows the date the deposit was recorded.
This column shows the date that was filled in the date field during the deposit entry.
Description: This column shows the description provided at the time it was generated.
deposit.
Value: This column shows the value of the unidentified deposit.
Doc. Number: This column shows the document number of the deposit.
Doc Type: This column shows the type of the deposit document.

241
 Others: Shows the description provided when selecting the document type as
Others.
Identify Launch (F2)
Select a deposit and click this button to link it to an installment.

Selected Bank Transaction

In this screen, you will need to locate the installment to link with the selected deposit.

Search options for the accounts

In this box, you can fill in the following information to locate the desired installment:
Value: In this field you can use the equal sign (=), greater than or equal to (>=) or less than or equal to
(<=) to locate the installment amount. In the adjacent field, enter the desired amount.
Installment: In this field, you can provide the installment number that will be linked to the deposit.
Maturity: In this field you can search for open installments over a period, to do so
report the period in the fields next to it.
Find Accounts (F11)
Click here to find the installments related to the sale.
Accounts found
In this table, all the installments will be listed according to the provided data. You may link
this deposit to one or more installments. To do this, select the desired installment, if there is more than one.
a parcel, press Ctrl or Shift.
Origin: Click on the desired line in this column to check the origin of the installment.
Client: This column shows the client's code.
Cliente nome:Esta coluna mostra o nome do cliente.
Description: This column shows the description of the output.
Due Date: This column shows the due date of the installment.
Total amount: This column shows the total amount of the installment.
Selected Quantity
This field will display the number of selected installments.
Selected Account(s) Value
This field shows the total value of the selected installment(s).
Value that is missing / surplus
This field shows the value of the bank transaction. To make the identification, the value of the
installments must equal the value of the bank transaction.
• This field will turn red when the installment values are less than the launch value.
banking.
• This field will turn black when the installment amount is equal to the amount of the entry.
banking.
• This field will turn blue when the installment value is greater than the launch value.
banking.
Confirm Identification (F2)
Click this button to confirm the identification of the parcel(s).
Cancel (Esc)
Click this button to cancel the identification and return to the screen with the bank entries.

242
Accounts Payable Releases
On this screen, you can make entries for new accounts payable, consult, and modify accounts.
existing.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Pay menu in the Launch option.

Configure this Screen

Nesta tela configure as permissões para o uso dos lançamentos de contas a pagar.
If the user has permission to change account
(Available only for the Corporate versions)
In this frame, choose one of the permissions mentioned below to alter the accounts on the screen of
Accounts Payable Launches.
Attention: The employee must be authorized to use this screen and the permissions have already been granted.
must be defined.
Allow changes at will: This option allows the employee to create and modify all accounts.
When consulting the accounts payable, the employee will be able to change all the information contained in the
cloth.
Allow altering only manual entries: This option allows the employee to create
new accounts on the Accounts Payable Launch screen change only the entered accounts
directly on this screen. The accounts related to purchases, or generated through other screens, do not
may be changed.
Allow altering only the accounts they created: This option allows the employee to create and
change only the installments generated by it, through the shopping screen and by the screen of
releases.
Standard Chart of Accounts
Determine a standard chart of accounts to be used in the account entry screen.
The chart of accounts can be changed at the time of entry.

Options
This option streamlines the entry of multiple accounts, as it prevents re-entering. In this menu, select
the fields you want to keep filled in after completing the first entry of the session,
you can choose to Maintain branch, Maintain Supplier, Maintain Chart of Accounts and Maintain
Issuance.

How to register a new account payable

Below we will explain how to manually register accounts on the account entry screen.
to pay.
Branch: In this field, enter the code of the branch where you want to book the accounts payable.
Supplier: In this field, enter the supplier code.
Issue: In this field, provide the date of account issuance.
Due date: In this field, provide the due date of the bill.
Competence: In this field, inform the date corresponding to the use of the service or product
comprado, para que apareça no mês correto no relatório Demonstrativo de Resultados (DRE).
Example: The phone bill due in March had its consumption used

243
 in the month of February, in this case, inform the date of consumption of the bill. If this field is not
filled in the system considers on the due date for the issuance of the report.
Description: In this field, provide the description related to the manual entry.
Plan 3: In this field, the chosen default chart of accounts will appear. Select another one.
if you wish to change.
Data Pag.: In this field, provide the date on which the account was paid. Fill out this field
only if the invoice being issued has already been paid.
Valor Pago:Neste campo informe o valor pago. Preencha esse campo somente se a conta que
it is being released already paid. In paid accounts, the Paid amount field can also be
altered, but this must be the same as the value provided in the total field. In the case of the launch of
a different value, use the fields in the Value box (such as discount and surcharge) to
adjust the total amount.
C. of Cost: This field is used to inform the expenses incurred by sector.
Attention: We do not recommend filling out or altering the fields Date Page Value Pag,
they will be filled in automatically when maintaining the account.
Activation: This field will show the date when the account was closed in the system.
considering the Windows date.
Value
In this box, inform the value of the invoice being generated.
Valor:Neste campo informe o valor original da conta.
Discount: In this field, specify the amount of the discount provided.
Interest: In this field, specify the interest that will be added to the account entry.
Fine: In this field, inform the fine that will be added to the account entry.
Total:Neste campo será mostrado o valor total da conta.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the data entered on this screen.

How to check and change an account

To consult an account, first locate it, as we will explain below.
Search (F11)
Click this button to find the accounts.
General
In this tab, fill in the fields you want for the location of the entries or leave it empty.
white to search in everyone.
Filial:Neste campo informe o código da filial.
Issuance of: In this field you can search for accounts by issuance date, selecting by
period.
Due date: In this field you can search the accounts by due date, selecting by
period.
Payment. From: In this field you can search the accounts by payment date, selecting by
period.
Fornecedor:Neste campo informe o fornecedor.
Nota Fiscal:Neste campo informe o número da nota fiscal.

244
Sequence: In this field, enter the sequence generated by the Inputs screen.
Plano Contas:Neste campo selecione o plano de contas desejado.
Description: In this field, provide the description that is included.

Type
In this box, select the type of account you wish to check.
All: Select this option to show all the accounts that have been paid and those that have not.
Payments: Select this option to show only the bills that have been paid.
Unpaid: Select this option to show only the bills that have not been paid yet.
Value
In this tab, you can locate the entries by value through the following options:
All: This option is checked by default and will show entries with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the value filter.
Equal: It will only show the entries that have the value equal to the one entered.
Superior: It will show the entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show the entries that have a value lower than the one entered.

Search Result
Click on Search (F2) for the system to search for the entries with the provided data, or
Press Esc to cancel the search and close the screen.
When pressing F2, a screen will appear with the found entries. They will be shown, in
maximum, the first 500.
The data shown in the results list will be:
Origin: Shows the origin of the accounts payable posting. For more information, consult
the chapter Tips for Use.
Issuance: This column shows the date of issuance of the bill.
Supplier: This column shows the supplier code.
Description: This column shows the description provided at the time the account was posted
or the entry information.
Valor Total:Esta coluna mostra o valor total da parcela.
Due Date: This column shows the due date.
Valor Pago:Esta coluna mostra o valor pago, caso a conta já tenha sido paga.
Payment Date: This column shows the payment date, if the bill has already been paid.
Payment Method: This column shows the type of payment for the account, if you wish to check more
payment details click on the gray field.
To open the desired account, click on the line, or find it using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Account Situation
In this section, you can check the status of the account payable.
Originated from a purchase: This option will be checked when the account refers to a
purchase made through the Inputs screen.
Originated from another payment: When renegotiating an account with a supplier, extending the
due date, this must be located in the system and downloaded through (the receipt) with
one or more installments with the newly negotiated dates. These installments, generated, will have this option
marked, as it was originated from a payment.

245
 Renegotiated: This option will be checked if your payment has been made through a
new or more installments, that is, a renegotiation. Whenever this option is selected, the
the bill will be shown as paid.
Preliminary Check: This option will be checked if the payment of the bill has been made with
pre-check
Expected Account (Available only for Corporate versions): This option will appear
marked, when the account refers to a payment forecast made through an order
from the entry screen. These accounts will not appear in the accounts payable reports, only
after being converted into a real account.
Inf. Entry
In this panel, you can check information about the installments generated on the Entries screen.
Sequence: Shows the number of the input sequence.
Note: Shows the invoice number of the purchase.
Account Cancelled
Check this option to cancel an account, that is, so that it does not appear in the reports of
accounts payable. Then, provide the reason for cancellation in the field that will appear
below.
When selecting this option, the information for Client / Supplier will appear in the registration.
account canceled.
Record (F2)
Click this button after creating or changing the accounts payable data.

Smart Menu
The smart menu is located at the bottom right of the screen. By clicking on the icon, it will be
the following options are shown:
Accounts payable count: Shows the total accounts payable. This information will appear in
footer, on the left side of the screen.
Show all the expected bills: Click this button to check the expected bills
registered.

246
Accounts Payable Maintenance
On this screen, make the payment of accounts payable. The payment can be total, partial or still
renegotiated, through various means: such as cash, check, card, supplier credit,
installments, among others. It also allows you to inform the value of interest, penalty, and discount.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the menuPay, in the optionMaintenance.

Configure this Screen

On this screen, configure the permissions for using the maintenance screen.

General
Configure this tab with the options that will be allowed for the maintenance of accounts payable.
After making the payment
Choose which configuration will be used after the bill is paid.
Return to the beginning: Select this option to return to the maintenance home screen.
payment.
Return to selection (clearing the field information): Select this option to return to
screen with search options.
Back to selection (keeping the field information): Select this option to go back to
screen with search options, keeping the informed data, that is, the system will bring the last
typed information.
Return to the account selection grid (it gets slower): Select this option to return to the screen
of the search result.
Maximum
In this panel, configure the maximum percentage of discount, interest, and fine that the employee
you will be able to inform for the account cancellation.

Installment plan
The system allows you to pay a bill by generating another installment that characterizes a
renegotiation. In this tab, you can set the deadlines, days, and intervals for making payments.
plots.
Checks
In this tab, define the deadlines, days, and intervals for making payments by check.
payment by check is characterized as renegotiation, as continuity will be given to
account monitoring through check control.

Find Accounts
Nesta aba serão mostradas as opções de busca. Preencha os itens que deseja utilizar como filtro
for the search of the accounts you want to delete.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch where you wish to locate the accounts.
By Supplier: Checking this option will display a field next to it to select the
supplier.
By value: Checking this option will display the fields for filling in next to it.
Select one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal to (>=) or less than or equal to (<=) and next to it
please provide the reference for the value you wish to locate.

247
By due date: By selecting this option, fields will appear next to inform the
period.
For issuance: By checking this option, fields will appear next to it to inform the period.
you want to locate the accounts by issue date.
By note: By marking this option, a field will appear next to it to inform the note number
fiscal, to locate the account.
By Description: By checking this option, a field will appear next to it to provide the description.
desired.
By Sequence: Checking this option will display a field next to it to specify the sequence.
welcome.
Type
In this section, select which type of accounts you want to find.
All: Select this option to show Paid and Unpaid accounts.
Payments: Select this option to show only the Paid accounts.
Not Paid: Select this option to show only the Not Paid bills.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.
Accounts Found
In this tab, the found accounts will be listed; select one or more accounts to proceed.
low.
The following account information will be displayed:
Origin: Shows the origin of the accounts payable launch. For more information, consult the
chapter Usage Tips.
Vencimento:Esta coluna mostra a data de vencimento da conta.
Description: This column shows the description provided at the time the invoice was generated.
or the entry information.
Supplier: This column shows the supplier's code.
Supplier name: This column shows the name of the supplier.
Valor:Esta coluna mostra o valor total da conta.
Desconto:Este campo mostra o desconto informado na conta.
Interest: This field shows the interest informed on the account.
Fine: This field shows the fine indicated on the account.
Amount Paid: This column shows the amount paid, if the bill has already been paid.
Payment Date: This column shows the payment date, if the bill has already been paid.
This column shows the entry sequence number.
Note: This column shows the invoice number.
Competence: This field shows the month that the account will be considered in the report.
Income statement.
Selected quantity
This field shows the total amount of the selected accounts.
Selected Account(s) Value
This field shows the total value of the selected accounts.

248
 Pay Bill(s) (F2)
Click this button to inform the payment method for the selected account(s).
Cancel Payment (ESC)
Click this button or press ESC to cancel the bill payment and return to the screen
initial.

Payment Information
When selecting only one account, the following information will be displayed, which may be
visualized and altered:
Due Date: Shows the due date of the account.
Competence: Shows the date corresponding to the use of the purchased service or product.
This will be the date considered in the Income Statement (DRE).
Note: In this field, you can provide the invoice number.
Plan 3: Shows the chart of accounts provided in the account entry.
Description: Shows the description provided at the account launch.
History: This field will be filled with the same information from the Description field. It may
change this field with a note regarding the payment.
Value: Shows the account balance. This can only be changed by filling out the
fields of increments and discounts.
Desconto:Neste campo informe o desconto fornecido no pagamento da conta.
Interest: In this field, inform the interest charged on the payment of the bill.
Penalty: In this field, inform the penalty charged for the payment of the bill.
If you select two or more accounts, the following information will be displayed, which may be
visualized and altered:
Change the plan for all accounts to
Select this option to change the account plan for all selected accounts. Next to
the field Plan 3 will appear to inform the new chart of accounts.
History: This field will be filled with the description, Deletion of several accounts. You may
provide a new description to be viewed across all accounts.
Discount: In this field, enter the discount provided for the payment of the bill.
Juros:Neste campo informe os juros cobrados no pagamento da conta.
Fine: In this field, provide the fine charged for the payment of the bill.

Discount
In this field, you can enter the discount amount at the time of account settlement, and it will be
limited to the maximum percentage set for the screen.
Amount Paid
In this field, state the amount that was paid.
If the amount paid is less than the bill amount, a screen will appear for a new one to be generated.
account for the missing amount, that is, a partial write-off.
Partial Refund
On this screen, you will need to provide the following information:

Due date: In this field, please enter the due date of the bill that will be generated with the
remaining amount.

249
Description: Provide a description for the new account being created.
Value: This field will display the amount of the invoice that will be generated.
Confirm: Click this button to generate the new account payable.
Cancel: Click this button to cancel the entry.
Data Page.
This field is automatically filled in with the current Windows date. This date
can be manually changed, or by clicking one of the buttons next to it.
Payment on time Click this button to fill in the field Payment Date with the date of
due date of the bill.
Payment today Click this button to fill in the Payment Date field with the date of
Windows.
Payment
In this field, select which payment methods are being used for the settlement.
release in the Employee registration, in the Permission tab, the payment methods that the
the employee will be able to use when settling the accounts payable.
The available payment methods are:
Cash: Select this option for payment made in cash.
When selecting this option, the Caixa field will appear next to it. In this field, provide the cash in the
When will the money be withdrawn.
Checking account: Select this option for payment made directly from the checking account.
By selecting this option, the fields Box and Bank will appear next to it. Provide the account
bank account from which the amount was debited. The cashier must be informed for control of the
payment receipts and statements, the daily withdrawal totals will appear on the screen of
Show table in totals (ALT+F11).
Advanced: This option allows you to make the payment of the installment using more than one method of
payment as: cheque(s), customer cheques, credit with suppliers and also
renegotiate the account generating a new installment.
For more details about payment with the Advanced option, see the chapter Screen of
Payment.
Indeterminate: This option allows you to pay the bill without informing the source of the
money. We do not recommend using this option, as there will be no account details on the screens and
in the other reports available in the system.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to complete the bill payment.
Back
Click this button to return to the Found Accounts screen.
Return to the home screen
Click this button to return to the account maintenance home screen.

250
Generate Accounts Payable
On this screen, you can make entries for multiple installments of accounts payable. This will make it easier for you.
release of fixed and installment monthly bills.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the menuPay on the optionGenerate Bills.
Branch: In this field, inform the branch where you want to enter the accounts payable.
Supplier: In this field, locate the supplier.
Plan 3: In this field, locate the chart of accounts related to the account being generated.
Description: In this field, enter a description for the account being created. This
description can be used to locate the account later.
Note: In this field, provide the invoice number.
Issue: In this field, provide the date of issuance of the first bill to be issued.
Initial due date: In this field, enter the due date of the bill.

Value
In this field, there will be the following options to inform the account value:

By parcel
Select this option to issue installments with the same value, with different due dates.
By total
Select this option to inform the total amount of the bill and the number of installments the system.
calculate the value of each installment.

Number of installments
In this field, specify the number of installments of the bill.

Upcoming due dates

In this field, select the due date for the installments.
Every day: Select this option to indicate the number of days of interval between the
plots.
The payments will be every 15 days, 30 days, 45 days.
All day: Select this option to launch the installments with fixed due dates for
each month in the field next to it. Example: The installments will always be due
on the same day of each month.

Add New Installment(s)

Click this button to add the installments in the box next to it.
Grade
In the accounts payable launch grid, you will be able to verify the following data of the installment:
Description: This field shows the description of the recorded installment.
Due date: This field is the due date of the installments.
Valor:Este campo mostra o valor de cada parcela.

251
Turn off the grid line
Click on this line to delete one of the lines and installments recorded in the table. By clicking on this
the button will open a screen to type the line you wish to delete.

Total value
This field will display the total amount of the installments entered in the table.

Total quantity
This field will show the total number of installments contained in the table.
Record (F2)
Click this button to record the accounts payable entries.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen and make a new entry.

252
Setting Up the Launch Screen
Accounts Receivable
In this screen, we will explain the configuration options for the account launch screens.
receive, cards, checks and ledger account.

General
Poderá escolher entre as seguintes opções:
If the user has permission to change account
(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this frame, choose one of the permissions mentioned below to change the accounts on the screen.
Check Issuances
Attention: The employee must be authorized to use this screen and the permissions have already been granted.
must be defined.
Allows changes at will: This option allows the employee to create and alter all checks.
When consulting the checks, the employee will be able to change all the information contained on the screen.
On this screen, the check amount field can also be changed.
Allows only manual entries to be changed: This option allows the employee to make entries
new checks on the Check Launch screen and only change the entered checks
directly on this screen. The checks related to exits, or generated through other screens, do not
may be changed.
Allow changing only the accounts that were created: This option allows the employee to record and
change only checks generated by him, through the output screen and through the entries screen.

Standard Chart of Accounts

Determine a standard chart of accounts to be used in the check entry screen.
The chart of accounts can be changed at the time of the entry.

253
Setting up the maintenance screen of
accounts receivable
In this screen we will explain the configuration options for account maintenance screens.
receive, cards, checks, and notebook account.

General
You can choose from the following options:
After receiving
Choose which settings will be used after receiving the bills.
Return to selection (clearing the information in the fields): Select this option to return to
Search options clearing the last selection made.
Return to selection (keeping the field information): Select this option to return to
Search options keeping the last selection made, that is, the system will bring the last one(s).
information(s) entered.
Return to the account selection grid (it gets slower): Select this option to return to the tab
Find Cards, that is, the search results screen.
Chart of Accounts admin fee: When processing a cancellation of a card/ agreement, the system generates
automatically a paid account, referring to the administrative fee of the card, with its respective
value.
In this field, inform which Billing Plan will be used when generating the paid account. If this ...
if the field is not filled, the system will generate the paid account with the chart of accounts 10008 -
Card Administration Fee.

Maximum
In this section, configure the percentage, maximum, in discounts, interest on fines for the employee.
you may inform for the cancellation of the accounts.

Payment in installments
The system allows the receipt of a card / agreement through a renegotiation generating installments.
In this tab, you can set the deadlines, days, and intervals for making payments in installments. The
receiving in installments is characterized as renegotiation, as it will continue to
account monitoring through accounts receivable control.
Maximum number of installments: In this field, specify the maximum number of installments that will be
you accept.
Maximum deadline in days: In this field, inform the maximum amount, in days, for the installments.
considering the total amount of the installments.

Type of interval
In this field choose the type of interval, standard, that will appear on the Recebimento screen. You will be able to
choose between:
Days: Selecting this option, please specify the number of days between the installments in the field
Standard Deadline. Example: The installments will be every 15 days, 30 days, 45 days.
Month(s): By selecting this option, indicate the quantity, in months, between the installments in the field
Standard Deadline. The due dates for the installments will be set for fixed days in each
month. Example: The installments will be every 1 month, 2 months, 3 months.
Allows changing the default range: Check this option to allow the range type.
the standard should be changed at the time of receipt.

254
 Type of installment:
In this field, select the type of installment that will be standard when generating an installment. The Types
They are: Bank Slip, Installment Book, and Wallet.
Allow changing: Select this option to allow the type of installment, default,
be changed at the time of receipt.

Checks
On this tab, define the deadlines, days, and intervals for processing payments by check. The
Receiving the card / agreement with a check is characterized as a renegotiation, as it will be given
continuity in account monitoring through check control.
Maximum number of checks: In this field, indicate the maximum quantity of checks that will be
accepted.
Maximum deadline in days: In this field, inform the maximum amount, in days, for the checks.
installments, considering the total number of installments. To allow receipt only
with cash check, enter the number 1.
Type of interval
In this field, choose the type of range that will be accepted for installment checks. You will be able to
choose between:
Day(s): By selecting this option, please specify the number of days between the checks in the field
Standard Deadline. Example: The checks will be every 15 days, 30 days, 45 days.
Month(s): By selecting this option, specify the quantity, in months, between the checks in the field
Standard Deadline. The due dates for checks will be set for fixed days in each
month. Example: The checks will be every 1 month, 2 months, 3 months.
Allow changing the default interval: Check this option to allow the interval type
standard, shall be changed at the time of receipt.

Cards
The system allows the receipt of a card/contract along with the receipt of another card.
credit or debit. This will be characterized as renegotiation.
In this tab, indicate the maximum number of installments that will be accepted for receipt with the
credit card, in the field Maximum number of installments.
Allows Debit Card: Select this option to allow receiving with a card
debit, on this screen.
Allow Credit Card: Select this option to permit payment by card
credit, on this screen.

255
Launch of Accounts Receivable
On this screen, you can make entries for new accounts receivable and consult generated accounts.
through other screens such as: sales screen, cash register screen, bank transaction screen. Allows
also change the existing accounts and check the received and not received accounts.
To open this screen:
• Select the option Financial;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Accounts Receivable option in Launch.

Configure this Screen

On this screen, configure the permissions for the use of accounts receivable entries.
For more information, consult the chapter Setting Up the Account Launch Screen
to receive.

Options
This option streamlines account entries as it avoids retyping. In this menu, select the
fields you wish to keep filled after completing the first entry of the session. You will be able to
choose the following fields, Maintain branch, Maintain Customer, Maintain Chart of Accounts,
Keeps Issuance, Keeps Installment Type.

How to register a new receivable account

Below we will explain how to register accounts manually on the account entry screen.
to receive.
Basics (Ctrl + F2)
In this tab, you can enter accounts receivable from customers.
To issue an accounts receivable, provide the following information:
Branch: In this field, provide the code of the branch where you want to record the accounts receivable.
Client: In this field, enter the customer code for which you wish to issue the receivable.
Issue: In this field, provide the date of the account issuance.
Due date: In this field, enter the due date of the bill.
This field will be automatically filled with the date that was renegotiated to
plot.
Effective Date: This field will be automatically filled with the date it was downloaded.
account.
Seller: Please provide the seller's code, or the code of the employee responsible for the entry.
Seller 2: In this field, enter the code of seller 2.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição referente ao lançamento manual.
Account plan 3: In this field, the chosen standard account plan will appear.
Select another, if you wish to change.
Data Rec.: In this field, enter the date of receipt of the bill. Fill in if the bill that
is being launched has already been received.
Received Amount: In this field, enter the amount received. Fill in if the account that is being
released has already been received.
Installment Type: In this field, select the type of installment, such as wallet, boleto.
banking, installment plan.

256
 Attention: We do not recommend filling out or altering the fields Receipt Date and Receipt Amount,
they will be filled in automatically when performing account maintenance.
Bank Slip
By selecting this option, you can click on the icon. , to open the screen where the information will be provided
account data entered or in
So press Alt+F12 to open and close the screen. Filling it out is optional.
Printed: This field will be automatically marked when printing the ticket through the system or when
generate the CNAB file.
Our Number: This field will be filled automatically upon receiving the return file
doCNAB. If you use another application to print tickets, you may provide the code.
in this field.
Account: Select the bank account for which the boleto was generated. Filling this out
field is required in manual entry.
Carnet
By selecting this option, you can click on the icon. to open the screen where the information will be provided
account data entered or press Alt+F12 to open and close the screen. It is optional to your
filling.
Print: Check this option to indicate that the booklet has been printed, next to it there will be a field.
to inform the print date. If it has been printed on the output screen, this field will be
filled in automatically.
You can print the payment booklet when launching the account. To do this:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the menu Receive in the option Accounts receivable in Reports/Print of installment.

Value
In this box, provide the value of the bill that is being generated.
Valor:Neste campo informe o valor original da conta.
Discount: In this field, provide the amount of the discount given.
Interest: In this field, indicate the interest that will be added to the account entry.
Fine: In this field, inform the fine that will be added to the account entry.
Total: This field will show the total amount of the bill, considering the discounts and
additions.
Record(F2)
Click this button to save the data entered on this screen.

How to Consult and Change an Account

To consult an account, first locate it as we will explain below.
Search (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.
General
In this tab, fill in the fields you wish for the location of the entries or leave it blank.
in blank to search in all.
Branch: In this field, enter the branch code.
Issuance of: You can search the accounts by issuance date, selecting by period.

257
Due Date: You can search the accounts by due date, selecting by period.
We receive. from: You can search for accounts by receipt date, selecting by period.
Client: Please provide the client in this field.
Invoice: In this field, provide the invoice number.
Sequence: In this field, enter the sequence number of the output.
Fiscal Coupon: In this field, enter the number of the fiscal coupon.
Seller: In this field, enter the seller's code.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição que consta.
Type
In this section, select the type of accounts you wish to check. The options for Types are: All,
Recebidas, Não recebidas, Somente os renegociados e Somente os descontados.
Value
In this tab you can find the entries by amount, through the following options.
All: This option is checked by default and will show the entries with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the value filter.
Equal: It will only show the entries that have the value equal to the one entered.
Superior: It will show the entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show the entries that have a value lower than the one typed.

Search Result
Click on Search (F2) for the system to search for the entries with the provided data, or
Press Cancel (Esc) to cancel the search and close the screen.
By pressing F2, a screen will appear with the found entries. They will be shown...
maximum, the first 500 results with the requested search. The data shown in the list of
resultados serão: Origem, Emissão, Cliente, Descrição, Valor Total, Vencimento, Valor
Received, Date of Receipt, Method of Receipt (if you wish to check more details of
click on the field for receipt
To open the desired account, click on the line, or find it using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
When selecting the account you want to check or change, the following fields will be displayed in the
fabric.
Filial:Este campo mostra o código e nome da filial.
Client: This field shows the code of the client you wish to enter the accounts receivable.
Issue: This field shows the account's release date.
Due Date: This field shows the account due date.
Due Date: This field shows the original date provided for the account's due date.
Effective date: This field will show the date the account was finalized.
Seller: This field shows the code of the seller, or the employee responsible for
launch.
Seller 2: This field shows the code of seller 2.
Descrição:Este campo mostra a descrição referente ao lançamento manual.
Account plan 3: This field will show the account plan chosen at the moment of
release.
Data Rec.: This field shows the date of receipt of the invoice.
Received Value: This field shows the value received.

258
 Type of Installment: This field shows the type of installment selected at the time of
launch. How: bank slip, wallet, installment book.
Value
This table will show the values of the generated bill.
Valor:Este campo mostra o valor da conta.
Discount: This field shows the value of the discount given.
Interest: This field shows the value of the interest.
Fine: This field shows the amount of the fine.
Total:Este campo mostra o valor total da conta.
Inf. Outputs
In this section, you can check information about the installments generated on the Exit screens.
Sequence: Shows the sequence number of the output.
Note: Show the invoice number.
Parcel: Shows the number of the parcel being queried.
Cupom:Mostra o número do cupom fiscal.
Fatura:Mostra o número da nota e o número da parcela.
Park. Description: Shows the number and total of divided installments.
Account Status
In this table, you can check the origin of the accounts receivable.
Originating from a sale: This option will be checked when the account refers to a
sale, made through the Sale screen / Outputs.
Originated from another receipt: This option will be checked when the account is originated
from a receipt, from an installment or another form of accounts receivable, through the generation of
new installments.
Renegotiated: This option will be checked if the installment has been received through
new installment(s), or other forms of payment that are not cash or checking account.
Whenever this option is selected, the account will be considered as received.
Account Cancelled
Check this option to cancel the account and also to not appear in the account reports.
receive. When selecting this option in the Customer / Supplier registration, information will appear.
of the canceled account, below this option there will be a field to provide the reason for
cancellation.
Record(F2)
After consulting, make the desired changes and click this button to save the data.

Billing Information (CTRL+F3)

(Available only for Corporate versions)
In this tab you can check the payment notifications made to the client about the account on
delay, through the Collection System.
Suspend billing: You may suspend the customer's account billing, for this select
this option.
For more information, see the chapter Billing System.

259
Accounts Receivable Maintenance
On this screen, process the accounts receivable. The receipt can be total, partial, or still
renegotiated, through various forms, such as: cash, check, card, customer credit.
It also allows you to inform the amount of interest, penalty, and discount.

To open this screen:

• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, on the Accounts Receivable option and in Launch.

Configure this Screen

For more information, consult the chapter Configuring the Account Maintenance Screen
to be received.

Search for Options (F3)

Click this button to open the search screen. Fill in the items that can be used.
as a filter for the account search.
Search Options
This tab will show the following search options:
Branch: In this field, provide the branch in which you wish to locate the accounts.
By client: When this option is checked, a field will appear next to it to select the client.
By value: By checking this option, the fields for filling out will appear next to it. Select
one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) and inform the reference
for the value you want to locate.
By due date: By selecting this option, the fields will appear next to inform you.
period during which you wish to locate the account.
For issuance: By selecting this option, fields will appear next to it for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the accounts.
Note: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it for you to enter the number of
invoice to locate the account.
By Description: Checking this option will display a field next to it to provide the description.
desired.
By Sequence: Checking this option will display a field next to it to indicate the sequence.
of the exit.
Only the renegotiated: Select this option to show only the accounts that were
renegotiated.
Only the discounted: Select this option to show only the accounts that were
discounted.
Type
In this frame, select what type of account you want to locate.
All: Select this option to show Received and Not Received accounts.
Received: Select this option to show only the Received accounts.
Not received: Select this option to show only the Not Received accounts.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.

260
 Cancel (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the search and return to the main screen.
Accounts Found
In this tab, the found accounts will be listed, select one or more accounts to proceed with the
low.
The following account information will be shown: Origin, Due Date, Description, Client,
Valor, Juros, Multa, Desconto, Valor Recebido, Data de Recebimento, Seqüência, Nota, Tipo
of Installment, Coupon and Discounted.
Impressions
In this tab you can make the following prints:
Invoice (Alt+F): Click this button or press Alt+F to issue an invoice for each account
selected.
Ticket (Alt+B): Click this button or press Alt+B to issue a ticket, configured in
system, according to the pre-printed form by the bank through a dot matrix printer.
Laser Ticket (Alt+L) (Available only for Corporate versions): Click this button
or press Alt+L to issue the boleto on a laser printer according to the bank's standard.
pre-configured in the system.
Attention: The receipt can only be printed from the account payment screen.
Selected quantity
This field shows the number of selected accounts.
Value of Selected Account(s)
This field shows the total value of the selected accounts.
Receive Account(s) (F2)
Click this button to proceed with the settlement of accounts receivable.

Cancel Receipt (ESC)

Click this button to cancel receiving the bills and return to the home screen.

Receiving Information
For more information, consult the chapter Concluding a Receipt.

Search for the Installment Number (F4)

You will be able to locate and cancel the tickets with barcodes generated by Shop Control 8.
through the report Issuance of Payment Slip with Barcode. You will be able to read the barcode
with a barcode reader or enter the number of the payment slip
Number
In this field, enter the barcode of the payment booklet or place the mouse cursor here.
field and read the barcode with the scanner.
In the table below, the account to make the write-off will appear, select an account for which you want to make the write-off.
down.

261
Group Accounts
On this screen, you can group several accounts receivable from a client to process the collection of
a single installment. By grouping the installments, it will be possible to offer discounts or renegotiate the installment.
grouped.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receber menu, in the Contas a Receber option, in Group Accounts.

Find Accounts / Search Options

This tab will show the search options. Fill in the items you wish to use as a filter.
for research.
Client: Inform the client that they want to locate the accounts. This field is required.
mandatory.
By Value: Checking this option will display the fields for filling in next to it.
Select one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) and inform it.
reference for the value you wish to locate.
By Due Date: By checking this option, the fields will appear next to it for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the account.
By Emission: By selecting this option, fields will appear next to it for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the accounts.
By Sequence: Selecting this option will display a field next to it to enter the sequence.
from the exit.

By Description: Checking this option will display a field next to it to provide the description.
desired.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.
Accounts Found
In this tab, the client's found accounts will be listed, select the accounts you want.
group.
The following account information will be shown: Origin, Due Date, Description, Client,
Valor, Valor Recebido, Data de Recebimento, Seqüência, Nota, Tipo de Parcelamento e
Coupon.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected accounts to the grid.
Back to Selection
Clique neste botão para voltar para a tela de busca. Esta opção permite fazer uma nova busca
the accounts keeping those that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Account(s)
In this panel, all selected accounts will be added. The following can be viewed:
Selected Quantity(s) and Value of Selected Account(s)
Remove from the Grid
Click this button to remove the selected accounts.
Cancel Grouping (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the account grouping and return to the main screen.

262
 Perform Grouping (F2)
Click this button to proceed with the grouping of the selected account(s).

Account Information to be Generated

In this tab, provide the data to generate the new accounts receivable with the grouped installments, it will have
to provide the following information:
Vencimento:Neste campo selecione a nova data de vencimento das parcelas agrupadas.
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan for the grouped accounts.
Vendor: In this field, select the vendor who made the sale or who is grouping the
bills.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição para as contas que estão sendo agrupadas.
Installment Type: In this field, select the type of installment.
Account Value: This field shows the total value of the selected accounts.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm the account grouping. You will be able to locate this account in
accounts receivable maintenance screen, to process your receipt.

263
Invoice Discount
On this screen, you can provide the invoices that were exchanged with the bank. This screen is
Available only for Corporate versions.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial option;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Discounts option and in Exchange.

Set up this screen

For more information, see the chapter Setting up the Maintenance screen
Accounts Receivable.

Find Accounts / Search Options

In this tab you can locate the checks using the following search fields.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch where you wish to locate the accounts.
By customer: When this option is checked, a field will appear next to it to select the customer.
By value: By checking this option, fields for filling out will appear next to it.
Select one of the equal sign (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) and inform it
reference for the value you wish to locate.
By expiration: By checking this option, fields will appear next to enter the
period in which you wish to locate the accounts.
For issuance: By selecting this option, the fields to enter the period will appear next to it.
in which you wish to locate the accounts.
Note: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the note number.
fiscal.
Por seqüência:Ao marcar esta opção aparecerá, ao lado, um campo para digitar o número da
sequence.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.
Accounts Found
In this tab, the client's found accounts will be listed, select the accounts you wish.
group.
The following account information will be shown: Source, Due Date, Description, Client,
Valor, Valor Recebido, Data de Recebimento, Seqüência, Tipo de Parcelamento e Nota.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected accounts in the grid.
Back to Selection
Click this button to return to the search screen. This option allows you to make a new search.
the accounts keeping those that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Account(s)
This panel will include all selected accounts. The following can be viewed.
selected quantity(s) and value of the selected invoice(s).
Remove from the Grid
Click this button to remove the selected accounts.

264
 Cancel Exchange (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the account exchange and return to the home screen.
Swap Duplicates (F2)
Clique neste botão para prosseguir com a troca da(s) duplicata(s) selecionada(s).

Exchange Information
In this tab, inform how the payment for the exchanged invoice will be received; you will need to provide the
following data.
Supplier: In this field locate the supplier that will make the exchange of the duplicate. It will be generated
automatically, an invoice paid with the amount deducted from the installment, for this supplier.
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan related to the change of the installment for the account
payment that will be created, if it is different from the standard chart of accounts.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição para a conta paga que será criada.
Check Amount: This field shows the total value of the duplicates.
Desc. (em %):Neste campo digite o valor do desconto referente à troca da(s) duplicata(s)
charged by the bank.
Desc. (em $):Neste campo digite o percentual do desconto referente à troca da(s) duplicata(s)
charged by the bank.
Amount Received: This field will be calculated automatically when discounts are provided. If
report the amount with the discount first the system calculates the discounts.
Date of Receipt: In this field, please provide the date of receipt, which was exchanged for the(s)
duplicate(s).
Receipt: For more information, refer to the chapter Receipt Screen.

265
Configure Collection Steps
(Available only for Corporate versions)
The billing system assists in managing overdue accounts receivable. With it, you will be able to
store a history of tracking notifications of due date warnings and
negotiations made with the clients. Below we will explain all the steps to use the system
of collections.
On this screen, you can configure the steps that will be used by the employees to make the
billing. This configuration will be done by branch.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Billing option and in Set up Billing steps.

Branch
In this field, the code and name of the branch being configured will appear.

Type
In this field, choose the type of title for which you want to create the script that should be followed by
employees, for billing. You can configure between the following types of billing.
Ticket: Select this option to create the step-by-step process for charging the tickets.
Carnê:Selecione esta opção para criar o passo-a-passo para a cobrança dos carnês.
Wallet: Select this option to create the step-by-step for collection in wallet.
Show
Click this button to set the billing steps for the selected title.
Steps
Select this field to choose the step that will be set for billing. You will be able to create
up to 10 steps. Next to this field, choose from the following steps:
Connection
Select this option for a phone contact with the client.
When selecting this option, click on the icon to fill in the following options:
Call after: In this field, specify how many days after the bill's due date the call will be made.
telephone contact with the client.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição que será mostrada na tela deManutenção da
charge, regarding this step.
Confirm: Press F2 to save the configuration.
Cancel: Press ESC to cancel the setup.
E-mail
Select this option to have an email sent to the customer.
When selecting this option, click on the icon to fill in the following options:
Layout de email:Selecione neste campo o layout de email configurado, para o envio de
charge. If you haven't configured the email, click on the icon For more information
Regarding the layout, refer to the chapter Email Layout Configuration.
Send after: In this field, indicate how many days after the due date of the bill it will be sent.
the email.

266
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição que será mostrada na tela deManutenção da
charge related to this step.
Confirm: Press F2 to save the configuration.
Cancel: Press ESC to cancel the setting.
Informal letter
Select this option to send an informal letter to the client.
When selecting this option, click on the icon to fill in the following options:
Título:Neste campo digite o título que deseja imprimir no cabeçalho da carta.
Complementary text of the letter: In this field, enter the text regarding the charge, which will be
printed on the body of the letter.
Send after: In this field, specify how many days after the due date of the bill the payment will be made.
sending an informal letter to the client.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição, que será mostrada na tela deManutenção da
billing, related to this step.
Confirm: Press F2 to save the configuration.
Cancel: Press ESC to cancel the setup.
Registered Letter
Select this option to send a registered letter to the customer.
By selecting this option, you will have to click on the icon to fill in the following options:
Title: In this field, enter the title you wish to print in the letter header.
Supplementary text of the letter: In this field, enter the text related to the charge, which will be
stamped on the body of the letter.
Send after: In this field, specify how many days after the bill's due date the sending will be done.
from the registered letter to the client.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição, que será mostrada na tela deManutenção da
charge related to this step.
Confirm: Press F2 to save the configuration.
Cancel: Press ESC to cancel the setup.
Send protest
Select this option to send the client for protest. By selecting this option, you will have to
click on the icon to fill in the following options:
Protest: In this field select the type of protest, to which the client's debt will be sent.
To register the type of protest. Select the Registration module, click on the menu
Basics on the option Regarding Financial in Protest.
Send after: In this field, inform how many days after the due date of the bill the title will be
protested.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição, que será mostrada na tela deManutenção da
collection, regarding this step.
Confirm: Press F2 to save the configuration.
Cancel: Press ESC to cancel the setup.
Mandatory
This option allows you to mark the step as mandatory. The employee will not be able to
move to another step if this one is open.

267
Next step
Click this button to configure other steps for billing.
Cancel step
Click this button to cancel a configured step.
Example: If you have made the following configuration:
Step 1 = Call
Step 2 = E-mail
Step 3 = Registered Letter
Step 4 = Send Protest
And if you want to delete the Registered Letter step that is in the 3rd position, click the button ,
to delete the fourth step and then click to delete the third step. It will be necessary to do the
launch of the fourth step, again.
Attention: We recommend structuring the steps for billing well before starting.
maintenance processes, to avoid changes in charges that already have histories.

268
Billing Maintenance
On this screen, you can check the accounts receivable that need to be collected, following the routine.
created, and register a history of the contact or collection procedure made.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the menu Receber, in the option Cobrança and in Manutenção.

Pending items today

Clicking on this menu will open the search screen to locate the pending items of the day or the period.
desired.

Protests not received

By clicking on this menu, the search screen will open to locate the titles that are in protest and that
they were not received.

Titles to Withdraw from Protest

By clicking this menu, the search screen will open to locate the titles that have been received and that
must be removed from the protest.
Search Screen
The search screen will open when clicking on one of the options described above. You can use the following
search options. The employee will have a list of pending accounts to collect.
Branch: In this field, select the branch for which you want to check the pending accounts.
General
In this tab, you can specify which data you want to check.
Issue of: You can locate the accounts by the issue date. In the fields next to select the
period you wish to search.
Due date: You can locate the accounts by the due date. In the fields next to it.
select the period you wish to search.
Type: You can select the type of accounts you wish to locate, you can choose between: Invoice,
Carnet and Wallet.
Description: You can type the description of the account you want to find. This description is provided.
at the moment it generated the installment.

Protest of: You can locate the accounts by the date of protest. In the fields next to it, select the
period you wish to search for. This option is not available for the Pending routine today.
Value
In this tab, you will be able to find the titles by value. You will have the following search options:
All: This option comes checked by default, it will show the movements with any
value. Select one of the options below to use the filter by value.
Same: It will show only the transactions that have the value equal to the one entered.
It will only show the transactions that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will only show the transactions that have a value lower than the one entered.

Situation
In this tab, you can select the type of account receivable and the billing step that will be.
selected.

269
 Branch: In this field, select the branch for which you wish to charge the accounts.
Type: In this field, select the type of title that will be charged, such as; boleto, installment plan, and wallet.

Collection Steps
In this panel, all the steps registered on the Set Steps screen will be listed for the
collection, which must be followed for the type of title selected in the Type field.
Select in this box the step you want to take and then click the Next button.
Search Options
On this screen, you can use the filter fields to locate the desired accounts, for the step
selected. You may use the following search fields:
Branch: In this field, provide the branch for which you wish to locate the accounts.
By customer: When selecting this option, a field will appear next to choose the customer.
By value: Marking this option will display the fields for filling in next to it. Select
one of the equal sign (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) and inform the reference
for the value you wish to locate.
By due date: By checking this option, fields will appear next to it for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the account.
By issuing: When you select this option, fields will appear next to it for you to fill in.
the period in which you wish to locate the accounts.
Note: By checking this option, a field will appear next to it for you to enter the number of
invoice to locate the account.
By Description: Checking this option will display a field next to it to provide the description.
desired.
By Sequence: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to inform the sequence.
of the exit.
Show the charges that are for me: Select this option to show only the
accounts marked by the employee, to belong to him.
Show the separate charges: Select this option to show the bills that have not been
marked for no employee.
Show the charges that are for other users: Select this option to show the
accounts that are marked for the other employees.
Find (F11)
Click this button to show the accounts for billing.
Cancel (Esc)
Click this button to cancel the search and return to the home screen.

Accounts Found
This tab will show the accounts to be charged, as well as the history of contacts and
procedures already completed. You can verify the following account information for billing:
Origem, Usuário Cobrança, Vencimento, Dias Atraso, Descrição, Cliente, Valor, Seqüência e
Parcel.

History of Previous Steps

In this panel, the logs of the steps taken previously will be listed.
employees.
You can verify the following information:

270
Step: This field shows the number of the step completed.
Step Desc.: This field shows the description left by the employee for the previous step.
Dias Após venc.:Este campo mostra quantos dias após o vencimento da conta, foi configurado
to make the billing.
Mandatory: This field will be checked if the billing step is required.
Descrição:Este campo mostra a descrição sobre o passo de cobrança informada pelo vendedor.
Extension. P/: This field shows the date to which the account has been extended.
History: Click on the line in this column to check the billing history.
Select charges for me
This option allows the employee to pick up the accounts that they will charge.
chosen step. The charges selected for the connected user will remain in their name until
complete the selected step. After completing the step, the account becomes available again
for all employees.
Next
Click this button to proceed with the selected billing step and provide details
about the billing of the account.

Invoice Description
In this table, the histories logged by employees will be listed at each step of the collection.
performed.
Step - Make Call
When selecting the step to make the call to the client, please provide the following information:
History: In this field, describe details about the phone contact with the customer. This
history will be stored along with the account for future reference.
Who you spoke with: In this field, enter the name of the person you spoke with during the contact.
telephone.
Just Add History (F3)
Click this button to only add the history, without completing the step.
Confirm Calls (F2)
Click this button to complete the billing step.
Pass - Collection Email
When selecting the step to send an email to the customer, provide the following information:
Histórico:Neste campo descreva detalhes sobre e-mail enviado para o cliente. Esse histórico
It will be stored with the account for later consultation.
Just Add History (F3)
Click this button to only add the history, without completing the step.
Email style
In this field, select the email configuration you want to send to the client. If you do not have
no settings saved, click on the icon to set up the layout of
email.
Email server
In this field, select the email server configuration you want to use for sending.
Send email(s) (ALT+F2)

271
Click this button to send the customer's billing email.
Confirm Sending of e-mail(s) (F2)
Click this button to confirm the sending of the email to the client. You can confirm this sending.
only after being sure that there was no error.
Step - Sending Informal / Registered Letter
When selecting the step to send an informal or registered letter to the client, inform the
following data:
Histórico:Neste campo descreva detalhes sobre a carta enviada para o cliente. Esse histórico
It will be stored along with the account for later consultation.
Just Add History (F3)
Click this button to only add the history about the billing of the account, without concluding.
the chosen step.
Title: This field will be automatically filled by the title registered on the Configure screen
steps of the collection. You can change it before printing the letter.
Supplementary text of the letter: This field will be filled in automatically by the text
registered on the screenConfigure charge steps. You can change it before printing the letter.
Print invoice data: Select this option for the date to be printed on the letter.
vencimento, data da compra, número da nota fiscal, fatura, descrição sobre a conta e o valor da
invoice.
Customer address
Select in this field to which client address the collection letter will be sent. You may
send the letter to the billing address, to the customer's address or print it
address.
Formatting: In this field, choose the distance you want between the title and the header (body) of the
letter.
Confirm Letter(s) Sending (F2)
Click this button to confirm the sending of the letter.

Step - Sending for Protest

When selecting the step to send the client for protest, provide the following information:
Histórico:Neste campo descreva detalhes sobre o envio do cliente para protesto. Esse histórico
It will be stored along with the account for later consultation.
Just Add History (F3)
Click this button to only add the history about the account charge, without changing the
chosen step.
The fields below will be automatically filled with the data registered on the screen.
Set up the billing steps and they can be changed.
Protest: Select in this field the type of protest that will be forwarded to the account of
client.
Fee: In this field, report the amount of expenses for the protest related to the selected account.
Shipping date: In this field, select the date the invoice was sent for protest.
Confirm Shipping for the products (F2)
Click this button to confirm the sending of the bill for protest.

272
Extend Collection Step
On this screen, you can extend the date of the selected step to be repeated on a new date.
Example: Could not contact the client and scheduled a new contact for another day.

Go straight to the step

On this screen you can skip the billing steps that are not mandatory.
Example: When you are taking a step that does not have a key piece of information
registered, such as email or phone.

273
Card Launch
On this screen, credit card, debit, and agreement entries can be made to consult the
accounts generated through other screens such as: sales screen and cash register. It also allows for changes.
check the existing accounts and verify the received and not received cards.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Credit/Debit Card option and then in Launch.

Options
This option streamlines card entries, as it avoids retyping. In this menu, select the
fields you wish to keep filled in after completing the first entry of the session. You may
use the following options: Keep branch, Keep Customer, Keep Chart of Accounts and
Keep Emission.
How to launch a card account
To open an account, fill in the following fields:
Branch: In this field, inform the code of the branch where you wish to issue the card.
Client: In this field, locate the client code.
Administ.: In this field, locate the card administrator.
Issue: In this field, provide the account release date.
Due date: This field will be filled in automatically according to the deadline for
receipt, indicated in the card issuer's registration. This field can be changed.
Número:Neste campo digite o número do cartão.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição referente ao lançamento manual do cartão.
Plan 3: In this field, the chosen default account plan will appear. Select another one,
if you wish to change.
Card Lot: In this field, provide the card lot.
Card received: This field will be marked automatically when the payment is processed.
credit card. We advise that when manually entering the card, do not enter anything in this field
be marked.
Value
In this box, provide the values of the bill that is being generated.
Value: In this field, provide the original value of the card.
Desconto:Neste campo informe o valor do desconto fornecido.
Interest: In this field, indicate the interest that will be added to the card charge.
Fine: In this field, specify the fine that will be added to the card entry.
Total: This field will show the total value of the card.
Net Value: This field will show the amount with the discounts of the fees charged by the
card administrator.
Record(F2)
Click this button to save the information entered on this screen.

274
How to inquire about and change a card
To consult or change a card, first locate it as we will explain below:
Search (F11)
Click this button to find the accounts.
Subsidiary
In this field, enter the branch code.
General
In this tab, fill in the fields you wish for the location of the entries. Choose the
seguintes opções: Data de Emissão, Vencimento, Cliente, Nota Fiscal, Seqüência, Cupom
Fiscal, Administradora, Descrição, Número e Lote.
Type
In this frame, select the type of accounts you want to check. The options are: All, Received
and Not received.
Valor
In this tab, you can locate the entries through the following options:
Card value
In this table, you can locate the entries by the gross value of the card.
All: This option is checked by default and will show the entries with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the filter by value.
Same: It will only show the entries that have the value equal to the one typed.
Superior: It will show the entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show the entries that have a value lower than the one entered.
Net Value of the Card
In this chart, you can locate the entries by the net card value. The filter will be applied from the
form above

Search Result
Click on Search (F2) for the system to search for the entries with the provided information, or
To cancel the search and close the screen, click the Cancel button (Esc).
When pressing F2, a screen will appear with the found entries. They will be displayed, in
maximum, the first 500 results of the requested search. The data shown in the list of
resultados serão: Origem, Emissão, Cliente, Descrição, Valor Total, Valor Líquido,
Due Date, Received and Form of Receipt.
To open an account click on the line, or find it with the arrow keys on the keyboard. When
select the account, the information displayed on the screen can be changed and then
recorded.
The information generated automatically by the system is:
This field will be filled with the original date of the installment.
Implementation Date: This field will be filled with the date the account was closed.
Inf. Outputs: In this panel you can check information about the installments generated on the screens of
Sales / Exits.
Sequence: Shows the sequence number of the output.
Note: Shows the invoice number.

275
Cupom:Mostra o número do cupom fiscal.
Box: Shows the box in which the receipt was made.
Card Status
In this panel, you can check the selection of the accounts receivable.
Originating from a sale: This option will be checked when the account refers to a
sale with card, made through the sale screen / exit.
Originated from another receipt: This option will be checked when the card has been
originated from a receipt of a installment, or another form of accounts receivable with the card.
Renegotiated: This option will be checked if the card receipt has been made
through new installment(s), or other forms of payment that are not cash or
checking account. Whenever this option is selected, the account will be considered as
received.

276
Card / Agreement Maintenance
On this screen, process the cancellation of the cards/agreements received by the company. The receipt may
being total, partial or even renegotiated, through various forms, such as: cash, check,
customer credit card.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Credit / Debit Card option and Maintenance.

Configure this screen

Nesta tela defina as configurações para fazer a manutenção dos cartões e convênio.
For more information, consult the chapter Configuring the Account Maintenance screen
to receive.

Find Cards / Search Options

This tab will display the search options. Fill in the items you wish to use as filters.
for the research.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch where you want to locate the cards.
In this field, select the card/contract administrator you wish to verify.
For Client: Checking this option will display a field next to it to select the client.
By value: Checking this option will display the fields for filling in next to it.
Select one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) next to it.
report the reference for the value you want to locate.
By due date: Checking this option will display the fields for you to enter the
period in which you want to locate the account, by due date.
For issuance: By checking this option, fields will appear for you to provide the period,
in which you want to locate the accounts, by issue date.
Per Batch: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the batch number.
By Card: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the number of the
card.
Type
In this section, select which type of card you want to locate.
Todas:Selecione essa opção para mostrar os cartões / convênios RecebidoseNão Recebidos.
Received: Select this option to show only the received accounts.
Not received: Select this option to show only the accounts not received.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.
Cards Found
In this tab, the found cards / agreements will be listed; select one or more to proceed.
download.
The following account information will be shown: Source, Due Date, Client, Adm. of
Cartão, Número, Lote, Valor, Valor Líquido, Recebido e Nota.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected cards to the grid for processing.

277
 Back to Selection
Click this button to return to the search screen. This option allows you to make a new search for
cards keeping the ones that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Cards
In this frame, all the selected cards for the consultation will be added. It will be possible
visualize the following data: Selected quantity and Value of Selected Card(s)
This field shows the total gross value of the selected cards.
Remove from the Grid
Click this button to remove the selected cards.
Cancel Receipt (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the card deregistration.
Receive Card(s) F2
Click this button to proceed with the cancellation of the selected cards.

Receiving Information
For more information, refer to the chapter Completing a Receipt.

278
Combine into a Batch
This screen allows you to group the cards received from clients into a batch. The batch number and the
cards that belong to him will be informed by the card issuer.
To open this screen:
• Select in the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Credit/Debit Card option and join in a batch.

Find Cards / Search Options

This tab will show the search options. Fill in the items you want to use as filters.
for the research.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch where you want to locate the cards.
In this field, select the card issuer for which you want to check the cards.
By value: When you check this option, fields for filling in will appear next to it.
Select one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) and next to it
report the reference for the value you wish to locate.
Due date: By checking this option next to it, fields will appear for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the account by due date.
For issuance: By selecting this option, fields will appear next to it for you to provide the
period in which you want to locate the accounts by issue date.
By batch: When you select this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the batch number.
Use this option to consult the cards that have already been grouped.
By card: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the number of the
card.
Show only accounts for which the batch has not been informed
Select this option to show only the cards that do not have the specified lot number.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the accounts.
Cards found
This tab will list the cards found, select one or more cards to combine into
batch.
The following card information will be shown: Origin, Expiration, Customer, Admin.
Cartão, Número, Lote, Valor, Valor Líquido, Recebido,Nota,Vendedor e Vendedor 2.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected cards to the grid, to join in the batch.
Back to Selection
Click this button to return to the search screen, keeping the entered information. This option
allows for a new search of cards while keeping the ones that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Cards
In this panel, all selected cards for the consultation will be added. It will be possible
visualize the following data: Selected quantity and Value of Selected Card(s).
Remove from grid: Click this button to remove the selected cards.
Inform the batch of the selected accounts (Card): In this field inform the batch number of the
selected cards.

279
Cancel (ESC)
Click this button to cancel.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to join the cards in the specified batch.

280
Check Issuance
This screen is used to enter new checks to be received and also to consult or modify.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Checks option and in Launch.

Set up this screen

Nesta tela selecione as permissões para o lançamento de cheques.
For more information, consult the chapter Configuring the Account Launch Screen
to receive.

Options
This option speeds up the entry of checks, as it avoids retyping. In this menu, select
the fields you wish to keep filled after completing the first entry of the session and
Clear the screen, you can select to keep branch, client, chart of accounts, issuance, bank.

How to Write a Check

Below we will explain how to manually register the accounts on the entry screen of
checks.
Branch: In this field, provide the code of the branch where you want to issue the cheque.
Client: In this field, enter the customer code.
Issue: In this field, provide the date of check issuance.
Bom para:Neste campo informe a data de vencimento do cheque.
This field will be filled with the original due date of the entry.
of the check.
Effective Date: This field will be filled with the date the check was cashed.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição referente ao lançamento manual do cheque.
Account plan 3: This field will display the chosen standard account plan.
Select another one if you wish to change.
Salesperson: In this field, enter the code of the salesperson or the responsible employee.
check issuance.
Seller 2: In this field, enter the code of seller 2.
Bank: In this field, locate the bank of the check:
Agency: In this field, please provide the agency code.
In this field, provide the checking account code.
Number: In this field, please inform the check number.
In this field, enter the check digit 1.
DV2: In this field, please provide the check digit 2.
Data Rec.: In this field, enter the date of receipt of the check.
Received Amount: In this field, enter the amount received.
Attention: We do not recommend filling in or changing the fields Date Rece Value Rec,
they will be filled in automatically when performing check maintenance. Fill these in
fields only if the check being issued has already been received.

281
Value
In this box, inform the value of the check being issued.
Valor:Neste campo informe o valor do cheque.
Desconto:Neste campo informe o valor do desconto fornecido.
Rate: In this field, enter the rate that will be added to the check entry, in case of
receipt with delay.
Interest: In this field, enter the interest that will be added to the check entry.
Total: This field will show the total value of the check, considering discounts, interest, and the
rate.
Record(F2)
Click this button to save the data entered on this screen.
How to check and change a check:
To check a check, first locate it as we will explain below.
Search (F11)
Click this button to locate the checks.
General
In this tab, fill in the fields you wish for the location.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch code.
Issuance of: In this field you can search for checks by issue date, selecting by
period.
Due Date: In this field you can search for checks by due date, selecting by
period.
We receive from: In this field, you can search for checks by date of receipt, selecting
for a period.
Client: In this field, provide the client.
Invoice: In this field, enter the invoice number.
Sequence: In this field, provide the sequence number of the output.
Fiscal Coupon: In this field, enter the number of the fiscal coupon.
Nº do Cheque:Neste campo informe o número do cheque.
Descrição:Neste campo digite a descrição informada no momento do lançamento do cheque
or generated by the output screen.
Type
In this panel, select the type of checks you want to verify.
Todas:Selecione essa opção para mostrar todos os cheques que já foram recebidos e os não
received.
Received: Select this option to show only the checks that have already been received.
Not received: Select this option to show only the checks that have not yet been received.
received.
Value
In this tab, you can locate the entries by value, through the following options:
All: This option is checked by default and will show the entries with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the filter by value.

282
Equal: It will show only the transactions that have the value equal to the one entered.
Superior: It will display the entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show the entries that have a value lower than the one entered.

Search Result
Click on Search (F2) for the system to search for the entries with the provided data, or
Press Esc to cancel the search and close the screen.
Pressing F2 will bring up a screen with the entries found. They will be shown in the
maximum, the first 500 results with the requested search. The data shown in the list of
resultados serão: Origem, Emissão, Cliente, Descrição, Valor, Vencimento, Valor Recebido,
Date of Receipt and Form of Receipt.
To open the desired check entry, click on the line, or find it using the keys.
from the keyboard. When selecting the check you wish to consult or change, the
data filled on the screen, and also the following information:
Inf. Outputs
In this section, you can verify information about the checks generated on the Output screens.
Sequence: Shows the sequence number of the output.
Note: Show the invoice number.
Cupom:Mostra o número do cupom fiscal.
Cashier: Shows the code of the cashier where the check was issued.
Situation of the check
In this panel, you can check the origin of the check.
Originated from a sale: This option will be checked when the check is related to a
sale, made through the Sales / Exit screen.
Originated from another receipt: This option will be checked when the check is
originated from a receipt. For example, check used for the receipt of a
installment or another form of accounts receivable.
Renegotiated: This option will be checked if the check has been received with others.
forms of payment that are not cash or checking account. Whenever this option
if selected, the account will be considered as received.
Returned: This option will be checked if the check has been returned, as it was not
compensated by the bank.
Deposited: This option will be checked if the check has been deposited.
This option will appear checked if the check has not been cashed or held.
you passed.
Discounted: This field will be marked if the check has been cashed with the bank.
Custodied: This field will be marked if the check has been custodied by the bank.
This field will be checked if the check has been transferred to make
payment of the company's bills with suppliers.
Forwarded to: This field shows the code and name of the supplier to whom it was forwarded.
check.
Third-party check: This field will be marked if the check belongs to a third party.
Attention: We do not recommend selecting these options, as they will be marked automatically.
as soon as the procedures for receiving and returning the check are executed.

283
Record(F2)
After consulting, make the desired changes and click this button to save the data.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen to make a new entry.

284
Returned Cheques
On this screen, you can return the received checks that were deposited into the account.
banking.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Returned Checks option.

Set up this Screen

On this screen, provide the chart of accounts you wish to use for the returned checks.
Chart of accounts: Select the chart of accounts in this field.

Find Checks / Search Options

This screen allows you to locate the checks that have been deposited into the bank account. You can use
the following search fields.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch where you wish to locate the checks.
Bank: In this field, provide the bank where you wish to locate the checks.
By customer: When this option is checked, a field will appear next to it to select the customer.
By value: By selecting this option, the fields for filling in will appear next to it. Select
one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal (>=) or less than or equal (<=) and inform the reference
for the value you want to locate.
By expiration: When selecting this option, fields will appear next to it for you to fill in.
period in which you want to locate the checks.
For issuing: By checking this option, fields will appear beside it for you to inform the period.
in which you wish to locate the checks.
By Number: When selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the number of
check you wish to locate.
Find (F11)
Click this button to search for checks.
Found checks
In this tab, the found checks will be listed, select one or more checks that were
returned. The following information about the checks will be shown: Due date, Description,
Cliente, Valor, Valor Recebido, Data de Recebimento, Seqüência, Nota, Banco, Agência,
Number, Deposited and Third Party Name.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected checks to the grid.
Return to selection
Click this button to return to the search screen. This option allows you to perform a new search for
checks keeping those that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Checks
In this frame, all selected checks will be added.
Selected quantity
This field shows the total amount of checks added, in the Checks grid.
Selected.

285
 Value of Selected Check(s)
Este campo mostra o valor total bruto dos cheques selecionados.
Remove from the Grid
Click this button to withdraw the selected checks.
Cancel Return (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the return of the checks.
Returned Check(s) (F2)
Click this button to proceed with the return of the selected checks.

Receiving Information
In this tab, inform how the check will be received; you will need to provide the
following data.
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan related to the return of a check, if applicable.
different from the standard chart of accounts.
Descrição:Neste campo digite uma descrição referente a devolução do cheque.
Valor dos Cheques:Este campo mostra o valor total do(s) cheque(s) selecionado(s).
Taxa (em $):Neste campo informe o valor da taxa a ser cobrada na devolução do cheque ou
click on the icon next to inform the rate in percentage.
Interest (in $): In this field, indicate the amount of interest to be charged on the return of the check or
click on the icon next to inform the interest in percentage.
Tax + Interest (in $): This field shows the total amount of the fee and interest.
Return Date: In this field, select the return date of the check.
Bank account: In this field select the bank account that processed the cheque return.
Box: In this field, enter the box to make the entry of the returned check.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm the return of the deposited check. By confirming this
A new check issuance will be made for the operation.

286
Discount / Check Custody
(Available only for Corporate versions)
On this screen, you can enter the checks that will be cashed or held.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Check option under Discount / Custody and select Exchange.

Configure this Screen

On this screen, define the permission settings for the use of this screen.
For more information, refer to the chapter Setting up the Account Maintenance screen
to receive.

Discount Checks (F3)

Click this button to report the checks that have been exchanged. On this screen, you can report
as a discount the fee charged for cashing checks.
Find Checks / Search Options
In this tab you can find the checks using the following search fields.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch in which you wish to locate the checks.
Bank: In this field, provide the bank where you want to locate the checks.
Per customer: When selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to select the customer.
By value: Checking this option will display the fields for filling in next to it. Select
one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal to (>=) or less than or equal to (<=) and provide the reference
for the value you want to locate.
By expiration: When you check this option next to it, the fields will appear for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the checks.
For issuance: By marking this option, the fields will appear for you to input the period.
no qual deseja localizar os cheques.
By Number: By checking this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the number of
check you wish to locate.
Find (F11)
Click this button to locate the checks.
Checks found
In this tab, the found checks will be listed, select one or more checks that will be
discounted.
The following information about the checks will be shown: Origin, Expiration, Description,
Cliente, Valor, Nota, Banco, Agência, Número, Devolvido (caso o cheque tenha sido devolvido
by the bank), Deposited (if the check has been deposited) and Third Party Name.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected checks to the grid for exchange.
Return to Selection
Click this button to return to the search screen. This option allows for a new search of
checks keeping those that have already been selected in the grid.

287
 Selected Cheques
In this section, all the selected checks for exchange will be added.
Quantity selected: This field shows the total amount of checks added in the grid
Selected Checks.
Selected check(s) value: This field shows the total gross amount of the checks
selected.
Remove from Grid: Click this button to remove the selected checks.
Cancel Exchange (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the check exchange.
Discounted Checks Exchange (F2)
Click this button to proceed with the exchange of the selected checks.

Receiving Information
In this tab, provide how the received exchanged check will be and the following data:
Supplier: In this field, locate the supplier who will exchange the check. It will be generated
automatically, an invoice paid with the amount deducted from the check, for this supplier.
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan related to the check exchange for the account.
payment that will be created, if it is different from the standard chart of accounts.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição para a conta paga que será criada.
History: In this field, provide a description that will be recorded in the check history.
swapped.
Valor do cheque:Este campo mostra o valor do cheque.
Description (in %): In this field, enter the percentage of the discount charged for the exchange of the
check.
Desc. (em $):Neste campo digite o valor do desconto cobrado, referente à troca do cheque.
Value received: This field will be calculated automatically when discounts are informed. If
prefer to inform directly the amount received, the system will calculate the discount and fill in the field
automatically.
Date of Receipt: In this field, provide the date of receipt when the check was exchanged.
Receiving: For more information, see the chapter Completing a Receipt.

Custody of Checks (F4)

Click this button to report the checks that were held by the bank. In this option the
the bank will control the deposit of the check on the due date.
Locate the checks and select, as explained earlier in Discount. The options
available are the same.

Receiving Information
In this tab, provide the following information:
Supplier: In this field, locate the supplier that will hold the checks. It will be generated.
automatically, an account paid with the fee amount.
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan for the payable account that will be created, if
be different from the standard chart of accounts.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição para a conta paga que será criada.

288
History: In this field, provide a description that will be recorded in the check history.
exchanged.
Check amount: This field shows the amount of the check.
Rate (in %): In this field, enter the percentage of the fee related to the exchange of the held check.
charged by the bank.
Fee (in $): In this field enter the amount of the fee related to the exchange of the held check
charged by the bank.
Value - rate: This field will be calculated automatically when the rates are provided. It will be shown
the value of the checks minus the fee. If you prefer to directly inform the amount received, the system will
calular o valor da taxa e preencher os campos automaticamente.
Receiving Date: In this field, provide the date of receipt, which was kept in custody.
check.
Receipt: The system allows receiving only as a checking account, as the
guarded checks will be deposited directly into your account. On the day of the deposit of
cheque na conta corrente terá que consolidá-lo. Ao lado informe a conta na qual será
the check and the cash have been deposited.

289
Write-off of Discounted Checks
(Available only for the Corporate version)
On this screen, you can report the cancellation of the cashed checks. This cancellation should be done later.
of the bank's receipt confirmation.
To open this screen:
• Select in the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, then on Discount / Custody check select Decrease
discounted checks.

Find Checks / Search Options

In this tab, you can find the checks that have been cashed, using the following fields.
of search:
Branch: In this field, specify the branch where you wish to locate the checks.
Supplier: In this field, inform the bank where you want to locate the checks.
By client: Selecting this option will display a field next to it to select the client.
By value: Selecting this option will show the fields for filling out next to it.
Select one of the equal signs (=), greater than or equal (≥), or less than or equal (≤) and inform it.
reference for the value you want to locate.
Due date: By checking this option on the side, fields will appear for you to provide the
period in which you wish to locate the checks.
For issuance: By checking this option beside, the fields will appear for you to inform the period.
in which you want to locate the checks.
By Number: By selecting this option, a field will appear next to it to enter the number of
check you wish to locate.
Find (F11)
Click this button to search for checks.
Checks found
This tab will list the found checks, select one or more checks that were
discounted. The following information about the checks will be shown: Origin, Expiry,
Descrição, Cliente, Valor, Desconto, Seqüência, Nota, Banco, Agência, Número, Devolvido
(in case the check has been returned by the bank), Deposited (in case the check has been
deposited), Third Party Name, Custodied (if the check was custodied by the bank),
Fornecedor (mostra o código e o nome do fornecedor que trocou o cheque) e Caixa ( número
of the box that was informed at the time of the check exchange.
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected checks to the grid.
Return to Selection
Click this button to return to the search screen. This option allows you to make a new search for
checks keeping those that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Checks
In this frame, all selected checks will be added.
Selected quantity: This field shows the total amount of checks added to the grid
Selected Checks.
Selected check(s) value: This field shows the total gross value of the checks
selected.

290
 Remove from the Grid
Click this button to withdraw the selected checks.
Cancel Low (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the withdrawal of the check(s).
Record Deletion (F2)
Click this button to proceed with the exchange of the selected check(s).

Receiving Information
In this tab, provide information on how the exchanged check will be received, please provide the following
data.
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan regarding the check clearance, if applicable.
different from the standard chart of accounts.
Check Amount: This field shows the total amount of the selected checks.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm the cancellation of the cashed check.

291
Held / Discounted Checks
Returned
On this screen you can manage the routine for the exchanged checks that were returned.
To open this screen:
• Select in the Financial module
• Click on the Receive menu, on the Check option in Discount / Custody in Checks
discounted / returned custodians.

Set up this screen

On this screen, define the settings you want to enable for screen use.
For more information, refer to the chapter Setting up the Account Maintenance screen
to receive.

Find Checks / Search Options

This screen allows you to locate the checks that have been exchanged and returned. You can use the
following search fields.
Branch: In this field, enter the branch where you want to locate the checks.
Supplier: In this field, indicate the supplier for whom you want to locate the checks.
By client: Selecting this option will display a field next to it to select the client.
By value: Selecting this option will display the fields for filling in next to it.
Select one of the signs equal (=), greater or equal (>=) or less or equal (=<) and inform it
reference for the value you wish to locate.
By due date: By selecting this option, the fields will appear beside for you to inform the
period in which you wish to locate the checks.
By issuance: By checking this option, the fields will appear next to it for you to specify the period.
in which you wish to locate the checks.
By Number: When this option is checked, a field to enter the number will appear next to it.
check that you wish to locate.
Find (F11)
Click this button to search for the checks.
Found checks
In this tab, the found checks will be listed, select one or more exchanged checks that
They have been returned. The following information about the checks will be shown: Due date,
Descrição, Cliente, Valor, Valor Recibo, Data de Recebimento, Seqüência, Nota, Banco,
Agência, Número, Depositado (caso o cheque tenha sido depositado), Nome do Terceiro
Add to the Schedule
Click this button to add the selected checks to the grid.
Back to Selection
Click this button to return to the search screen. This option allows you to perform a new search for
checks keeping those that have already been selected in the grid.

Selected Cheques
In this box, all selected checks will be added.

292
 Selected quantity
This field shows the total amount of checks added in the Checks grid.
Selected.
Value of Selected Check(s)
This field shows the total gross value of the selected checks.
Remove from the Grid
Click this button to withdraw the selected checks.
Cancel Return (ESC)
Click this button to cancel the return of the checks.
Returned Check(s) (F2)
Click this button to proceed with the return of the selected checks.

Information on Returned Cheques

In this tab, provide information on how the amount paid by the bank will be refunded. Provide the following:
data:
Plan 3: In this field, select an account plan regarding the return of the check, if applicable.
different from the standard chart of accounts.
Descrição:Neste campo digite uma descrição referente à devolução do cheque.
Check Amount: This field shows the total amount of the selected check(s).
Fee (in $): In this field, state the amount of the fee to be charged for the return of the check or
so click the icon next to inform the rate in percentage.
Interest (in $): In this field, inform the amount of interest to be charged upon the return of the check or
so click the icon next to inform the interest in percentage.
Tax + Interest (in $): This field shows the total amount of the tax and interest.
Return Date: In this field, select the return date of the check.
Box: In this field, provide the box to record the entry of the returned check.
Payment
In this field, select which payment methods are being used for the fees and
interest. Release in the Employee registration, in the Permission tab, the payment methods that the
employee will be able to use.
The available payment methods are:
• Money
Selecione essa opção para o pagamento feito em dinheiro.
By selecting this option, the Cash field will appear next to it. In this field, please enter the cash in
when will the money be withdrawn.
• Current account
Select this option for payment made directly from the checking account.
When selecting this option, the fields Box and Bank will appear on the side. Please provide the account.
bank account from which the amount was debited. The cash register must be informed for control of the
payment receipts and statements. Daily withdrawal totals will appear on the screen of
Show box in totals table (ALT+F11).

293
• Advanced
This option allows payment with more than one form of payment such as: cheque(s),
customer checks, credit with suppliers and also renegotiate the account generating a new one
installment. For more information, consult the Payment Screen chapter.
• Indeterminate
This option allows you to pay the bill without disclosing the source of the money.
We do not recommend using this option, as you will not have details about the account on the screens and in the
existing reports in the system.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm the return of the cashed check. Upon completing this
A new cheque entry will be created for each returned cheque.

294
Client Account Launch – Notebook
This screen allows for manual entry of customer accounts (ledger).
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Client Account / Ledger option and in Launch.

Options
This option speeds up the account entries, as it avoids retyping. In this menu select the
fields you want to keep filled after completing and clearing the first entry of the session.
You can choose to Keep Branch Keep Client.

To make an entry in the customer account

You will need to provide the following information to make the entry in the customer's account:
Branch: In this field, inform which branch the account will be launched.
Sequence: In this field, the output sequence will be shown. If you are making a
manual entry will not require filling out.
Client: In this field, select the client you want to make the entry.
Seller: In this field, enter the seller's code.
Seller 2: In this field, enter the code of seller 2.
Code: In this field, you can enter the product code.
Description: In this field, you can type the product name or a description regarding the
launch.
Quantity: In this field you can specify the quantity of the product or service.
Valor:Neste campo digite o valor total do produto / serviço.
In this field, provide the account launch date.
Type
In this field, select the type of entry. You can choose from:
Produtos:Selecione esta opção caso a conta lançada seja referente a produtos.
Services: Select this option if the recorded account refers to services.
Qtde Paga:Neste campo digite a quantidade de produto / serviço que o cliente está pagando.
Valor pago:Neste campo digite o valor pago pelo cliente, caso seja uma conta recebida.
Payment Date: In this field, enter the payment date of the bill, if it is a received bill.
Output Generated at Closure
This table will show the branch and the sale sequence for installments generated by the screen of
Outputs.
Record(F2)
Click this button to save the registered data.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen to make a new entry.

295
Customer Account Maintenance
On this screen, make the payment of customer accounts (ledger). The ledger account shows the products of
sale, for customer viewing and discharge. The discharge may be total, partial or still
renegotiated, through various forms of payment, such as: cash, check, card, credit
from the client and deposit in the company's account.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Client Account / Notebook option and in Maintenance.

Configure this Screen

Configure on this screen the permissions for the use of the Account / Client Maintenance screen.
General
In this tab, define the options you want to enable for screen use.
Chart of Accounts
Select in this field the chart of accounts that will be used in Account / Client Maintenance.
Receipt
In this frame, select the settings for printing the receipt.
Allow receipt printing: Select this option to enable receipt printing.
Standard
In this field, you can configure the option to print a receipt on the Receipt screen.
always be marked. Choose from the options:
Marked: Select this option so that when informing the receipt of the account, the option
Print receipt, upon confirming receipt, should be checked. Therefore, upon confirming the receipt,
it will open the screen for printing the ticket.
Unchecked: Select this option so that when reporting the receipt it does not open,
Automatically, the screen for printing the ticket.
Allow pattern change: Select this option so that at the time of receipt the
employee can uncheck the default option selected in the Default field.
Allows changing receipt information
Select this option to allow the employee to change the receipt data before the
printing.
Does not allow closing the screen without printing a receipt

Select this option so that the employee only closes the Receipt screen after printing the
receipt for the client.
Installment payment
The system allows receiving client invoices through the generation of another installment that
characterizes a renegotiation. In this tab you can define the deadlines, days, and intervals to carry out
receivables in installments.
Maximum number of installments: In this field, enter the maximum number of installments that will be
you accept.
Maximum period in days: In this field, please specify the maximum amount, in days, for the installments.
considering the total number of installments.

296
 Type of interval
In this field, choose the type of range that will be accepted for the installments.
You can choose between:
Day(s): By selecting this option, please inform the number of days between the installments in the field
Standard Term. Example: The installments will be every 15 days, 30 days, 45 days.
Month(s): By selecting this option, specify the quantity, in months, between the installments.
Standard Deadline Field. The due dates for the installments will be set for fixed days in
every month. Example: The installments will be every 1 month, 2 months, 3 months.
Allows changing default range: Check this option to allow the range Type
the standard should be changed at the time of receipt.
Type of installment
In this field, select the type of installment that will be standard when generating an installment.
The types are: Bank Slip, Installment Book, and Wallet.
Allow change: Select this option to allow the default installment type to be
changed at the time of receipt.
Checks
In this tab, define the deadlines, days, and intervals to carry out collections for the ledger account with
check. Receiving by check is characterized as renegotiation, as it will be given
continuity in monitoring the account through check control.
Maximum number of checks: In this field, indicate the maximum quantity of checks that will be
accepted.
Maximum term in days: In this field, enter the maximum amount, in days, for the checks
installments, considering the total number of installments. To allow the receipt only
With a sight check, type the number 1.
Type of interval
In this field, choose the type of range that will be accepted for installment checks.
You can choose between:
Day(s): By selecting this option, inform the number of days between the checks in the field
Standard Term. Example: Checks will be every 15 days, 30 days, 45 days.
Month(s): By selecting this option, please inform the quantity, in months, between the checks in
Standard deadline field. The due dates for the checks will be set for fixed days in
every month. Example: The checks will be every 1 month, 2 months, 3 months.
Allows changing the default interval: Check this option to allow the type of interval
the standard should be changed at the time of receipt.

Finding the Notebook Account

To find the customer's accounts, you will need to provide the following information:
Branch: In this field, enter the branch where you want to locate the customer's accounts.
Client: In this field locate the client you wish to service.
Type
In this section, select which type of account you want to locate.
All: Select this option to show received and not received accounts.
Received: Select this option to show only the received accounts.
Not Received: Select this option to show only the accounts not received.

297
 Show Accounts (F6)
Click this button to show all the products that the customer has purchased, which have been released.
in the customer account.

Releases found for this client

In this section, all the client's products will be listed. You will be able to check the following
information:
Output: Click on this column for more information about the output.
Branch: Show the branch code.
Show the date the sale was made.
Sequence: Shows the sales sequence.
Type: This field shows whether the account was generated from a sale of products or services, being
P = Product and S = Services.
Code: This field shows the product or service code.
Description: This field shows the name of the product or service.
Qty: Shows the quantity of the purchased product or service.
Value: Shows the value of the product or service sold.
Qtde Paga:Mostra a quantidade do produto ou serviço que já pago.
Valor Pago:Mostra o valor pago.
Payment Date: Shows the payment date.
Total Value
In this field, the total value of accounts receivable and amounts already received will be displayed.

Amounts Not Received

This field shows the values of accounts not received.
Selected Values
This field shows the total value of the selected accounts.

Tipo de Baixa
In this field, select the type of cancellation you wish to make. You can choose from the following:
options:
Download a value
This option allows for the discount of an amount independent of the total value of the account or of a
product.
Download all not received
This option will download the total amount not received.

Download selected lines

This option will lower the value of the selected rows.
Partial withdrawal of 1 line
This option allows for the partial clearance of the selected line.

298
Download (F2)
Click this button to receive the bill after selecting an option in the Type field.
from Down. When you click this button, select the following data:
Plan 3: In this field, select the chart of accounts related to the account write-off, if applicable.
different from the selected default.
Receipt: In this field select the payment method for the bill. You can choose the
the following forms of payment:
Advanced: For more information, consult the Receiving Screen chapter.
Indeterminate: Select this option for advanced receipt. By selecting this
option inform in the box field the code of the cash register where the account amount will be recorded
indeterminate.
When selecting in the field Type of write-off the option Partial write-off of 1 line you will have to
provide the following information:
Qtde Baixada:Neste campo informe a quantidade do produto que deseja baixar.
Value Down: In this field, state the value of the selected product line that you wish to
download.
Restart (F5)
Click this button to return to the home screen to make a new search.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to confirm receipt.
Cancel (F5)
Click this button to cancel the withdrawal and choose another type of withdrawal.

299
Account Date
This screen allows you to close the ledger account of one or more clients, to consolidate and generate a bill.
receive.
To open this screen:
• Select the Finance module;
• Click on the Receive menu, in the Client Account / Notebook option and in Close Accounts.

Set up this screen

On this screen, define the permissions for your use.

Regarding the Account Receivable

In this table, select the data that will be used to generate the accounts receivable.
Chart of accounts: In this field, select the chart of accounts that will be used to generate the account.
to receive.
Allow changes: Check this option to allow changing the default chart of accounts.
Park. Standard: In this field, select the type of standard installment you wish to use.
generate the accounts receivable. The options are: wallet, bank slip or installment booklet.
Allow to change: Check this option to allow changing the default installment type.
Regarding Outputs
Use this option to issue an invoice with all the products from a period. In this
frame select the data that will be used to generate the sequence of outputs.
Standard Operation: In this field, select the exit operation you wish to use to generate
an output, with the data of the closed account. Use an operation that does not lower stock and does not
Activate the finance. For more information, consult the chapter on Outgoing Operations.
Allow change: Check this option to allow changing the default operation.
Standard Table: In this field, select the standard price table you wish to use for generation.
the exit.
Allow changes: Check this option to allow changes to the default table.
Record
Click this button to save the screen settings.

How to Close the Account

To close the account of one or more clients, please fill in the following information:
Branch: In this field, provide the branch you wish to close the accounts.
Client: In this field, provide a client to close the account. To close account for multiple
customers, leave blank.
Seller: You can use this field to close the accounts of customers of a certain
seller.
Only clients with account closure equal to
In this field, enter the account closure date provided in the client registration. With this
You can close all accounts that have the same closing day. The system will generate a
accounts receivable for each client, automatically.
Data of the Account Receivable Generated
In this section, you can provide the details for the receivable account that will be generated.
Vencimento:Neste campo informe uma data de vencimento da(s) conta(s) selecionada(s).

300
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição para a(s) conta(s) gerada(s).
Plan 3: In this field, provide the desired account plan for the account(s) receivable.
Type Installment: In this field, select the type of installment such as wallet, bank slip, or
carnet.
Generate an output for each customer: Select this option to generate a sequence of output.
for each client, to allow the printing of an invoice or fiscal receipt.

301
Customer Credit Release
with the Company
In this chapter, we will explain how to issue a credit for the customer to be used.
subsequently in the receipts of sales and installments.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Credit menu, on the option From the client with the Company and in Launch.

Configure this Screen

For more information, see the chapter Configuring the Account Launch Screen
to receive.
Options
This function speeds up the entry of credits, as it avoids retyping. In this menu select
the fields you want to keep filled in after completing and clearing the first entry of the
session. You can maintain branch and date.

How to Make a Launch

To make the credit entry, fill in the following fields:
Branch: In this field, provide the code of the branch where you want to credit the customer.
In this field, select the credit release date.
Cliente:Selecione o nome do cliente.
Order: This field is automatically filled, it will show the sequence of
credit release.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição, referente ao lançamento.
Value: In this field, select the type of entry.
Credit
Select this option to issue a credit for the customer. In the next field, enter the amount.
that will be credited.
Receiving Information
In this section, provide the following information for the customer's credit entry.
Plan 3: Report the chart of accounts corresponding to the credit entry.
Descrição:Informe uma descrição sobre o crédito gerado.
Receipt
In this field, indicate how the credit was received.
Advanced: This option allows you to receive credit in more than one way.
receiving in the form of checks, cards, bank account, vouchers or installments. For more
for information, consult the Receiving Screen chapter.
Indeterminate: This option allows for the receipt of the credit. By selecting this option,
next to it will appear the Cash field. These values will appear in the daily launch totals, in
Cash register screen shows totals table (ALT+F11).

302
 Debit
Select this option to charge a debit to the customer. In the field next to it, enter the amount.
The debt can only be informed if the customer has credit with the company. The amount to be
debit can be less than or equal to the credit that the customer has.
Receipt information
In this section, provide the information for issuing the receipt to the client regarding the debt.
generated.
Name of the responsible person: In this field, provide the name of the responsible client for the pickup.
credit.
Employee who issued the receipt: This field will be automatically filled with the name.
of the employee who generated the debt for the client. When issuing the receipt for the client, this
employee must sign.

Search (F11)
Click this button to show the options for searching.
General
In this tab, fill in the fields you want for the location of the entries, or leave it blank.
white to search in all.
Client: In this field, provide the client.
Date: In this field, provide the period in which you want to search for credit transactions.
Func. Receipt: In this field, provide the code of the employee who issued the receipt.
Description: In this field, provide the description that appears in the entry.
Show transactions made with debits: Select this option to show only the
debit entries.
Show transactions made with credits: Select this option to show only the
credit launches.
Value
In this tab, you can locate the entries by value, through the following options:
All: This option is marked as default and will show entries with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the filter by value.
Equal: It will only show the entries that have the value equal to the one entered.
Superior: It will show the entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show the entries that have a value lower than the one entered.

Search Result
Click on Search (F2) for the system to find the entries with the provided data or
Press Esc to cancel the search and close the screen.
Pressing F2 will bring up a screen with the entries found. The following will be shown,
maximum, the first 500 results.
The data shown in the results list will be:
Origin: Shows the origin of the release. For more information, please refer to the chapter
Usage Tips.
Previous Balance: This column shows the value of the balance prior to the transaction.
Client: This column shows the client code.

303
 Name: This column shows the client's name.
Description: This column shows the description provided at the time it was generated.
launch or the information of the release.
Credit: This column will be filled in if the entry refers to a credit, with the
value.
Debit: This column will be filled in if the entry refers to a debit, with the
value.
Current Balance: This column shows the amount of the current balance, after the entry.
To open an account click on the line, or find it with the arrow keys on the keyboard. Upon
select the account you want to consult or change the above-mentioned data will be displayed.
additional information will be:
Balances
In this frame, the amounts of previous balances and the current balance, referring to the
selected release.
Previous: This field will show the value prior to the entry.
Current: This field will show the current value after the entry.
Receipt Information
In this frame, the name of the employee who issued the receipt to the customer will be recorded. With this
option will be able to control the receipts that were printed, by employee.
Name of the responsible person: This field will be filled at the time of issuing the receipt and is included
the name of the person who signed confirming the use of the credit.
Employee who issued the receipt: This field will be filled automatically by the system.
with the name of the employee who issued the receipt.

Smart Menu
The smart menu is located at the bottom, on the right side of the screen. Clicking the icon will
showed the following option:
History
Show the client's credit transaction history.
To open the screen with the history:
• Inform the branch or the client you wish to consult, or use the search option to locate one.
launch;
• Then click on the icon and in the historical option;
• A screen will open with the client's credit entries.

304
Company Credit Launch
with the Supplier
This screen allows entering the credit that the company has with the supplier, to be used
subsequently in the payments of purchases.
To open this screen:
• Select the Financial module;
• Click on the Credit menu, on the option From the company with the Supplier in Release.

Configure this Screen

On this screen, define the settings you want to allow for screen use.
For more information, see the chapter Configuring the Account Maintenance Screen
to receive.
Options
This option streamlines the entry of credits, as it avoids retyping. In this menu, select the
fields you wish to keep filled, after completing and clearing the first entry of the session
. You can choose to keep the Branch Keep Date.

How to Make a Launch

To carry out the credit launch, fill in the following fields:
Branch: In this field, provide the branch code that has credit with the supplier.
In this field, select the credit release date.
Supplier: Select the supplier's name.
Order: This field is auto-filled. It will show the sequence of
credit release.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição, referente ao lançamento.
Value: In this field, select the type of entry, as explained below:
Credit
Select this option to issue a credit from the company to the supplier. In the field next to it
report the amount that will be credited.
Payment Information
In this section, provide the following information for the credit entry with the supplier.
Plan 3: Provide the corresponding account plan for the credit entry.
Descrição:Informe uma descrição sobre o crédito gerado.
Payment: In this field, specify the forms of credit payment.
• Advanced: This option allows you to make the credit payment in more than one way
payment in cash, check(s), bank account or installment.
For more information, see the Payment Screen chapter.
• Indeterminate: This option allows you to launch the payment of the credit as indeterminate. To
select this option, the field Box will appear next to it to be recorded. These
Values will appear in the daily totals of entries, in the Cash screen in Show table in
totals (ALT+F11).

305
 Debit
Select this option to reduce the value of your credit with the supplier. In the field next to it
report the amount to be debited. The amount to be debited may be less than or equal to the credit
that the company has.

Search (F11)
Click this button to show the options to search.
General
In this tab, fill in the fields you want for the location of the entries.
Branch: In this field, provide the branch you wish to check the debts.
Supplier: In this field, provide the supplier.
Date: In this field, provide the period in which you wish to search for credit transactions.
or debit.
Descrição:Neste campo informe a descrição que foi informada no lançamento.
Order: In this field, provide the order number you wish to locate.
Show transactions made with debits: Select this option to display only the
debt entries.
Show transactions made with credits: Select this option to display only the
credit launches.
Value
In this tab you can locate the entries by value, through the following options.
All: This option is marked as default and will show records with any value.
Select one of the options below to use the filter by value:
Equal: It will only show the entries that have the value equal to the one entered.
Superior: It will show the entries that have a value greater than the one entered.
Inferior: It will show the entries that have a value lower than the one entered.

Search Result
Click on Search (F2) for the system to search for the entries with the provided data or
Press Cancel (Esc) to cancel the search and close the screen.
When pressing F2, a screen will appear with the found entries. It will show,
maximum, the first 500 results. The data shown in the results list will be:
Origin: Shows the origin of the launch. See more details in the Tips for Use chapter.
Previous Balance: This column shows the value of the balance prior to the transaction.
Supplier: This column shows the supplier's code.
Name: This column shows the name of the supplier.
Description: This column shows the description provided at the time it was generated.
launch or the purchase information.
Credit: This column will be filled in if the entry is related to a credit, with the
value.
Debit: This column will be filled in if the entry refers to a debit, with the
value.
Current Balance: This column shows the value of the current balance after the entry.

306
 To open a transaction, click on the line or find it using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
When selecting the entry you wish to consult or change, the mentioned data will be displayed.
above.
Balances
This table will show the values of the previous balances and the current balance, referring to the
selected launch.
Previous: This field will show the value prior to the entry.
Current: This field will show the current value after the entry.

Smart Menu
The smart menu is located at the footer, on the right side of the screen. By clicking on the icon, it will
showed the following option:
Historical
Show the history of credit/debit transactions of the supplier.
To open the screen with the history:
• Inform the branch and the supplier you wish to consult, or use the search option to locate.
a launch;
• Then click on the icon and in the optionHistory;
• A screen will open with the supplier's credit entries.

307
Completing the Receipt
We explained in the previous chapters how to locate the accounts that will be written off, being that the
receivables of the accounts depend on the configuration of each of the screens. In this chapter
we will explain how to report details about the receipt, at the time of settling the accounts
to receive, from checks and cards.

Receipt of a Selected Invoice

When selecting only one account, check, or card to process, the following will be shown
fields:
Due date: Displays the due date of the bill.
Plan 3: Shows the chart of accounts provided at the time of account entry. This can
to be changed.
Description: Shows the description provided when the account was launched. If it is an expense, it will be
filled with the sales sequence.
History: This field will be filled automatically with the same information from the field
Description. You can change this field with a note regarding the receipt.
Valor:Mostra o valor da conta selecionada.
The fields explained below, discount, interest, and penalty will only be available for the screen of
Maintenance of accounts receivable.

Discount
In this field you can inform the discount amount upon account settlement, and it will be limited to
maximum percentage configured for the screen.
Calculate discount: By clicking this button, the system will calculate the discount, according to
configured on the branch registration screen. The discount will be calculated based on the days of
in advance, that the bill was received.
Calculate differentiated discount: This option allows you to specify a monthly percentage of
discount and will be limited to the maximum percentage set for the screen.

Interest
In this field, you can indicate the interest amount at the time of account closure and it will be limited.
to the maximum percentage set for the screen, or you can configure the following options:
Calculate Interest: By clicking this button, the system will calculate the interest as configured in the
Branch registration screen. The interest will be calculated depending on the days of delay of the account.
received.
Calculate differentiated interest: This option allows you to input a monthly interest percentage and
it will be limited to the maximum percentage configured for the screen.

Fine
In this field, you can indicate the amount of the fine at the time of closing the account, which will be
limited to the maximum percentage set for the screen, or you may use the following
options.
Calculate Fine: By clicking this button, the system will calculate the fine as configured in the
branch registration screen.
Calculates differentiated fine: This option allows you to specify a percentage of fine and will be
limited to the maximum percentage configured for the screen.
The options below are available for the Accounts Receivable Maintenance screens,
Check Maintenance Card Maintenance.

308
 Value Rec.
This field will be filled with the value of the selected account. The system will perform the calculation.
automatic with the provided data on interest, penalty, and discount.
In accounts receivable, if the amount entered is different from what is indicated in this field, it may
two situations may occur:
Partial receipt: When reporting a value lower than the invoice, in this case, the system
allows generating a partial payment of the account, creating another account with the remaining amount.
Receiving with a higher amount: When entering an amount higher than that of the account, the system
allows you to choose whether to receive change or generate a credit with the difference.
Attention: In the Employee registration, you can configure the permissions for maintenance of the
accounts.
Data Rec.
This field is automatically filled with the current Windows date. It can be changed.
manually for another date.
For account maintenance, you can use the options below to receive payments.
Receiving on time Click this button to receive it with the date of
due date of the bill.
Receiving today Click this button to have the receipt made with the date of
bill reduction.
Receipt
In this field, select the method of payment being used for the settlement of the
Account. Release in the employee registration, in the Permissions tab, the forms of payment that the
the employee may use to settle accounts receivable.
The available payment methods are:
Money: Select this option for cash payment. By selecting this
option, next to it will appear the Cash field. In this field, inform the cash in which the credit will be made.
money.
Current account: Select this option for payments made directly to the current account. Upon
select this option, the fields Box and Bank will appear on the side. Provide the bank account
to which the amount was credited. The cash register must be informed for the control of receipts of
deposits and statements, the daily totals of releases will appear on the Cash Display screen
total table (ALT+F11).
Advanced: This option allows the receipt of the installment in more than one way.
receipt as check(s), card(s), bank account, customer credit and also
renegotiating the account, the renegotiation is not only through installment. For more
For information, consult the Receiving Screen chapter.
Indeterminate: This option allows receipt of the invoice without specifying the destination of the
money. When selecting this option, the Cash field will appear next to it. These values will appear
in the daily launch totals, in the screen of Caixa in the option Show table in totals
(ALT+F11).
We do not recommend using this option, as you will not have account details on the screens and in the
existing reports in the system.

Receipt of multiple bills

When selecting multiple accounts for receipt, the maintenance screen will not have certain functions.
available.

309
Alterar o plano de todas as contas para:Selecione esta opção para informar um plano de
specific accounts for all selected accounts. If you do not check this option, the accounts
They will remain with the selected chart of accounts at the time of the launch.
History: This field will be automatically filled in by the system, the provided description
in this field will be considered for all selected accounts.
Valor:Este campo mostra o valor de todas às contas.
Discount
The discount field can only be used through the calculate discount and calculate buttons.
differentiated discount. The system will calculate for all selected accounts and not
It will be allowed to enter a value in this field.
Interest
The interest field can only be used through the calculate interest and calculate interest buttons.
differentiated. The system will perform the calculation for all selected accounts and will not be
It is allowed to enter a value in this field.
Fine
The penalty field can only be used through the calculate penalty and calculate penalty buttons.
differentiated. The system will calculate for all selected accounts and will not be
it is allowed to type a value in this field.
Value Rec.
This field is filled with the total value of all the accounts.
Data Rec.
This field is filled with the current Windows date and can be manually changed.
Confirm (F2)
Click this button to complete the receipt of the bill.
Back
Click this button to return to the screen with the search results.
Back to Selection
Click this button to return to the Maintenance home screen.

310
Holidays
On this screen, you can enter the company's holidays and banking holidays. The system will
consider these data to generate the installment accounts and to calculate interest and fines
correto.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Clique no menuOutros, na opçãoFeriados.

To inform about the company and bank holidays.

• Double click on the desired date;
• When opening the screen, enter the following data:
In this field, you can manually select the date you want to register the holiday.
Type: In this field, select the type of holiday. You can choose bank holiday and/or holiday.
of the company.
Descrição:Neste campo informe uma descrição referente ao feriado.
Calculation of interest and penalty

The system verifies the holidays reported in the system, so that there is no incidence of interest and
fine for accounts receivable settled after the holiday.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the specified holiday.
Turn off
Click this button to delete the registered holiday.
To cancel the holiday:
• Double click on the desired date;
• Click the Delete button.

311
Settings

312
Usuários Ativos
On this screen, you can view the users who are using the system.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the menuBranches in the Active Users option.
Nela will be able to verify the following information:
Micro: This column shows the name of the computer on which the system is being accessed.
User: This column displays the name of the user who is using the system.
Time / Logon: This column shows the time and date that the user logged into the system.
Refresh: Click this button to update the data being displayed on the screen.

313
My Menu
This screen allows the employee to choose the screens they use to add them to the module.
My Menu, speeding up access to them.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the menuMy menu.

To choose the screens for My Menu:

• Click on the plus sign (+) to open the options for the System and each module;
• Double click on the desired screen, in the Available Programs frame, on the left side of the
cloth
• In the Programs My Menu panel, on the right side, all selected screens will be listed;
To arrange the screens:
• On the right side, of the My Menu Programs board, the arrows are shown pointing up and down.
down
• Select the screen you want to sort;
• Click on the arrows to arrange the screens in the desired order.

To turn off a selected screen:

• Select the desired screen to delete in the Programs My Menu frame;
• Click the button .
Record
Click this button to save the settings of My Menu. Close the entire system and log in.
again.

314
Usuários Ativos
On this screen, you can view the users who are using the system.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the menuBranches in the Active Users option.
Nela will be able to verify the following information:
Micro: This column shows the name of the computer on which the system is being accessed.
User: This column displays the name of the user who is using the system.
Time / Logon: This column shows the time and date that the user logged into the system.
Refresh: Click this button to update the data being displayed on the screen.

313
 Check Connection to Use Data (Running via internet)
(Available only for the Corporate Plus version)
Select this option to ensure that the connection to the database is verified when accessing the
server. This test will be done automatically. If there is an error connecting to the server, the
the system will open a window asking if you want to repeat the access.

Record detailed log of system usage

Select this option to record employees' access to the screens and functions of the system.
The log report can be viewed in the Configuration module under the Other menu.
Log Report option.

Settings
In this tab, you can configure the names for the output screen, line colors in reports, and color.
from the background to the check system and printer.

Background color
In this section, choose the color you want to use as the background on the system screens when accessing.
this branch.
To change the background color:
• Click the button(<<);
• It will open the color palette;
• Click on the desired color or create a color using the Set Custom Colors button.
• Then click OK or cancel to close the screen.
Use standard
Click this button for the system to use the gray color, the system standard.
Color of the lines in the reports
Configure in this frame the color of the alternate lines in the report.
To change the color of the reports:
• Click the button (<<);
• Abrirá a palheta de cores;
• Click on the desired color or create a color using the Set custom colors button;
• Then click OK or Cancel to close the screen.
Attention: Select the white color to leave the report without alternating lines.
Check Printer
In this panel, configure the use of the Bematech DP20 Plus check printer.
Configure the following options for the printer:
I have a Bematech DP20 Plus printer connected to the system.
Select this option to inform the system that you will be using the check printer.
Print cents
Select this option to print the cents on the check printer. If the printing of the
cents incorrect exit, leave this option unchecked.
Código do banco:Informe neste campo o número do banco que consta no cheque.
Name of the payee: In this field, provide the name of the payee for the receipt of the check.
The name of the bank account holder can be the name of the company or the owner's name.
check.

316
 City: In this field, enter the city of the bank account of the check.

Output screen names

In this section, you can register the names of the system output screens. The system has
five (5) exit screens, you can choose different names for each screen. Please provide the names
What is desired in the fields Quick Sale, Outputs, Outputs 1, Outputs 2, and Outputs 3.

Financial
In this tab, options for the use of the financial system and configuration can be defined.
holidays.
Accounts Receivable
In this tab, define the options for calculating interest and discounts.
Overdue Bills
In this section, you can define the charges arising from late payments. You can
provide the following data:
Waiting period: In this field, provide the days of waiting period for overdue accounts, which will not apply.
increase of interest and penalty.
Interest (% monthly): In this field, enter the monthly interest percentage for the accounts in
delay.
Fine (% monthly): In this field, enter the percentage of fine for overdue accounts.
Advance Payments
In this chart, indicate the percentage of discount that will be calculated for the received accounts.
radiant.
Desconto (%):Neste campo informe o percentual de desconto a ser considerado.
The company works with customer credit
Select this option to allow the branch to work with credit for the customer.
Automatically disable debit card
When setting up for automatic debit card withdrawal, at the moment it is
informed of the receipt, the system will proceed to deactivate this card. The amount received will be
launched as an unconsolidated bank deposit, in the account provided on the registration screen
Credit Card / Agreement.
If this option is not checked, the debit card should be canceled during maintenance.
of the card.
Number of days that you consider the transferred check as settled (for the limit of
credit) :
In the adjacent field, inform after how many days the transferred checks will be considered as
Removed. After these days, the customer's credit limit will be released for new purchases.
About Holidays (Available for Corporate versions)
In this tab, configure the system to check the registered holidays for the company.
The system will consider the holidays configured on this screen to control the due dates of
accounts receivable, entered in the system.
Check bank holiday: Select this option for the system to check holidays
banking.
Check company holiday: Select this option for the system to check the holidays of the
company.

317
 To set up the holidays:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the Other menu, in the Holidays option.
Company works on Saturday: Select this option if the company works on Saturday.
Company works on Sunday: Select this option if the company works on Sunday.

Counters
In this tab, you can configure the numbers that will be used for the Incoming invoice and
Exit.
Use the same sequence for incoming and outgoing notes.
Select this option to use the same sequence of the invoice numbers of entries and
outputs.
Last Note: This field shows the number of the last printed note.
Use different sequences for entry and exit notes
Select this option to use different invoice number series for entries and exits.
In this case, you will have to provide the invoice numbers in the following fields:
Last Entry Note: In this field, enter the initial number for the incoming invoice.
Last Exit Note: In this field, provide the initial number for the exit invoice.

Images
In this tab, you can select the company's logo to be included in the printed reports.
through the system.

Image
In this field, choose the size of the logo.
Small: Select this option to insert a logo in the existing reports at
sistema. Recomendamos que seja adicionado uma imagem com até 30 Kb ou de dimensões de
120 by 120 pixels.

Layouts
In this tab, you can select the standard layouts to be used in the system.
Standard layouts for issuing invoices
In this panel, select the invoice layouts that will be used as standard on the screen.
Entries and Exits.
Standard layouts for Ticket issuance
In this section, select the ticket layouts that will be used as standard on the Outgoing screen.
and Entries.

318
Message by City / State
On this screen, you can register the messages that will be displayed on the Output screen. The message will appear.
On the Outputs screen, if the customer belongs to the City or State that was registered the message.

Subsidiary
In this field, indicate which branch you want to register the message for. You can register one.
message by branch registered in the system.
Type
In this field, select the option to register the message; you can choose between City or
State.
City: When selecting the option City in the field Type, a field will appear below to
inform the name of the desired City.
Status: When selecting the option State in the Type field, a field will appear below to
inform the name of the desired State.
Attention: We advise you to have a standard for the registration of the City and State, because the
the system will only consider what is written the same, for example, Sao Paulo is
Different from São Paulo and Paraná is different from Paraná.

Message
In this field, type the message you want to appear on the output screen when the client
belonging to one of the registered Cities or States may be used as a reminder
for exits made to the City or State.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the registration and insert the message in the grid. In the grid, you will be able to
verify the following information:
Filial:Mostra o código da filial.
Cidade Estado:Mostra as siglas C para Cidade e E para Estado.
Local: Shows the name of the City or State.
Show the recorded message.
To view the registered message, click on the line where the data will appear.
existing fields on the screen.

Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen for a new release.
Turn off
Click this button to delete one of the messages.
To delete the message:
• Select the desired message by clicking on it with the mouse;
• Then click the Delete button.

319
Office

320
Agenda
Stores information about the contacts and addresses of your company, like a telephone directory.
This information may be shared with other employees through the groups of
users created.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleOffice;
• Click on the Agenda menu.

Creating a Registration
To create a registration in the agenda it is necessary to fill in the following fields:
Group
Use the group to classify the registered contacts. Using groups will make it easier to
use of the agenda, as they can be used as a search filter and for printing.
New
Click this button to register a new group.
Adding a New Group:
• Click the New button;
• The New Group screen will open;
• On this screen, enter the name of the group you wish to create;
• To save, click the Add button.
To add a contact:
• Select the Group;
• Fill in the desired fields.
The name and phone number fields are mandatory. In addition to these, they may
other information to be registered, such as: Other Phones, Contacts, Address, Neighborhood,
CEP,Cidade,UF,Nascimento,e-mail,InterneteObservação.
Attention: To delete a group, you must delete all the registered contacts in it.
Access Permissions
The agenda registrations can be shared with the user groups created in
basicRegistration. If no records are shared, only the person who created the registration and the
employees who are superusers will have access to these records.

How to Find
To locate a record, provide a word related to the desired search. Then
click on Search (F9) or Super Search (F10).

Search (F9)
By clicking this button, the system will search only the Name and Main Phone fields.
To use the Search:
• In the field, enter the name (or part of it) or the phone number you want to locate;
• Select a group to filter the search or leave it with the option All;
• Then click on the Search button (F9);
• All registrations related to the entered data will be displayed.
• The information shown in the list is: name, phone, and city.

321
 Super Search (F10)
By clicking this button, the system will search for all fields registered in the agenda.
To use the Super Search:
• In the field, find any information (or part of it) regarding the registered person;
• Selecione um grupo para filtrar a pesquisa ou deixe com a opçãoTodos;
• Then click on the Super Search button (F10);
• The system will check all the fields of the registration and will show all the contacts that have the
typed word.
• The information shown in the list is: name, phone, city, email, and group.
To delete a record:
• Find the record you wish to delete;
• Then click the Delete button.

Smart Menu
The smart menu is located at the bottom right of the screen. By clicking the icon, it will be
showing the following options:
Record Count: Shows the total number of records in the agenda. This information
it will appear in the footer, on the left side of the screen.

Records Created Today: Shows the total number of records saved on the day and lists all contacts.
Birthday Celebrants of the Month: By clicking this option, a screen will be shown to enter the month.
what you wish to verify. This screen will appear filled with the current month and allows input to be typed
Another month for consultation. The birthday celebrants of the selected month will be listed.

322
Documents
The purpose of this screen is to store files with images or texts and share them with the
User Groups.
We recommend, for better performance of your system, that you attach documents with the
size of 300 Kb, the system accepts documents with a maximum size of up to 2 MB (2048
Kb). The documents will be stored in a database separate from Shop Control 8,
allowing thus, to store approximately 4 GB for the Corporate versions.
Attention: In the Advanced version, it is possible to store a maximum of 10 files, adding them all together.
the documents stored in the Customer/Supplier, Product registration screen
Sell Office Module.
To open this screen:
• Select the module Office;
• Click on the Documents menu.

Save Document
In this tab, you can insert the files that will be stored and shared with the Groups.
of Users.
To insert the file
First select the file you want to save. To do this, click on the Image button.
ouText.
Image: Click this button and locate the desired image. They can be stored.
documents in JPG, BMP, GIF format. We recommend JPG and GIF, as they will be files
minors.
Click this button and locate the text file. Documents can be stored.
in DOC, TXT, RTF format.
Title: Type a name for the stored file, it will be used in the search. The field
Title is required.
Source: Enter where the file was received from.
Destination: Type where the file will be sent.
Type: Select a file type.
The types are: Letter, email, Fax, Folder, Website, Advertising, and Others.
Received / Sent: Mark whether this stored file was received or sent to
someone.
Class: Select a class to organize the archived documents.
The classes are: Purchases, Offers, Budgets, Proposals, Complaints, and Others.
New class: By clicking this button, it is possible to create a new class.
To create a class:
• Click the New button;
• Provide the class name;
• Click the Add button.
Store until: In this field, provide the deadline for storing the document, where it can be
to backtrack or advance the storage date of the same.
Automatically turn off: On the Document Maintenance screen, all files that
If this option is selected, they will appear with the Auto Delete column checked, then

323
 of the defeated. With this, the maintenance of the documents will be faster, because there will be no
need to select the documents one by one to delete them.
Palavra-Chave / Resumo:Neste campo digite várias palavras-chave, para posteriormente
conduct the research using the Super Search option.

Change Document
To modify a document that has already been saved:
• Click on the Find Document tab to locate the document you wish to change;
• Click on the Save Document tab;
• Click the Change Document button;
• Modify the document and the desired information as explained above.
Access Permissions
The stored documents can be shared with the created user groups.
in basic registration. If some files are not shared, only the person who created the
The document and the employees who are super users will have access.
To release group access:
• Select the group you wish to share the documents with;
• Click on the icon , to add the group to the left side of the screen.
To exclude access from the groups:
• Select the group you want to delete in the box on the right side;
• Click on the icon to withdraw.
To Delete a Document:
• Go to the Find Documents tab;
• In the Find field, enter the name of the file you want to delete;
• Clique no botãoBusca (F9)ou noSuper Busca (F10);
• All files with the searched name will be listed;
• Select the desired file;
• Go to the Save Documents tab;
• Clique no botãoApagar.
To Change the information about the document:
• Go to the Find Documents tab;
• In the field Find, enter the name of the file you wish to change;
• Click on the Search button (F9) or on the Super Search (F10);
• All files with the searched name will be listed;
• Select the desired file;
• Go to the tab Save Documents;
• Change the desired information and then click the Save button.
To replace the stored file, after locating it:
• Go to the Save Documents tab;
• Click on the Change Document button;
• The buttons Image or Text will appear on the screen, click on the desired option;
• Select the new document;
• Change the desired information and then click the Save button.

Find Document
In this tab, you can locate the files stored in documents, to then view them.
change information or delete.

324
 Find: In this field, type the name of the file or part of it so that the system can proceed
research.
Type: You will be able to filter the search by selecting a type of document.
Class: You can filter the search by selecting a class of document.
Search (F9)
By clicking this button, the system will search only the fields Title, Origin, and Destination.
To use the Search:
• In the field, enter the name (or part of it) or the phone number you want to locate;
• Select a Type and a Class to filter the search, or leave it with the option All.
• Then click on the Search button (F9);
• All files related to the entered data will be displayed.
Super Search (F10)
By clicking this button, the system will search for all fields registered in Documents.
To use the Super Search:
• In the field, find any information (or part of it) regarding the registered person.
desired
• Select a Type and a Class to filter the search, or leave it with the option All;
• Then click on the Super Search button (F10);
• The system will check all the registration fields and will show all the documents that
they will have the word typed.

Send by email
This option allows you to send the stored document by email.
By clicking this button, a screen will open for you to select the settings for sending the
e-mail.
Email layout: In this field, select the desired layout for sending the email.
Server configuration: In this field, select the configuration for sending email.
To: In this field, enter the recipient's email.
Attention: The fields Email layout and Server configuration must be previously set.
configured in the moduleSettings in thePrint menu.

Smart Menu
The smart menu is located at the bottom right of the screen. Clicking on the icon will
the following options shown:
Total records: Shows the total number of documents stored by all
employees.
Total number of records recorded by me: Shows the total number of documents recorded by
employee.
Average size of my records: The system will display the average size of the documents
stored. The system will check the size of all the documents and divide by
amount of stored documents, showing the average of the documents.
Total size of my records: Shows the size of the stored documents.

325
Document Maintenance
Use this screen to delete documents that will no longer be used. The use is recommended.
of this function periodically, so that it does not exceed the storage capacity of the database
of data.

Documents (Ctrl+F2)
This tab will display the stored documents, where you can check the files and delete them.
List
This option allows you to list only the documents that are overdue or to list all.
Employee
This field will show the name of the employee who is using the system. Access will be
restricted only to the documents that have been released to him. The superuser will be able to verify
the documents of all employees.
The following information will be shown in the frame:
Título:O título que foi cadastrado para o documento.
Origin: What is the origin of the document.
Size (Bytes): The size of the file.
Store until: The deadline by which you want to store the document.
Employee: The name of the employee who stored the document.
Automatic shutdown: If the document is overdue, this column will be marked.
if it was marked at the time of recording.
Change date
This option allows you to change the date of the document that is expired, if you want to keep it for
more time in the database.
To change the date of the Document(s):
• Select the row(s) that you want to change the date.
• Type or select the new date in the field next to the Change date button.
• Click the Change date button.
View documents (F9)
Before deleting a document, you will be able to view it.
To verify the documents:
• Select the line of the document you wish to check;
• Click the button View Document, when clicking this button View documents (F9), the will be shown
file stored on a new screen. There you can check details, print it, or copy it.
file for your computer.
Details
By clicking this button, you can check the information about the document such as origin,
destino, tipo, a data de armazenamento, tamanha do arquivo, nome do arquivo, título, resumo.
Print
Allows printing the selected document.
Generate File
This option allows you to copy the file to the computer.
Automatically turn off marked

326
 Allows you to delete all documents that have the Automatic Delete column marked.
This column will only appear checked if you have selected the Automatic Deletion option.
and fill in the Store until field.
Delete Selected Document(s)
This option deletes one or more selected documents. Use the Shift or Ctrl keys to
select multiple documents.

Summary (Ctrl+F3)
This tab informs the quantity and total size of the documents stored by each employee.
The following information will be shown in the frame:
Funcionário:Terá o nome do funcionário.
Total de Documentos:A quantidade de documentos armazenados por funcionário.
Tamanho Total (Kb):Mostra o tamanho dos documentos armazenados por funcionário.
On the left side of the screen, the total number of documents and the size being displayed will be shown.
busy in the database. This information will be shown in the fields Total quantity
of documents and total occupied by documents.

327
Message
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This screen allows the company's employees to exchange messages. The messages can
they can be sent to the recipient even if he is not using the system. The advantage is that
the messages will be sent via the local network, not requiring the use of the internet to
this function.
To open this screen:
• Select the Office module;
• Click on the Messages menu.

View messages
When opening the messages screen, all received messages will be automatically displayed.
In the field messages, you can choose other options such as:
Received: All received messages will be displayed.
Sent: All sent messages will be displayed.
Archived: The received and sent messages that were archived will be displayed.
Trash: In this option you can check the received and sent messages that have been placed
in the trash.
Only unread
Check this option to view the received messages that have not been read.
Only marked
You can select this option to show the messages that have been marked in your inbox.
of messages.

Message
This frame shows the subject of the selected message and also the names of the employees.
that the messages were sent.

Update
Click this button to show the latest received messages.

Nova (F5)
This button is used to create a new message.

Responder
Click this button to reply to a received message. When replying to the message the
the system will fill in the Recipient field with the name of the person who sent you the message,
being able to change, delete, or add recipients.

Reply All
This button is used to reply to all recipients who received the message. When
responding to the message, the system will automatically fill in the recipients, being
possible to alter, delete or add.

328
Forward
This button is used to forward a message to another person(s).
New Message
Clicking on one of the buttons New, Reply, Reply All, or Forward will open the
New Message. Please fill in the following details:
For Employee: Select the employee and then click the button Add to list.
Allows the inclusion of multiple employees.
For Group: The list of registered User Groups will be displayed. Select one or
more groups to send the message.
After selecting the group, click the Include button on the list.
Recipients: In this section, the names of all employees who will receive will be shown.
the message.
Remove: It is used to remove a contact from the Recipient board.
To remove:
• Select the contact(s) you want to remove;
• Then click on the Remove button.
Clear: It is used to delete the entire list of contact(s) in the Recipient board.
Subject: Type, in this field, the subject of the message to be sent. Its completion is
mandatory.
Urgent: Check this option to inform the recipient that the sent message is urgent.
When marking the message as urgent, an icon will appear. on the left side, in column U,
both for the recipient and for the sender.
Awaiting response: Check this option to inform the recipient that you are waiting.
a response to the message. When marking the message as awaiting response, a will appear.
icon .
On the left side, in column R, for both the recipient and the sender.
After the recipient sends the response, the icon will no longer be shown to them.
Mensagem:Neste quadro digite o texto que deseja enviar para o destinatário.
Send (F2)
After filling in all the fields, click this button for the message to be sent.

Mark
This option allows you to mark the most important messages so that you can analyze them.
To mark the message:
• Select the message you want to mark;
• Click the Mark button;
• On the left side of the message, in column M, the following icon will appear .
To unmark the message:
• Select the message you want to uncheck;
• Click the Mark button.

Archive
This option allows you to separate important messages that need to be stored in the inbox.
Archived, which can be accessed through the field View messages.

329
 To archive the messages:
• Select one or more messages.
• Then click on the Archive button.
To remove messages from the archived box:
• Select one or more messages.
• Then click the Archive button.

Trash can
This option allows you to separate the messages that will be deleted. These messages will remain
stored in the Recycle Bin, in the message field.
This option does not delete the messages.
To delete them, locate them in the recycle bin and click the Delete button.
To place the messages in the trash bin:
• Select one or more messages in the Sent or Received boxes;
• Then click on the Trash button.
To remove the messages from the trash box:
• Select one or more messages in the Trash box;
• Then click on the Trash button.

Turn off
This option allows you to permanently delete one or more selected message(s).

Print
This option allows you to print the selected message.

Find
Click this button to locate a message using the search filters.
Search
Click this button to find the desired message. You can use the following fields
as research:
Box: In this field, select which box you want to locate the messages. You can choose
among the received, sent, archived, trash or all boxes.
Período:Neste campo selecione o período que deseja localizar a(s) mensagem(s).
For: In this field, select the name of the employee to whom you sent the message(s).
Received from: In this field, select the name of the employee from whom you received the(s)
message(s).
Subject: In this field, enter the subject or part of it to locate the message.
Message: In this field, type the text or part of it to locate the message.
Search (F11)
Click this button to show the search results.

Smart Menu
The smart menu is located at the bottom, on the right side of the screen. By clicking the icon, you will be
the following options shown:

330
Total Recebidas:Mostrará a quantidade de mensagens existentes na caixa recebidas, no
footer of the screen on the left side.
Total Enviadas:Mostrará a quantidade de mensagens existentes na caixa enviadas, no rodapé
to the left side of the screen.
Total Arquivadas:Mostrará a quantidade de mensagens existentes na caixa arquivadas, no
footer on the left side of the screen.
Total Trash: It will show the number of messages existing in the trash box, at the bottom of the
cloth on the left side.

331
Notes
Use this screen to make notes or reminders that can be viewed daily on the
research.
The information contained in Notes may be accessed privately or shared with
other employees.
To open this screen:
• Select the module Office;
• Click on the Notes menu.

Title
Enter a title for the information that will be registered.

Description
In this field, type the information you wish to store.

Permissões de Acesso
The stored notes can be shared with user groups created in
basic registration
To release access for the groups:
• Select the group you want to share the notes with;
• Click on the icon on the right side of the screen, to add the group.
To exclude access from the groups:
• Select the group you wish to delete in the panel on the right.
• Click on the icon to withdraw.

Fixed Font
This option fixes the font. By using the Ctrl + Tab keys, it allows the text to be tabulated.

Encrypt
(Available only for Corporate versions)
This option saves the note in the database encrypted. Thus, the person who has access
your database will not be able to read the registered information.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the note.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen and save a new note.
Turn off
Click this button to delete the note that is currently being viewed.

Print
Click this button to print the selected note.

Find
In this field, enter the title or part of the description, so that the system can perform the search.

332
Search (F9)
By clicking this button, the search will be made by the fields Title and Description.

333
Commitment
This screen is used to schedule appointments for the company's employees, for example, the
visits of technicians with clients. If released, it can be viewed and modified by others.
employees.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleOffice;
• Click on the Commitment menu.

To schedule an appointment
To schedule a new appointment, select a date in the calendar and then describe it on the screen.
New Commitment.
Calendar
On the right side of the screen is the calendar, where you can select the date you want.
cadastrar ou verificar os compromissos agendados. Quando houver um compromisso agendado
for a certain date, this will appear in bold.
New Commitment
• Choose a date on the calendar;
• On the left side of the screen, double-click on the time you wish to schedule;
• It will open the New Appointment screen with the selected date/time.
• Then fill in the fields on the screen and click Save and close (F2).
The fields to be filled are:
Subject: Enter the title for the scheduled appointment, this title will be visible to the
employee when he checks his schedule.
Start: This field is automatically filled with the date/time that was selected
on the agenda, however, it can be changed. In this field, inform the date and/or the time that it will start
commitment.
Film: Report the date/time that the commitment will end. The date appears filled in.
automatically, but it can be changed.
Example: The end date may be different from the start date. This option can be used to
record periods of absence or travel of a particular employee.
Color: Select a color for the border of each scheduled appointment.
Reminder: This option allows the system to notify when there is a scheduled appointment.
With this selected configuration, a screen will appear notifying about the appointment on time.
scheduled.
Attention: For this option to be valid, make this configuration with a minimum of thirty (30)
minutes in advance of the notification of the appointment. The notification screen will only appear if
the employee is with the Shop Control 8 open.
Description: In this field, you can provide more information about the scheduled commitment.
Repeat
By selecting this option, the commitment will be copied to the specified period until the date.
specified. The options are:
Every day: By selecting this option, the system will copy the commitment for every day.
from the week until the maximum date provided.
Monday to Friday: Selecting this option will copy the commitment from
Monday to Friday until the selected date.

334
 of the defeated. With this, the maintenance of the documents will be faster, because there will be no
need to select the documents one by one to delete them.
Palavra-Chave / Resumo:Neste campo digite várias palavras-chave, para posteriormente
conduct the research using the Super Search option.

Change Document
To modify a document that has already been saved:
• Click on the Find Document tab to locate the document you wish to change;
• Click on the Save Document tab;
• Click the Change Document button;
• Modify the document and the desired information as explained above.
Access Permissions
The stored documents can be shared with the created user groups.
in basic registration. If some files are not shared, only the person who created the
The document and the employees who are super users will have access.
To release group access:
• Select the group you wish to share the documents with;
• Click on the icon , to add the group to the left side of the screen.
To exclude access from the groups:
• Select the group you want to delete in the box on the right side;
• Click on the icon to withdraw.
To Delete a Document:
• Go to the Find Documents tab;
• In the Find field, enter the name of the file you want to delete;
• Clique no botãoBusca (F9)ou noSuper Busca (F10);
• All files with the searched name will be listed;
• Select the desired file;
• Go to the Save Documents tab;
• Clique no botãoApagar.
To Change the information about the document:
• Go to the Find Documents tab;
• In the field Find, enter the name of the file you wish to change;
• Click on the Search button (F9) or on the Super Search (F10);
• All files with the searched name will be listed;
• Select the desired file;
• Go to the tab Save Documents;
• Change the desired information and then click the Save button.
To replace the stored file, after locating it:
• Go to the Save Documents tab;
• Click on the Change Document button;
• The buttons Image or Text will appear on the screen, click on the desired option;
• Select the new document;
• Change the desired information and then click the Save button.

Find Document
In this tab, you can locate the files stored in documents, to then view them.
change information or delete.

324
Permission for my appointments
Click this button to allow other employees to access your appointments.
configuration will determine who will have access to view and/or modify your
commitments. It will be necessary to create the visualization groupings of
commitments.
How to set up permission for appointments:
• In the Employee field, select the employee for whom you want to grant access to their
commitments;
• Click the Add button;
• The name of the selected employee will appear in the box below;
• If you want the released employee to also have access to change their appointments,
mark the option Can Change. Otherwise, you will only have access to view the commitments;
• Click Save (F2).
How to set up permissions for appointments:
• Click the Permission button for my appointments, below the View frame/
Groupings;
• It will open the Permissions screen for Appointments.
• In the Employee field, select the employee you want to grant access to.
commitments;
• Click the Add button;
• The name of the selected employee will appear in the box below;
• If you want the released employee to also have access to change their commitments,
mark the option Can Change. Otherwise, you will only have access to view the appointments;
• Click on Save (F2).
To dismiss an employee:
• Select the employee you wish to delete;
• And click the Delete button;
• Then click on Save (F2).
Attention: When removing an employee from your list of View My Appointments, their name will be
automatically turned off from all the groups created by the employee.

Visualization (CTRL+F2)
This tab allows you to choose the view of your appointments, those of another employee or of
various
According to the created groupings.
Employee
In this field, select the employee for whom you wish to check or register appointments.
Grouping
In this field, only the groupings created by the employee will be shown.
Select the group you created to check or register appointments. The
employees' commitments of the selected grouping will appear on the left side of
fabric, in columns.
Attention: To create the Groupings, go to the Groupings tab (Ctrl + F3).
User Groups
In this field, select the user group you want to verify or register the commitments.
The system will show all the employees that belong to this group. The user group must
to be defined in the Registration module in the Basic menu under the User Groups option.

336
Groupings (Ctrl+F3)
Click on this tab to check, change, and register the employee Groupings.
How to create a grouping
• Click the New button (F5);
• On the View Grouping screen, provide the name of the Grouping;
• Then click OK.
How to check and change a grouping
In this field, all the groupings created by the employee will appear. When selecting one
the grouping will show the employees that belong to it, it can be added or
removed an employee from the list.
To add an employee to the group:
• Select the grouping created in the Grouping field;
• Select the employee's name;
• Click on the icon to add the employee, in the box on the right side of the screen.
To remove an employee from the grouping:
• Select the created grouping in the Grouping field;
• Select the name of the employee you wish to delete from the box on the right;
• Click on the icon to withdraw.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the grouping or changes.

337
To do
On this screen, it is possible to register tasks and specify a deadline for delivery. This way you can
share them with other employees, follow up on tasks to be delivered and those that
they remain pending.
To open this screen:
• Select the module Office;
• Click on the To Do menu.
Area
The following options are already registered in the system: Today, This month or All. It is possible to create
new areas when registering tasks. Use this option to classify your tasks and
facilitate visualization.
See
In this field, specify if you want to view only your tasks or all of them. The Superuser will be able to
visualize the to-do list of all employees.
Only not completed
This option is automatically checked by the system. Every time you enter this screen, it will be
show only the unfinished tasks. Uncheck this option to also check the
completed tasks.
Update
Update the screen with the latest changes made.

New (F5)
This button allows you to schedule a new task.

Area
Select the type of area you want to register the task or create a new area.
Nova
Click this button to register a new area.
To create a new area:
• Click the New button;
• Provide the name of the area;
• Click the Add button.
Title
Enter a name for the task. This will be used in the search.
Description
In this field, enter the scheduled task information.
Finish by
In this field, indicate the date for the completion of the task.

Important
Mark this option to highlight this task. When selected, it will appear next to the task.
scheduled, in column I, the icon .

338
 Access Permissions
Scheduled tasks can be shared with User Groups, created in
basicRegistration. If you do not want to share certain tasks, only the person who
registered and the employees who are superusers will have access.
To release access for the groups:
• Select the group you want to share the tasks with;
• Click on the icon to add the group, in the right panel of the screen.
To exclude access from the groups:
• Select the group you want to delete in the box on the right side;
• Click on the icon to withdraw.
Record (F2)
Click this button to save the registered task.
Clear (F5)
Click this button to clear the screen and record a new task.
Turn off
Click this button to delete the task currently being viewed.

Mark as Completed
This option allows you to mark the tasks that have already been completed.
To mark as completed
• Select one or more lines of tasks that have been completed;
• Click the Mark as completed button;
• In the left column of the row, the icon will appear. and the line with the name of the task
it will appear crossed out.

To unmark a task that has already been marked as completed

• Select one or more lines of tasks that have been completed;
• Click the button Mark as completed;
• In the left column of the line, the icon and the line with the name will no longer be displayed.
the task will not appear struck out.
Turn off
It is used to delete one or more selected tasks.

Find
In this field, type the title or part of the description to be searched.

Search (F9)
By clicking this button, the system will search through the fields: Title and Description.
To use the Search:
• In the field, find type the word (or part of it);
• Select an Area or leave All;
• Then click on the Search button (F9);
• All tasks related to the typed word will be shown.

339
E-mail

340
Email Server Configuration
On this screen, you can enter the email server data for sending emails through the system.
The data provided on this screen must be confirmed with your email provider.

General (Ctrl+F2)
In this tab, enter the server data and the email.
Configuration: In this field, enter the name of the email configuration to be identified in
moment of shipment.

Configuration
In this panel, provide the provider's data that will be used at the time of sending.
email. The completion of this form is mandatory.
Attention: The data in this table should be confirmed with your email provider.
Server for sending (SMTP)
In this field, enter the name or the IP address of your email server. It is usually
[Link].
Name
In this field, enter the name of the person responsible for the email that will be used as the sender. It can be
to use the company name or the employee's name.
email for Response
Enter the sender's email address in this field. It can be filled in with the email of the
employee or with the company's general email.

Format
In this context, select the format you wish to use for sending the email. You can select
among the options:
HTML format
The email text will be in HTML format, according to international standards.
HTML format with header image
Select this option to include an image in the email header, the text will be included
logo below the image. The image can be inserted, for example, to serve as a paper.
company letterhead.
To insert the image:
• Click the Select Image button;
• Locate the image saved on your computer.
• Then click the Save button (F2).

Authentication (Ctrl+F3)
Most email servers require authentication for sending. Check with your
email provider and if necessary fill in the details as explained below.
My email server requires authentication
Select this option if your server requires authentication for sending.

341
 Type
Select in this field the way the username and password will be sent to the server.
Send the user data and password to the server in text format.
CRAM-MD5: Send the username and password data to the server encrypted. For use
In this format, the server must be compatible.
User
In this field, enter the username that will be used by the server for authentication.
This field can be filled with the email or a registered user with the server.
Password
In this field, enter the password that will be used for email authentication on the server.

Advanced (Ctrl+F4)
In this tab, you can configure the addresses that will receive copies of the sent emails and also
inform the email sending port.
Send copies
You may use the following options:
Cc: In this field, type the email address to which you want to send a copy of
e-mail.
Bcc (Blind Carbon Copy): In this field, enter the email address to which you want to send a
blind copy.
Attention: You can send a copy of the emails to more than one address. To do this, you can
separate them using semicolon (;) without space, semicolon (;) and space, comma (,)
without space, comma (,) and space.
Other settings
In this panel, configure the port for sending email.
Ports for sending email: In this field, enter the port number that is used by
email server for sending. Usually port 25 is used.
My Server Requires a Secure Connection (SSL): This option should be checked if the
email server requires a secure SLL connection.
Firewall (Ctrl+F5)
This tab serves to inform the type of firewall that is being used as protection for
computer.
I am using a firewall: Select this option if you are using a firewall.
Server: In this field, enter the name of the machine (server) that has the firewall.
configured.
Type: In this field, select the type of firewall that is being used on the machine (server).
Port: In this field, enter the port number for the connection to the firewall.
My firewall requires authentication: Select this option if the connection to the firewall requires it.
an authentication for sending.
User: In this field, enter the name of the user that will be used for authentication.
firewall.
Password: In this field, enter the user's password used for authentication on the firewall.
Attention: Check with the network administrator which firewall is in place.
being used for filling out this screen.

342
Record and test
Click this button to save and test the provided settings for sending the email. Upon
Clicking this button will send an email to the address provided in the General tab (Ctrl +F2).

343
Email Layout Configuration
On this screen, you can configure or edit the email layouts that will be used by the screens.
To open this screen:
• Select the moduleSettings;
• Click on the email menu, in the Email layout settings option.
How to create an email layout
The layouts will be configured for each screen that allows sending emails. At the time of
shipment, only the layouts corresponding to the screen will be listed.

Fabric
In this field, select the screen for which you want to configure the new email layout. You will be able to
select the screens of Quotation, Documents, Billing system, Sales / Outputs and Inputs.
Header / Footer
In this tab, you can configure the texts that will be inserted in the header and footer of the layout.
the email.
Email layout text formatting
Use these options to format the text, specifying the font type and size, alignment.
of the text and insert markers.
You can choose from the following options:
Sources: Click on the arrow and select the desired font.
Font size: Click the arrow and select the desired size.
Font model: You can select for the font to be bold, italic, or underlined.
Model or Type of text: You can choose for the text to be aligned to the left,
right, centered or justified.
Markers: You can use the markers for the text. Example: (·)
Numbering: You can use numbering for the text. Example: 1., 2., 3..
Header
In this box, type the text that will appear in the header of the layout, that is, at the beginning of the email.
Header 2
In this box, type the text that will appear in the body of the layout, that is, in the middle of the email.
Footer
In this box, type what will appear in the footer of the email layout, that is, at the end of the email.

System Fields
In this tab, you can choose the available fields in the system's database to be
included in the header, body, and footer of the email layout. The fields will be shown from
according to the option selected in the Screen field.

Quotes
Select the options you want to insert in the email layout for sending a Purchase Quote
of goods.
Current Date: Select this option to insert the current date of the email sending.
Supplier name: Select this option to enter the supplier's name.

344
Supplier address: Select this option to enter the supplier's address.
City / State of the Supplier: Select this option to enter the city and state of the
supplier.
Supplier Phones: Select this option to insert the registered phones of
supplier.
CNPJ / Supplier Registration: Select this option to enter the CNPJ and the State Registration
from the supplier.

Documents
Select the options you want to include in the email layout for sending documents.
Title: Select this option to insert the title of the document in the email.
Source: Select this option to insert the document's source in the email.
Destination: Select this option to insert the document's destination in the email.
Type: Select this option to enter the type of document in the email.
Class: Select this option to insert the document class in the email.
Summary: Select this option to insert the text provided in the keyword/summary field
from the screen Document in the email.

Billing System
Select the options you want to include in the email layout for sending billing to
clients.
Current Date: Select this option to insert the current date of sending the email.
Client name: Select this option to enter the client's name.
Invoice sequence: Select this option to enter the sequence numbers of the
invoices.
Installments: Select this option to enter the installment numbers.
Due Date of Invoices: Select this option to enter the due date of the invoices.
Invoice Delay Days: Select this option to enter the days of delay for the invoices.
Original Invoice Amount: Select this option to enter the original amount of the invoices, without
the charging of interest and fine.
Updated Invoice Amount: Select this option to enter the updated amount of the
invoices, with the charging of interest and fines.

Sales / Outputs
Select the options you want to include in the email layout for sending the outputs.
Operation: Select this option to enter the name of the exit operation.
Sequence: Select this option to enter the sequence number of the output.
ICMS percentage: Select this option to enter the percentage of ICMS for the sale.
IPI percentage: Select this option to enter the IPI percentage for the output.
Discount Percentage: Select this option to enter the discount percentage for the output.
CNPJ / Client Registration: Select this option to enter the CNPJ and the state registration.
of the client.
Customer address: Select this option to enter the customer's address.
Entries
Select the options you want to insert into the email layout for sending the entries.

345
 Operation: Select this option to enter the input operation.
Sequence: Select this option to enter the sequence number of the entries.
ICMS Percentage: Select this option to enter the ICMS percentage of the entry.
IPI percentage: Select this option to enter the IPI percentage of the entries.
Discount Percentage: Select this option to enter the discount percentage of the
entrance.

How to open an email layout

You can open an email layout configured to check or edit the existing data in it.
Fabric
In this field, select the screen for which you want to check the configured email layout. You will be able to.
check and edit the layouts configured for the Quote, Documents, System screens
billing, Sales / Outflows and Inflows.
Configuration
In this field, you can check the available layouts for each selected screen.
The configured email layouts can be edited or deleted.
Save Configuration
Click this button to save the email layout configuration.

Clear
Click this button to clear the screen with the email layout settings without saving them.
changes.

Turn off setting

Click this button to delete an email layout setting.

346
Email Maintenance
This screen is used to delete old emails sent by the system, which are stored in
database.

e-mails (Ctrl+F2)
In this tab, you can check the emails that have been sent by employees through the system.
Configuration
In this field, all the configurations created on the Server Configuration screen will be listed.
email, you will be able to select a specific setting to check the sent emails.
Employee
In this field, select the name of the employee who sent the emails. The superuser will be able to
select the employee you wish to check and delete the sent emails or select
All to list the emails sent by all employees.
emails
You can check the following information about the sent emails.
Code: This column shows the code created for the sent email.
Employee: This column shows the name of the employee who sent the email.
This column shows the email sending date.
Time: This column shows the time of sending the email.
Configuration: This column shows the name of the email server configuration.
Recipient: This column shows the email address to which it was sent.
Subject: This column shows the Subject of the email.

Delete selected
Click this button to delete the selected emails.
To delete the email:
• Select the desired email;
• To delete more than one email, press the Ctrl or Shift key;
• Then click the Delete selected button.
View email (F9)
Click this button to check the email details. The data on this screen is for only
consultation.
To verify the email:
• Select the desired email;
• Then click the button View email or press F9.
• The following information will be shown:
Code: Shows the code created for the sent email.
Employee: Shows the name of the employee who sent the email.
Shows the date of email sending.
Time: Shows the time the email was sent.
Configuration: Displays the name of the email server configuration.
Recipient: Shows the email address to which it was sent.
Attachments: Shows the files that were attached to the email.

347
 Subject: Show the subject of the email.
Mensagem:Mostra a mensagem enviada pelo funcionário.

Turn Off by Criteria (Ctrl+F3)

In this tab, you can delete emails using the following criteria:
Configuration: Select this option to delete emails by the server's configuration.
Email created. All configuration names will be listed. In the adjacent field, select the
desired configuration.
Employee: Select this option to delete the emails by employee. In the field that side
select the name of the employee whose data you wish to delete.
Select this option to delete emails by period. In the adjacent field, select the
period you wish to delete the emails.
Attention: You can select more than one criterion to delete the emails.
Turn off
Click this button to delete the emails, after the selected choice. In the footer of the screen will be
showed how many emails are left.

348
Index
Shop Control 8
About IdealSoft and Shop Control 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Comparative Table between the Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sizing your server............................. 9
Processor speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Amount of RAM on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installing Shop Control 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
What will be installed with Shop Control 8.
Installation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
To configure your network with the TCP/IP protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting up the server.......................... 15
Setting up the Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Configuring the network station via the internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Backup Program............................... 18
Differences in the backup procedure between the versions .......... 18
Making the Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Test Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Restore Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Saving Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Activity log .................................................... 20
Initialize the backup program at Windows startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Usage tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Help
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Floppy disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Group columns ............................................................ 23
Functions ......................................................... 24
Source Button............................ 25
Search Registration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Client / Supplier Search Screen.................................................. 27
Configure this Screen.............................27
Find Client / Supplier................................. 28
Search (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Search Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Product Search Screen................................................... 29
Configure this Screen......................... 29
Product Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Employee Registration 32
Apelido . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Password............................................... 32
Registration (Ctrl+F1) .................. 32
Others (Ctrl+F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Photo (Ctrl+F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Security.................................. 34
Properties .......................................................... 34
Employee Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Others...................................................36
Permissions (Ctrl+F3) .................................................... 36
Advanced (Ctrl+F4)
Access to the System.................................................. 38
System login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Branch Exchange 38
User Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Log Report.................39
Open and Close Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
To open the day......................................... 41
To close the day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
 Basic Registrations.................................................. 42
Operation of the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Regarding products.............................................. 43
Registration of Classes, Subclasses, Groups, and Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Manufacturer Registration 44
Color Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Size Registration 44
User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Bank Registration 45
Bank Account Registration
Group Registration for Direct Mail............................46
Customer / Supplier Class Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Currency Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Registration of Quotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tax Classification Registration ...................... 47
Message Registration for the Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Credit Card / Agreement Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Protest Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Department Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Cost Center Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Registration of Types of Contacts Made................. 49
Cash Register Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Service Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Freight Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Registration
Registration of Tax Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Registering the Tax Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
General (Ctrl + F2)..........................................................53
Advanced (Crtl + F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
States / ICMS ....................................................... 56
Entry Operations....................................................57
Properties of the Operation.......................57
Tipo da Operação . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Taxes
Ticket / note ................................ 58
Advanced
Output Operations......................................................61
Properties of the Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
State / Interstate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tipo da Operação . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Taxes ...................................................... 63
Ticket / note .............................................................. 63
Advanced ................................................... 65
Product Registration.................................66
Configure this Screen......................................... 66
Price Tables 67
Fields to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Registering product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Additions (Ctrl+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Other options .................................. 73
Registration of Clients and Suppliers .............................. 76
Set up this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Registering Customer / Supplier...
Registration (Ctrl+F2)...............................................78
Additions (Ctrl+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Additional 2 (Ctrl+F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Contacts Made (Ctrl + F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Credit (Ctrl F6)......................................82
Information (F10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Search (F6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Options.................................................... 85
Photo 86
 Documents ................................................. 86
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Credit Sheets for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Cadastro de Cliente /Fornecedor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Message for Analysis...
Pending Credit Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Direct Mailing - Record Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
General
Contacts 89
Purchases................................ 90
Products.........................................................90
Type of Products 91
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Direct Mail Maintenance... 92
Updating...................... 92
Sending email and Printing Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Texto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Send email / Print letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Prices
Create Price Table............................................................97
Selling Price Table............................97
Cost Price..................97
Average Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Cost Tables / Average per Branch......................................................... 98
Branch
Cost Calculation....................... 99
Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
For the routines of selling price calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Copy cost from another product (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Copy cost to other products (F3) ............................. 101
Calculate Selling Prices - Simplified..............103
Calculate Selling Price - Complete...........................104
Selections
Table ................................................ 105
Configure Price Table ................................................. 107
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Accepted Payment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Change Commission.............................. 107
Desconto Máximo (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Divide Printing 108
Number of Installments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Payment Plan
Change Prices............................................. 110
General (Ctrl+F2)
Selections (Ctrl+F3)...................................................... 110
Research (Ctrl+F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Advanced (Ctrl+F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Show Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
How to change the product price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Clear changes (F5) ........................................ 111
Save changes (F2).
Price Releases........................................112
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Product........................................112
Preço . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Price Remark.................113
Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Change.................................................................. 113
Value
Table. Original. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Tab. Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Options
 Example of Changes.................................................. 114
Selections (Ctrl+F3)........................................................114
Only products purchased from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Research (Ctrl+F4) 114
Reschedule (F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Price Rebranding for Multiple Tables..............116
Turn off Price Table....................119
Print Prices..................................................120
Configuration (Ctrl+F2) .......................................... 120
Messages (Ctrl+F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Options (Ctrl+F3) .................................................. 121
Purchasing Movement
Purchase Rate......................................................... 124
Start quote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Read Quotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Purchase Order 128
Making the Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Transform this Order into Purchase... 128
Partial Receipt of this Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Create Partial Purchase 129
Order Summary ............................................................ 129
Accounts Payable Forecast
Entry 130
Setting up this screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Visualization .......................... 131
Chart of Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Custo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Import Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
How to Make a Purchase 134
Operation........................................................................134
Supplier..........................................................134
Product.......................................................134
Freight 136
Search Entries (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Options 138
Pay (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Calculation of Selling Cost.................................. 142
Sales Price Table...................................................142
Calculate the Cost and Selling price using the Parameters .......... 142
When saving the changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Payment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Resumo (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Money (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Parceling (F7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cheques (F8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Credit (F9) .................................................. 145
Movement - Sales
Sales / Outputs 148
Configure this Screen........................................................... 148
General
Additional Remarks 149
Products ................... 149
Services ................................................. 150
Estoque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Operation... 151
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Client 154
Prices / Discounts
Receipt..................................155
Upon entering the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Exchanges .................................................... 157
 Import Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Impressions..............................159
Frete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Packing list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
How to Make a Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Client 161
General Sequence .............................................................. 162
Product.......... 163
Services (F6) ............................ 165
Observações (Alt+B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Discounts (Alt+D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Totals (Alt+T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
View Total in Other Tables Alt+P...................167
Record Payment Methods (Shift+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Send by email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Search Outputs (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Shipping Information (Alt+R)........................... 170
Shift+F7 - Open Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Turn Off Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Deactivate Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Documents ............................................................. 170
Receipt Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Summary (F3)
Money / Coupons / Account (F6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Parceling (F7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Checks (F8) ............................................................................. 172
Cards (F9) ................................................................................................... 172
Credit (F10) .............................................. 173
Miscellaneous Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configure this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
To receive the sale ...
Future Delivery Sale
Making the Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
To make the delivery of the products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
View History
Print Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Sales Budget.............................177
To Make a Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Transform Budget into Sale ................................. 177
Keeps Original Budget and Creates a Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Check / Inform Shipping Data of Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Outputs / Sales (Ctrl+F2).................178
Bulk Shipment (Ctrl+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Movement Other Ways Out
Goods Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
To make a reservation...
Open Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Simplified Exchange
Starting the Simplified Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Confirming Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Order Launch ......................... 184
Configure this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Order Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Routines to Update Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Order Distribution Report .................................. 186
Supplier Order Report..............................................................186
Pending Orders Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Check Stock with Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Client Notification Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
General Report .......................................................... 188
Consignment Movement
 Loan Outputs.............................. 190
To make the loan of outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Set up this Screen...........................................190
Exit Loan Settlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selection............................... 191
Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Entry Loan................................................... 196
To make the loan of entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Configure this screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Adjustment of Down Payment Loan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Stock
Inventory Count................................. 203
Start Counting (F3) / Counting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Read Count / Existing Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Transfer between Branches........................................ 207
Start Transfer (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Read Transfer (F4).................................................... 209
Receive Transfer from Another Branch (F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Transfer / Receive Transfer from another Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Work Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Service Order Menu / Service Order Settings . . . . . . . . . . 210
Service Order Screen / Configure this screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Scheduling 211
How to Place a Service Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Budget......................213
Signal 213
Scheduling (F6)......................................... 214
Find (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Search (F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Search Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Maintenance of Service Order............................216
Configure this Screen.............................. 216
Find (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Details (Ctrl+F2).................................................. 217
Reported (Ctrl+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Services (Ctrl+F5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Import Services (Alt+F6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Financial
Account Plan Registration
See Chart of Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Cash Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Move Cash and Check Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Move the Cash.
Money (F6) ..................................................... 226
Check (F7) .......................................................... 228
Pre-check (F8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Debit Card (F9) ............................................... 231
Credit Card (F10) .......................................................... 231
Vale (F11) ............................................................................. 232
Finalizing the Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Smart Menu.............................................233
Bank Transactions 234
Configure this Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Options .......... 234
How to register a bank transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Search (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Bank Account Transfers........................239
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
For the account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Transfer of the Account to the Cashier.... 240
 Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
For the cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Unidentified Account... 241
Identifying an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Launches Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Selected Bank Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Accounts Payable Releases..................... 243
Configure this Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Options ................. 243
How to register a new account payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
How to consult and change an account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Smart Menu.............................................. 246
Accounts Payable Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Set up this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Find Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Payment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Outstanding Payables............................... 251
Value
Setting Up the Accounts Receivable Launch Screen...
General ........................................................... 253
Setting up the accounts receivable maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
General
Installment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Checks
Cards.......................................................255
Release of Accounts Receivable............................256
Configurar essa Tela. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Options ........................................................ 256
How to register a new account receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
How to Consult and Change an Account...............257
Billing Information (CTRL+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Accounts Receivable Maintenance................... 260
Configure this Screen.........................260
Search for Options (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Receiving Information 261
Search for the Installment Number (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Group Accounts..............................................262
Find Accounts / Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Account Information to be Generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Duplicate Discount ........................................... 264
Configure this Screen...
Find Accounts / Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Exchange Information........................................263
Setting Up Billing Steps............................................. 266
Branch
Type ..................................................... 266
Collection Maintenance...........................................269
Pendencies today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Protests not received.............................. 269
Titles to Withdraw from Protest.........................................269
Situation 269
Accounts Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
History of Previous Steps
Extend Collection Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Go straight to step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Card Release................................................ 274
Options .................................................. 274
How to consult and change a card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Search Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Card / Agreement Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Configure this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Find Cards / Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Receiving Information 278
 Combine into a Batch 279
Find Cards / Search options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Check Issuance ..................................... 281
Set up this screen................. 281
Options 281
How to Write a Check .......................................................... 281
Returned Checks.................................................. 285
Configure this Screen...................................... 285
Encontrar Cheques / Opções de Busca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Receipt Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Discount / Check Custody ........................................ 287
Configure this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Discount Checks (F3)...........................................287
Receiving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Custodial Checks (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Receiving Information 288
Reduction of Discounted Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Find Checks / Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Receiving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Returned Custodied / Discounted Cheques
Set up this Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Find Checks / Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Information on Returned Checks.......................... 293
Client Account Launch - Notebook......................................295
Options
To make an entry in the customer account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Customer Account Maintenance...........................................296
Configure this Screen............................................... 296
Finding the Notebook Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Tipo de Baixa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Date Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Configure this Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
How to Close the Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Customer Credit Release with the Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Configure this Screen.............................302
How to Make a Launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Search (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Smart Menu
Company Credit Launch with Supplier .................... 305
Configure this Screen........................................305
Como Fazer um Lançamento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Search (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Smart Menu...........................................307
Completing the Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Receipt of a Selected Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Receiving several bills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Holidays............................................... 311
To inform about the company's and banking holidays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Settings
Usuários Ativos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
My Menu............................................................ 314
To choose the screen of My Menu:............................... 314
Branch Registration
Company Tax Data........................................315
About rounding values...
Others .................................................. 315
Settings................................316
Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Counters...................................................318
Images ................................................... 318
Layouts
Message by City / State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Office
Agenda................................................................321
Creating a Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
How to Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Smart Menu......................................................... 322
Documents......................................................... 323
Save Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Finding Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Send by email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Smart Menu..................... 325
Document Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Documents (Ctrl+F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Summary (Ctrl+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Mensagem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
View messages...
Mensagem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Nova (F5) ................................................................ 328
Responder 328
Respond to All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Forward......................329
Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Trash
Turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Smart Menu
Notes................................. 332
Título . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Description 332
Access Permissions ................................................. 332
Fixed Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Encrypt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Commitment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
To schedule an appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Permission for my appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Visualization (CTRL+F2)
Groupings (Ctrl+F3) .................................................. 337
To Do..................................................... 338
New (F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Mark as Completed..............................339
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
E-mail
Email Server Configuration.................................341
General (Ctrl+F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Authentication (Ctrl+F3)......................................... 341
Advanced (Ctrl+F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Email Layout Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
System Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
How to open an email layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Clear
Turning off Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Email maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
e-mails (Ctrl+F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Turn Off by Criteria (Ctrl+F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348